Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 1057

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System

V100R006C10
Maintenance Guide
Issue 01
Date 2013-12-15
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.






Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX RTN 950 V100R006C10
iManager U2000 V200R001C00

Intended Audience
This document provides the guidelines to maintaining the OptiX RTN 950. It also describes the
alarms and performance events that are required for troubleshooting during the maintenance.
This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineer
l Data configuration engineer
l System maintenance engineer
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,
which if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide About This Document
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level
of risk, which if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,
which if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
degradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a
problem or save time.

Provides additional information to emphasize
or supplement important points of the main
text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in
boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.
Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in
Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italics.
[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide About This Document
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
Convention Description
[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }
*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles
are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"
signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C10
This document is the first issue of the V100R006C10 product version.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide About This Document
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Safety Precautions.........................................................................................................................1
1.1 General Safety Precautions.............................................................................................................................................2
1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols.........................................................................................................................................3
1.3 Electrical Safety..............................................................................................................................................................4
1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas.....................................................................................................................................7
1.5 Storage Batteries.............................................................................................................................................................7
1.6 Radiation.........................................................................................................................................................................9
1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers.......................................................................................................................................9
1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure.........................................................................................................................................11
1.6.3 Forbidden Areas........................................................................................................................................................11
1.6.4 Laser..........................................................................................................................................................................11
1.6.5 Microwave.................................................................................................................................................................12
1.7 Working at Heights.......................................................................................................................................................13
1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects.............................................................................................................................................13
1.7.2 Using Ladders............................................................................................................................................................14
1.8 Mechanical Safety........................................................................................................................................................16
1.9 Other Precautions.........................................................................................................................................................17
2 Notices for High-Risk Operations...........................................................................................19
2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.............................................................................................................20
2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper...............................................................................................................................22
2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cables...............................................................................................................................23
2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board.................................................................................................................................24
3 Routine Maintenance..................................................................................................................26
4 Network Monitoring...................................................................................................................29
4.1 Checking the NE Status................................................................................................................................................30
4.2 Checking the Board Status...........................................................................................................................................31
4.3 Alarm and Performance Data Query............................................................................................................................32
4.3.1 Browsing Current Alarms..........................................................................................................................................32
4.3.2 Browsing Historical Alarms......................................................................................................................................37
4.3.3 Browsing Current Performance Events.....................................................................................................................40
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide Contents
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
4.3.4 Browsing Historical Performance Events..................................................................................................................42
4.3.5 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records...............................................................................43
4.3.6 Browsing UAT Events...............................................................................................................................................45
4.4 Microwave Link Performance Query...........................................................................................................................46
4.4.1 Querying the Historical Transmit Power and Receive Power...................................................................................46
4.4.2 Querying the SNR Values of a Radio Link...............................................................................................................47
4.4.3 Browsing Current Performance Events of the radio link...........................................................................................48
4.4.4 Browsing Historical Performance Data of a Radio Link...........................................................................................50
4.5 Ethernet Performance Query........................................................................................................................................51
4.5.1 Browsing Current Ethernet Performance..................................................................................................................51
4.5.2 Configuring Ethernet Performance Threshold-Crossing Parameters........................................................................55
4.5.3 Setting Parameters for Monitoring Historical Ethernet Performance........................................................................58
4.5.4 Browsing Historical Ethernet Performance Data......................................................................................................59
4.6 Ethernet Port Traffic Monitoring..................................................................................................................................62
4.6.1 Setting Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports....................................................62
4.6.2 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization............................................................................63
4.7 Long-term Network Performance Monitoring.............................................................................................................65
4.7.1 Creating a Performance Monitoring Template..........................................................................................................65
4.7.2 Creating a Performance Monitoring Instance............................................................................................................67
4.7.3 Browsing the Real-Time Data of a Performance Monitoring Instance.....................................................................71
4.7.4 Browsing the Historical Data of a Performance Monitoring Instance......................................................................72
4.8 Report Query................................................................................................................................................................73
4.8.1 Querying the Microwave Link Information Report...................................................................................................73
4.8.2 Querying the Network-wide License Report.............................................................................................................74
4.8.3 Querying the Microwave Configuration Report........................................................................................................76
4.8.4 Querying the Board Information Report...................................................................................................................77
4.8.5 Querying the Board Manufacturing Information Report...........................................................................................80
4.8.6 Querying the ODU Information Report.....................................................................................................................81
4.9 Alarm and Performance Management Setting..............................................................................................................82
4.9.1 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs..........................................................................................82
4.9.2 Setting Severity and Auto Reporting Status of Alarms.............................................................................................83
4.9.3 Suppressing Alarms for Monitored Objects..............................................................................................................84
4.9.4 Suppressing Alarms for NEs.....................................................................................................................................85
4.9.5 Reversing Alarms for Service Ports..........................................................................................................................86
4.9.6 Setting Trigger Conditions of AIS Insertion.............................................................................................................87
4.9.7 Setting Trigger Conditions of UNEQ Insertion.........................................................................................................87
4.9.8 Setting Bit Error Thresholds for Service Ports..........................................................................................................88
4.9.9 Setting Monitoring and Auto-Report Status of Performance Events........................................................................89
4.9.10 Setting Performance Thresholds..............................................................................................................................90
4.9.11 Resetting Performance Registers.............................................................................................................................90
5 Troubleshooting..........................................................................................................................92
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide Contents
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
5.1 General Troubleshooting Procedure.............................................................................................................................94
5.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruptions.........................................................................................................................96
5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.................................................................................................................................103
5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services............................................................................................................110
5.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications.......................................................................................................................115
5.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH Equipment......................................................................................119
5.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH Equipment......................................................................................123
5.8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults........................................................................................................126
5.9 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH Plane....................................................................................134
5.10 Troubleshooting MPLS Tunnels..............................................................................................................................140
5.11 Troubleshooting CES Services.................................................................................................................................144
5.12 Troubleshooting ATM Services...............................................................................................................................149
5.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs................................................................................................153
5.14 Troubleshooting L3VPN Services............................................................................................................................160
5.15 Troubleshooting DCN Faults....................................................................................................................................163
5.16 Troubleshooting Orderwire Faults............................................................................................................................168
5.17 Typical Cases............................................................................................................................................................170
5.17.1 Transient Link Unavailability Due to Multi-path Fading......................................................................................170
5.17.2 Transoceanic Link Transient Unavailability Due to Insufficient Height Difference between Diversity Antennas
..........................................................................................................................................................................................172
5.17.3 Link Unavailability Due to Inter-building Reflection...........................................................................................173
5.17.4 Unidirectional Link Availability Due to Interference...........................................................................................174
5.17.5 Bit Errors on Microwave Links.............................................................................................................................175
5.17.6 Poor Reliability Due to Network Planning Errors.................................................................................................176
6 Part Replacement.......................................................................................................................178
6.1 Removing a Board......................................................................................................................................................180
6.2 Inserting a Board........................................................................................................................................................183
6.3 Replacing the SDH Optical Interface Board..............................................................................................................185
6.4 Replacing the Channelized STM-1 Processing Board...............................................................................................186
6.5 Replacing the PDH Interface Board...........................................................................................................................187
6.6 Replacing the Smart E1 Interface Board....................................................................................................................188
6.7 Replacing the Ethernet Interface Board......................................................................................................................189
6.8 Replacing the IF Board...............................................................................................................................................190
6.9 Replacing the CF Card...............................................................................................................................................192
6.10 Replacing the System Control, Switching and Timing Board..................................................................................193
6.11 Replacing the Auxiliary Board.................................................................................................................................198
6.12 Replacing the Fan Board..........................................................................................................................................198
6.13 Replacing the Power Board......................................................................................................................................200
6.14 Replacing the SFP....................................................................................................................................................202
6.15 Replacing the ODU..................................................................................................................................................203
6.16 Replacing the IF Cable.............................................................................................................................................205
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide Contents
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
6.17 Erasing Data in the Repair Parts...............................................................................................................................206
6.17.1 Board Storage Media.............................................................................................................................................206
6.17.2 Removing the CF Card..........................................................................................................................................207
6.17.3 Formatting the Flash Memory...............................................................................................................................208
7 Database Backup and Restoration.........................................................................................210
7.1 NE Database...............................................................................................................................................................211
7.2 Backing Up the Database Manually...........................................................................................................................212
7.3 Setting the Database Backup Policy...........................................................................................................................214
7.3.1 Setting the User-Defined Backup Policy.................................................................................................................214
7.3.2 Enable the Backup Policy of the Device.................................................................................................................216
7.3.3 Disable the Backup Policy of the Device................................................................................................................217
7.4 Restoring the Database by NMS................................................................................................................................218
7.5 Recovering Databases from a USB Flash Drive........................................................................................................221
8 Common Maintenance Operations........................................................................................224
8.1 Microwave Link Troubleshooting..............................................................................................................................226
8.1.1 Monitoring Radio Link Indicators...........................................................................................................................226
8.1.2 Scanning Interfering Signals...................................................................................................................................227
8.1.3 Muting/Unmuting an ODU......................................................................................................................................228
8.1.4 Performing a PRBS Test for the IF Board...............................................................................................................229
8.2 Ethernet Service Troubleshooting..............................................................................................................................232
8.2.1 Querying the Attributes of an Ethernet Port............................................................................................................232
8.2.2 Searching for Service Paths Based on VLANs.......................................................................................................233
8.2.3 Searching for Service Paths Based on MAC Addresses..........................................................................................235
8.2.4 Checking the Layer 2 Protocols Used by Ethernet Services...................................................................................236
8.2.5 Performing Intelligent Service Fault Diagnosis for Ethernet Services....................................................................237
8.2.6 Performing E-LAN Service Loopback Detection....................................................................................................239
8.2.7 Monitoring Ethernet Service Performance and Traffic Volume Based on Service Paths.......................................240
8.2.8 Querying Ethernet Service QoS Configurations Based on Service Paths...............................................................242
8.2.9 Monitoring Ethernet Packets Through Port Mirroring............................................................................................244
8.2.10 Using the Ethernet Test Frames.............................................................................................................................246
8.2.11 Checking L3VPN Service Performance Using NQA............................................................................................248
8.3 TDM/CES Service Troubleshooting..........................................................................................................................255
8.3.1 Setting the On/Off State of the Laser......................................................................................................................255
8.3.2 Setting the ALS Function........................................................................................................................................256
8.3.3 Performing a PRBS Test for the Smart E1 Processing Board.................................................................................257
8.3.4 Performing a PRBS Test for the Tributary Board...................................................................................................260
8.3.5 Querying the Impedance of an E1 Channel.............................................................................................................263
8.4 Software Loopback.....................................................................................................................................................264
8.4.1 Setting Loopback for the SDH Optical Interface Board..........................................................................................264
8.4.2 Setting Loopback for the Channelized STM-1 Processing Board...........................................................................266
8.4.3 Setting Loopback for the Tributary Board..............................................................................................................268
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide Contents
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
viii
8.4.4 Setting a Loopback for the Smart E1 Processing Board.........................................................................................269
8.4.5 Setting a Loopback for the Packet-plane Ethernet Interface Board........................................................................271
8.4.6 Setting Loopbacks for the EOS/EoPDH-Plane Ethernet Interface Board...............................................................273
8.4.7 Setting Loopback for the IF Board..........................................................................................................................275
8.4.8 Setting Software Loopback for the NE....................................................................................................................278
8.4.9 Setting Software Loopback for the Microwave Link..............................................................................................280
8.4.10 Locating a Fault by Performing Loopback Operations.........................................................................................280
8.5 Hardware Loopback...................................................................................................................................................282
8.6 Reset...........................................................................................................................................................................282
8.6.1 Cold Reset................................................................................................................................................................282
8.6.2 Warm Reset.............................................................................................................................................................283
8.7 Setting the Automatic Release Function....................................................................................................................284
8.8 Querying Power Consumption of Boards...................................................................................................................284
8.9 Switching the System Control Unit and the Cross-Connect Unit..............................................................................285
8.10 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters.................................................................................................................286
8.10.1 Cleaning Fiber Connectors by Using Cartridge Cleaners.....................................................................................286
8.10.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors by Using Lens Tissue................................................................................................288
8.10.3 Cleaning Fiber Adapters by Using Optical Cleaning Sticks.................................................................................289
A Alarm Reference.......................................................................................................................291
A.1 Alarm List (in Alphabetical Order)...........................................................................................................................292
A.2 Alarm List (Classified by Logical Boards)................................................................................................................309
A.2.1 AUX........................................................................................................................................................................310
A.2.2 CQ1.........................................................................................................................................................................311
A.2.3 CSH.........................................................................................................................................................................312
A.2.4 CSHU/CSHUA.......................................................................................................................................................314
A.2.5 CST.........................................................................................................................................................................316
A.2.6 EFP8.......................................................................................................................................................................317
A.2.7 EG4.........................................................................................................................................................................317
A.2.8 EG4P.......................................................................................................................................................................318
A.2.9 EM6T......................................................................................................................................................................318
A.2.10 EM6TA.................................................................................................................................................................319
A.2.11 EM6F....................................................................................................................................................................319
A.2.12 EM6FA.................................................................................................................................................................320
A.2.13 EMS6....................................................................................................................................................................320
A.2.14 FAN......................................................................................................................................................................321
A.2.15 IF1.........................................................................................................................................................................321
A.2.16 IFU2......................................................................................................................................................................322
A.2.17 IFX2......................................................................................................................................................................322
A.2.18 ISU2......................................................................................................................................................................323
A.2.19 ISV3......................................................................................................................................................................324
A.2.20 ISX2......................................................................................................................................................................325
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide Contents
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
A.2.21 ML1/MD1.............................................................................................................................................................326
A.2.22 ODU......................................................................................................................................................................326
A.2.23 PIU........................................................................................................................................................................326
A.2.24 PMU......................................................................................................................................................................327
A.2.25 SL1D/SL1DA.......................................................................................................................................................327
A.2.26 SP3S/SP3D...........................................................................................................................................................327
A.2.27 TCU......................................................................................................................................................................328
A.3 Alarms and Handling Procedures..............................................................................................................................328
A.3.1 A_LOC...................................................................................................................................................................328
A.3.2 ACR_LOCK_FAIL................................................................................................................................................329
A.3.3 ALM_E1RAI..........................................................................................................................................................330
A.3.4 ALM_GFP_dCSF...................................................................................................................................................331
A.3.5 ALM_GFP_dLFD...................................................................................................................................................332
A.3.6 ALM_IMA_LIF......................................................................................................................................................333
A.3.7 ALM_IMA_LODS.................................................................................................................................................335
A.3.8 ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE........................................................................................................................336
A.3.9 ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE........................................................................................................................337
A.3.10 ALM_IMA_RFI...................................................................................................................................................339
A.3.11 AM_DOWNSHIFT..............................................................................................................................................340
A.3.12 APS_FAIL............................................................................................................................................................341
A.3.13 APS_INDI.............................................................................................................................................................343
A.3.14 APS_MANUAL_STOP........................................................................................................................................344
A.3.15 ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELL_EXC....................................................................................................................345
A.3.16 AU_AIS................................................................................................................................................................346
A.3.17 AU_LOP...............................................................................................................................................................347
A.3.18 B1_EXC................................................................................................................................................................348
A.3.19 B1_SD...................................................................................................................................................................350
A.3.20 B2_EXC................................................................................................................................................................352
A.3.21 B2_SD...................................................................................................................................................................355
A.3.22 B3_EXC................................................................................................................................................................357
A.3.23 B3_EXC_VC3......................................................................................................................................................359
A.3.24 B3_SD...................................................................................................................................................................361
A.3.25 B3_SD_VC3.........................................................................................................................................................363
A.3.26 BAT1TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL.............................................................................................................................366
A.3.27 BAT2TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL.............................................................................................................................367
A.3.28 BD_NOT_INSTALLED.......................................................................................................................................368
A.3.29 BD_STATUS........................................................................................................................................................369
A.3.30 BDTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL..................................................................................................................................371
A.3.31 BGPBACKTRANSITION...................................................................................................................................372
A.3.32 BIOS_STATUS....................................................................................................................................................374
A.3.33 BIP_EXC..............................................................................................................................................................374
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide Contents
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
x
A.3.34 BIP_SD.................................................................................................................................................................376
A.3.35 BOOTROM_BAD................................................................................................................................................378
A.3.36 BUS_ERR.............................................................................................................................................................379
A.3.37 CES_ACR_LOCK_ABN.....................................................................................................................................381
A.3.38 CES_APS_INDI...................................................................................................................................................383
A.3.39 CES_APS_MANUAL_STOP..............................................................................................................................385
A.3.40 CES_JTROVR_EXC............................................................................................................................................386
A.3.41 CES_JTRUDR_EXC............................................................................................................................................387
A.3.42 CES_K1_K2_M....................................................................................................................................................388
A.3.43 CES_K2_M...........................................................................................................................................................389
A.3.44 CES_LOSPKT_EXC............................................................................................................................................391
A.3.45 CES_MALPKT_EXC...........................................................................................................................................392
A.3.46 CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC...............................................................................................................................393
A.3.47 CES_RDI..............................................................................................................................................................394
A.3.48 CES_STRAYPKT_EXC......................................................................................................................................395
A.3.49 CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT........................................................................................................................395
A.3.50 CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI...................................................................................................................................396
A.3.51 CFCARD_FAILED..............................................................................................................................................397
A.3.52 CFCARD_OFFLINE............................................................................................................................................398
A.3.53 CHCS....................................................................................................................................................................400
A.3.54 CLK_LOCK_FAIL...............................................................................................................................................401
A.3.55 CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE..................................................................................................................................402
A.3.56 COMMUN_FAIL.................................................................................................................................................404
A.3.57 COM_EXTECC_FULL........................................................................................................................................406
A.3.58 CONFIG_NOSUPPORT......................................................................................................................................406
A.3.59 DBMS_DELETE..................................................................................................................................................409
A.3.60 DBMS_ERROR....................................................................................................................................................409
A.3.61 DBMS_PROTECT_MODE.................................................................................................................................410
A.3.62 DCNSIZE_OVER.................................................................................................................................................411
A.3.63 DDN_LFA............................................................................................................................................................412
A.3.64 DOWN_E1_AIS...................................................................................................................................................413
A.3.65 DROPRATIO_OVER...........................................................................................................................................414
A.3.66 E1_LOC................................................................................................................................................................415
A.3.67 E1_LOS................................................................................................................................................................417
A.3.68 ELAN_SMAC_FLAPPING.................................................................................................................................418
A.3.69 ENVHUM_SENSOR_FAIL.................................................................................................................................419
A.3.70 ENVTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL...............................................................................................................................420
A.3.71 ENVTEMP1_SENSOR_FAIL.............................................................................................................................421
A.3.72 ENVTEMP2_SENSOR_FAIL.............................................................................................................................423
A.3.73 ERPS_IN_PROTECTION....................................................................................................................................424
A.3.74 ETH_APS_LOST.................................................................................................................................................425
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide Contents
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
A.3.75 ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH.........................................................................................................................426
A.3.76 ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL.................................................................................................................................427
A.3.77 ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH..........................................................................................................................428
A.3.78 ETH_AUTO_LINK_DOWN...............................................................................................................................429
A.3.79 ETH_CFM_AIS....................................................................................................................................................430
A.3.80 ETH_CFM_LOC..................................................................................................................................................432
A.3.81 ETH_CFM_MISMERGE.....................................................................................................................................434
A.3.82 ETH_CFM_RDI...................................................................................................................................................437
A.3.83 ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI......................................................................................................................................439
A.3.84 ETH_EFM_DF.....................................................................................................................................................442
A.3.85 ETH_EFM_EVENT.............................................................................................................................................443
A.3.86 ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK.....................................................................................................................................445
A.3.87 ETH_EFM_REMFAULT.....................................................................................................................................446
A.3.88 ETH_LOS.............................................................................................................................................................447
A.3.89 ETH_NO_FLOW.................................................................................................................................................449
A.3.90 ETH_PWR_SUPPLY_FAIL................................................................................................................................450
A.3.91 ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL............................................................................................................................451
A.3.92 ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT.........................................................................................................................452
A.3.93 ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP......................................................................................................................................454
A.3.94 ETHOAM_RMT_SD...........................................................................................................................................455
A.3.95 ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP.....................................................................................................................................457
A.3.96 ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LOOP...........................................................................................................................459
A.3.97 EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS.....................................................................................................................................460
A.3.98 EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT.........................................................................................................................462
A.3.99 EXT_SYNC_LOS................................................................................................................................................463
A.3.100 EXT_TIME_LOC...............................................................................................................................................464
A.3.101 FAN_AGING.....................................................................................................................................................465
A.3.102 FAN_FAIL.........................................................................................................................................................466
A.3.103 FCS_ERR...........................................................................................................................................................467
A.3.104 FDBSIZEALM_ELAN.......................................................................................................................................469
A.3.105 FLOW_OVER....................................................................................................................................................470
A.3.106 GSP_RSVP_NB_AUTH_ERR...........................................................................................................................471
A.3.107 GSP_RSVP_NB_DOWN...................................................................................................................................472
A.3.108 GSP_TNNL_DOWN..........................................................................................................................................473
A.3.109 HARD_BAD.......................................................................................................................................................475
A.3.110 HARD_NONSUPPORT.....................................................................................................................................477
A.3.111 HP_CROSSTR...................................................................................................................................................478
A.3.112 HP_LOM............................................................................................................................................................479
A.3.113 HP_RDI..............................................................................................................................................................480
A.3.114 HP_REI...............................................................................................................................................................481
A.3.115 HP_SLM.............................................................................................................................................................482
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide Contents
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xii
A.3.116 HP_TIM..............................................................................................................................................................483
A.3.117 HP_UNEQ..........................................................................................................................................................484
A.3.118 HPAD_CROSSTR..............................................................................................................................................485
A.3.119 IF_CABLE_OPEN.............................................................................................................................................486
A.3.120 IF_INPWR_ABN...............................................................................................................................................488
A.3.121 IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED............................................................................................................................489
A.3.122 IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN................................................................................................................................490
A.3.123 IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN...............................................................................................................................491
A.3.124 IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH..............................................................................................................................492
A.3.125 IN_PWR_ABN...................................................................................................................................................493
A.3.126 IN_PWR_HIGH.................................................................................................................................................495
A.3.127 IN_PWR_LOW..................................................................................................................................................496
A.3.128 INTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL.................................................................................................................................498
A.3.129 IPFPM_INST_TLP_ERR...................................................................................................................................499
A.3.130 ISISADJACENCYCHANGE.............................................................................................................................500
A.3.131 J0_MM................................................................................................................................................................501
A.3.132 K1_K2_M...........................................................................................................................................................502
A.3.133 K2_M..................................................................................................................................................................504
A.3.134 L3V_TRAP_THRE_EXCEED...........................................................................................................................506
A.3.135 L3V_TRAP_VRF_DOWN.................................................................................................................................507
A.3.136 LAG_BWMM.....................................................................................................................................................508
A.3.137 LAG_DOWN......................................................................................................................................................509
A.3.138 LAG_MEMBER_DOWN..................................................................................................................................510
A.3.139 LAG_PORT_FAIL.............................................................................................................................................512
A.3.140 LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL.....................................................................................................................................514
A.3.141 LAN_LOC..........................................................................................................................................................515
A.3.142 LASER_CLOSED..............................................................................................................................................517
A.3.143 LASER_MOD_ERR...........................................................................................................................................517
A.3.144 LASER_MOD_ERR_EX...................................................................................................................................519
A.3.145 LASER_SHUT...................................................................................................................................................520
A.3.146 LCAS_FOPR......................................................................................................................................................521
A.3.147 LCAS_FOPT......................................................................................................................................................522
A.3.148 LCAS_PLCR......................................................................................................................................................524
A.3.149 LCAS_PLCT......................................................................................................................................................526
A.3.150 LCAS_TLCR......................................................................................................................................................527
A.3.151 LCAS_TLCT......................................................................................................................................................528
A.3.152 LCD....................................................................................................................................................................530
A.3.153 LCS_LIMITED...................................................................................................................................................531
A.3.154 LDP_PEER_DOWN...........................................................................................................................................534
A.3.155 LFA.....................................................................................................................................................................535
A.3.156 LICENSE_LOST................................................................................................................................................537
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide Contents
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiii
A.3.157 LINK_ERR.........................................................................................................................................................538
A.3.158 LMFA.................................................................................................................................................................539
A.3.159 LOOP_ALM.......................................................................................................................................................541
A.3.160 LP_CROSSTR....................................................................................................................................................544
A.3.161 LP_R_FIFO........................................................................................................................................................545
A.3.162 LP_RDI...............................................................................................................................................................546
A.3.163 LP_RDI_VC12...................................................................................................................................................547
A.3.164 LP_RDI_VC3.....................................................................................................................................................548
A.3.165 LP_REI...............................................................................................................................................................549
A.3.166 LP_REI_VC12....................................................................................................................................................550
A.3.167 LP_REI_VC3......................................................................................................................................................551
A.3.168 LP_RFI...............................................................................................................................................................552
A.3.169 LP_SLM.............................................................................................................................................................553
A.3.170 LP_SLM_VC12..................................................................................................................................................553
A.3.171 LP_SLM_VC3....................................................................................................................................................554
A.3.172 LP_T_FIFO.........................................................................................................................................................555
A.3.173 LP_TIM..............................................................................................................................................................556
A.3.174 LP_TIM_VC12...................................................................................................................................................557
A.3.175 LP_TIM_VC3.....................................................................................................................................................558
A.3.176 LP_UNEQ...........................................................................................................................................................560
A.3.177 LP_UNEQ_VC12...............................................................................................................................................561
A.3.178 LP_UNEQ_VC3.................................................................................................................................................562
A.3.179 LPS_UNI_BI_M.................................................................................................................................................563
A.3.180 LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT...................................................................................................................................564
A.3.181 LPT_INEFFECT.................................................................................................................................................565
A.3.182 LPT_RFI.............................................................................................................................................................567
A.3.183 LSR_BCM_ALM...............................................................................................................................................568
A.3.184 LSR_NO_FITED................................................................................................................................................569
A.3.185 LSR_WILL_DIE................................................................................................................................................570
A.3.186 LTI......................................................................................................................................................................571
A.3.187 MAC_EXT_EXC...............................................................................................................................................573
A.3.188 MAC_FCS_EXC................................................................................................................................................574
A.3.189 MAC_FCS_SD...................................................................................................................................................575
A.3.190 MOD_COM_FAIL.............................................................................................................................................576
A.3.191 MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH...............................................................................................................................577
A.3.192 MP_DELAY.......................................................................................................................................................579
A.3.193 MP_DOWN........................................................................................................................................................580
A.3.194 MPLS_PW_AIS.................................................................................................................................................582
A.3.195 MPLS_PW_CSF.................................................................................................................................................583
A.3.196 MPLS_PW_BDI.................................................................................................................................................584
A.3.197 MPLS_PW_Excess.............................................................................................................................................584
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide Contents
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiv
A.3.198 MPLS_PW_LCK................................................................................................................................................585
A.3.199 MPLS_PW_LOCK.............................................................................................................................................586
A.3.200 MPLS_PW_LOCV.............................................................................................................................................587
A.3.201 MPLS_PW_MISMATCH..................................................................................................................................589
A.3.202 MPLS_PW_MISMERGE...................................................................................................................................590
A.3.203 MPLS_PW_OAMFAIL......................................................................................................................................591
A.3.204 MPLS_PW_RDI.................................................................................................................................................592
A.3.205 MPLS_PW_SD...................................................................................................................................................593
A.3.206 MPLS_PW_SF...................................................................................................................................................594
A.3.207 MPLS_PW_UNEXPMEG..................................................................................................................................595
A.3.208 MPLS_PW_UNEXPMEP..................................................................................................................................596
A.3.209 MPLS_PW_UNEXPPER...................................................................................................................................596
A.3.210 MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN...................................................................................................................................597
A.3.211 MPLS_TUNNEL_AIS.......................................................................................................................................598
A.3.212 MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI.......................................................................................................................................599
A.3.213 MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess...................................................................................................................................600
A.3.214 MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI.......................................................................................................................................600
A.3.215 MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV...................................................................................................................................601
A.3.216 MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCK...................................................................................................................................603
A.3.217 MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH........................................................................................................................604
A.3.218 MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE.........................................................................................................................605
A.3.219 MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL............................................................................................................................606
A.3.220 MPLS_TUNNEL_RDI.......................................................................................................................................607
A.3.221 MPLS_TUNNEL_SD.........................................................................................................................................607
A.3.222 MPLS_TUNNEL_SF.........................................................................................................................................608
A.3.223 MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEG........................................................................................................................609
A.3.224 MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEP........................................................................................................................610
A.3.225 MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPPER.........................................................................................................................611
A.3.226 MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN.........................................................................................................................612
A.3.227 MS_AIS..............................................................................................................................................................613
A.3.228 MS_CROSSTR...................................................................................................................................................614
A.3.229 MS_RDI..............................................................................................................................................................616
A.3.230 MS_REI..............................................................................................................................................................617
A.3.231 MSAD_CROSSTR.............................................................................................................................................617
A.3.232 MULTI_RPL_OWNER......................................................................................................................................619
A.3.233 MW_AM_TEST.................................................................................................................................................620
A.3.234 MW_BER_EXC.................................................................................................................................................620
A.3.235 MW_BER_SD....................................................................................................................................................624
A.3.236 MW_CFG_MISMATCH....................................................................................................................................628
A.3.237 MW_CONT_WAVE..........................................................................................................................................629
A.3.238 MW_E1_LOST...................................................................................................................................................630
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide Contents
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xv
A.3.239 MW_FEC_UNCOR............................................................................................................................................631
A.3.240 MW_LIM............................................................................................................................................................634
A.3.241 MW_LOF...........................................................................................................................................................636
A.3.242 MW_RDI............................................................................................................................................................641
A.3.243 NEIP_CONFUSION...........................................................................................................................................642
A.3.244 NESF_LOST.......................................................................................................................................................642
A.3.245 NESOFT_MM....................................................................................................................................................644
A.3.246 NO_BD_SOFT...................................................................................................................................................645
A.3.247 NP1_MANUAL_STOP......................................................................................................................................646
A.3.248 NP1_SW_FAIL..................................................................................................................................................647
A.3.249 NP1_SW_INDI...................................................................................................................................................648
A.3.250 NTP_SYNC_FAIL.............................................................................................................................................649
A.3.251 OCD....................................................................................................................................................................650
A.3.252 ODC_BATTERY_CURRENT_ABN................................................................................................................651
A.3.253 ODC_BATTERY_PWRDOWN........................................................................................................................653
A.3.254 ODC_DOOR_OPEN..........................................................................................................................................655
A.3.255 ODC_FAN_FAILED..........................................................................................................................................657
A.3.256 ODC_HUMI_ABN.............................................................................................................................................658
A.3.257 ODC_LOAD_PWRDOWN................................................................................................................................659
A.3.258 ODC_MDL_ABN...............................................................................................................................................662
A.3.259 ODC_POWER_FAIL.........................................................................................................................................664
A.3.260 ODC_SMOKE_OVER.......................................................................................................................................666
A.3.261 ODC_SURGE_PROTECTION_FAIL...............................................................................................................667
A.3.262 ODC_TEC_ALM...............................................................................................................................................669
A.3.263 ODC_TEMP_ABN.............................................................................................................................................670
A.3.264 ODC_WATER_ALM.........................................................................................................................................672
A.3.265 OSPFNBRSTATECHANGE.............................................................................................................................673
A.3.266 OUT_PWR_ABN...............................................................................................................................................675
A.3.267 OUT1TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL...........................................................................................................................676
A.3.268 OUT2TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL...........................................................................................................................678
A.3.269 PASSWORD_NEED_CHANGE.......................................................................................................................679
A.3.270 PATCH_BD_EXCLUDE...................................................................................................................................680
A.3.271 PATCH_BD_MATCH_FAIL............................................................................................................................680
A.3.272 PATCH_CHGSCC_NOTMATCH.....................................................................................................................681
A.3.273 PATCH_PKGERR.............................................................................................................................................682
A.3.274 PG_LINK_FAIL.................................................................................................................................................682
A.3.275 PG_PRT_DEGRADED......................................................................................................................................683
A.3.276 PLA_CFG_MISMATCH...................................................................................................................................684
A.3.277 PLA_DOWN......................................................................................................................................................686
A.3.278 PLA_MEMBER_DOWN...................................................................................................................................687
A.3.279 PORTMODE_MISMATCH...............................................................................................................................688
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide Contents
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xvi
A.3.280 PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC......................................................................................................................................689
A.3.281 PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE.............................................................................................................................690
A.3.282 POWER_ABNORMAL.....................................................................................................................................691
A.3.283 POWER_ALM...................................................................................................................................................693
A.3.284 PPP_LCP_FAIL.................................................................................................................................................694
A.3.285 PPP_NCP_FAIL.................................................................................................................................................695
A.3.286 PTP_SOURCE_SWITCH..................................................................................................................................696
A.3.287 PTP_TIMESTAMP_ABN..................................................................................................................................697
A.3.288 PW_DOWN........................................................................................................................................................699
A.3.289 PW_DROPPKT_EXC........................................................................................................................................700
A.3.290 PW_NO_TRAFFIC............................................................................................................................................701
A.3.291 PWAPS_LOST...................................................................................................................................................702
A.3.292 PWAPS_PATH_MISMATCH...........................................................................................................................703
A.3.293 PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL...................................................................................................................................704
A.3.294 PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATCH...........................................................................................................................705
A.3.295 PW_APS_DEGRADED.....................................................................................................................................706
A.3.296 PW_APS_OUTAGE...........................................................................................................................................707
A.3.297 R_LOC................................................................................................................................................................708
A.3.298 R_LOF................................................................................................................................................................709
A.3.299 R_LOS................................................................................................................................................................711
A.3.300 R_OOF................................................................................................................................................................712
A.3.301 RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF.............................................................................................................714
A.3.302 RADIO_MUTE..................................................................................................................................................716
A.3.303 RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH..............................................................................................................................717
A.3.304 RADIO_RSL_HIGH..........................................................................................................................................718
A.3.305 RADIO_RSL_LOW...........................................................................................................................................719
A.3.306 RADIO_TSL_HIGH...........................................................................................................................................720
A.3.307 RADIO_TSL_LOW...........................................................................................................................................721
A.3.308 RELAY_ALARM_CRITICAL..........................................................................................................................722
A.3.309 RELAY_ALARM_IGNORE.............................................................................................................................723
A.3.310 RELAY_ALARM_MAJOR...............................................................................................................................724
A.3.311 RELAY_ALARM_MINOR...............................................................................................................................724
A.3.312 RMFA.................................................................................................................................................................725
A.3.313 RPS_INDI...........................................................................................................................................................726
A.3.314 RS_CROSSTR....................................................................................................................................................728
A.3.315 RTC_FAIL..........................................................................................................................................................730
A.3.316 RT_TBL_LACK.................................................................................................................................................731
A.3.317 S1_SYN_CHANGE...........................................................................................................................................732
A.3.318 SCCDATA_BACKUP_FAIL(SYNC_FAIL)....................................................................................................733
A.3.319 SEC_RADIUS_FAIL.........................................................................................................................................734
A.3.320 SECU_ALM.......................................................................................................................................................736
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide Contents
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xvii
A.3.321 SRV_SHUTDOWN_LD....................................................................................................................................737
A.3.322 SSL_CERT_NOENC.........................................................................................................................................737
A.3.323 SUBNET_RT_CONFLICT................................................................................................................................738
A.3.324 SWDL_ACTIVATED_TIMEOUT....................................................................................................................740
A.3.325 SWDL_AUTOMATCH_INH............................................................................................................................741
A.3.326 SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH.......................................................................................................................742
A.3.327 SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL....................................................................................................................................743
A.3.328 SWDL_INPROCESS.........................................................................................................................................743
A.3.329 SWDL_NEPKGCHECK....................................................................................................................................744
A.3.330 SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT................................................................................................................................745
A.3.331 SWDL_PKGVER_MM......................................................................................................................................746
A.3.332 SWDL_ROLLBACK_FAIL...............................................................................................................................746
A.3.333 SYN_BAD..........................................................................................................................................................747
A.3.334 SYNC_C_LOS...................................................................................................................................................748
A.3.335 SYSLOG_COMM_FAIL...................................................................................................................................749
A.3.336 T_ALOS.............................................................................................................................................................750
A.3.337 T_LOC................................................................................................................................................................751
A.3.338 TEM_HA............................................................................................................................................................752
A.3.339 TEM_LA.............................................................................................................................................................753
A.3.340 TEMP_ALARM.................................................................................................................................................754
A.3.341 TEMP_OVER.....................................................................................................................................................755
A.3.342 TF........................................................................................................................................................................757
A.3.343 THUNDERALM................................................................................................................................................757
A.3.344 TIME_LOCK_FAIL...........................................................................................................................................758
A.3.345 TIME_NO_TRACE_MODE..............................................................................................................................759
A.3.346 TR_LOC.............................................................................................................................................................761
A.3.347 TU_AIS...............................................................................................................................................................762
A.3.348 TU_AIS_VC12...................................................................................................................................................764
A.3.349 TU_AIS_VC3.....................................................................................................................................................766
A.3.350 TU_LOP.............................................................................................................................................................768
A.3.351 TU_LOP_VC12..................................................................................................................................................768
A.3.352 TU_LOP_VC3....................................................................................................................................................770
A.3.353 TUNNEL_APS_DEGRADED...........................................................................................................................772
A.3.354 TUNNEL_APS_OUTAGE.................................................................................................................................773
A.3.355 UHCS..................................................................................................................................................................774
A.3.356 UP_E1_AIS........................................................................................................................................................775
A.3.357 USB_PROCESS_FAIL......................................................................................................................................776
A.3.358 V5_VCAIS.........................................................................................................................................................777
A.3.359 VC_AIS..............................................................................................................................................................778
A.3.360 VC_LOC.............................................................................................................................................................780
A.3.361 VC_RDI..............................................................................................................................................................782
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide Contents
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xviii
A.3.362 VCAT_LOA.......................................................................................................................................................784
A.3.363 VCAT_LOM_VC12...........................................................................................................................................785
A.3.364 VCAT_LOM_VC3.............................................................................................................................................786
A.3.365 VCAT_SQM_VC12...........................................................................................................................................788
A.3.366 VCAT_SQM_VC3.............................................................................................................................................789
A.3.367 VERSION_NOTSUPPORT...............................................................................................................................791
A.3.368 VOLT_LOS........................................................................................................................................................793
A.3.369 VP_AIS...............................................................................................................................................................794
A.3.370 VP_LOC.............................................................................................................................................................796
A.3.371 VP_RDI..............................................................................................................................................................798
A.3.372 W_R_FAIL.........................................................................................................................................................800
A.3.373 WRG_BD_TYPE...............................................................................................................................................801
A.3.374 XPIC_LOS..........................................................................................................................................................801
B Performance Event Reference.................................................................................................804
B.1 Performance Events (by Event Type)........................................................................................................................805
B.1.1 SDH/PDH Performance Event List........................................................................................................................805
B.1.2 Radio Performance Events......................................................................................................................................809
B.1.3 MPLS Tunnel/PW Performance Events.................................................................................................................812
B.1.4 Other Performance Events......................................................................................................................................813
B.2 Performance Events (by Logical Board)....................................................................................................................814
B.2.1 CQ1.........................................................................................................................................................................816
B.2.2 CST/CSH/CSHU/CSHUA......................................................................................................................................819
B.2.3 EG4/EG4P...............................................................................................................................................................822
B.2.4 EM6T......................................................................................................................................................................822
B.2.5 EM6TA...................................................................................................................................................................822
B.2.6 EM6F......................................................................................................................................................................823
B.2.7 EM6FA...................................................................................................................................................................823
B.2.8 EFP8........................................................................................................................................................................824
B.2.9 EMS6......................................................................................................................................................................825
B.2.10 IF1.........................................................................................................................................................................827
B.2.11 IFU2/ISU2.............................................................................................................................................................830
B.2.12 IFX2/ISX2.............................................................................................................................................................834
B.2.13 ISV3......................................................................................................................................................................838
B.2.14 ML1/MD1.............................................................................................................................................................842
B.2.15 ODU......................................................................................................................................................................843
B.2.16 SL1D/SL1DA.......................................................................................................................................................844
B.2.17 SP3S/SP3D...........................................................................................................................................................846
B.3 Performance Events and Handling Procedures..........................................................................................................848
B.3.1 ATPC_P_ADJUST and ATPC_N_ADJUST.........................................................................................................848
B.3.2 AMDOWNCNT and AMUPCNT..........................................................................................................................848
B.3.3 AUPJCHIGH, AUPJCLOW, and AUPJCNEW.....................................................................................................849
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide Contents
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xix
B.3.4 BDTEMPMAX, BDTEMPMIN, and BDTEMPCUR............................................................................................850
B.3.5 CURPOSITIVEPDV and CURNEGATIVEPDV..................................................................................................851
B.3.6 E1_LCV_SDH, E1_LLOSS_SDH, E1_LES_SDH, and E1_LSES_SDH.............................................................851
B.3.7 E1_BBE, E1_ES, E1_SES, E1_CSES, and E1_UAS.............................................................................................853
B.3.8 FEC_BEF_COR_ER, FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT and FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT............................................854
B.3.9 HPBBE, HPES, HPSES, HPCSES, and HPUAS...................................................................................................855
B.3.10 HPFEBBE, HPFEES, HPFESES, HPFECSES, and HPFEUAS..........................................................................856
B.3.11 IF_BBE, IF_ES, IF_SES, IF_CSES, and IF_UAS...............................................................................................857
B.3.12 IF_SNR_MAX, IF_SNR_MIN, and IF_SNR_AVG............................................................................................859
B.3.13 LPBBE, LPES, LPSES, LPCSES, and LPUAS....................................................................................................859
B.3.14 LPFEBBE, LPFEES, LPFESES, LPFECSES, and LPFEUAS............................................................................861
B.3.15 MAXFREQDEV, MINFREQDEV, and AVGFREQDEV...................................................................................862
B.3.16 MAXMEANPATHDELAY, MINMEANPATHDELAY, and AVGMEANPATHDELAY...............................862
B.3.17 MAXPHASEOFFSET, MINPHASEOFFSET, and AVGPHASEOFFSET.........................................................863
B.3.18 MAXPOSITIVEDELAY, MINPOSITIVEDELAY, and AVGPOSITIVEDELAY............................................864
B.3.19 MPLS_PW_LS, MPLS_PW_SLS, MPLS_PW_CSLS, and MPLS_PW_UAS...................................................864
B.3.20 MSBBE, MSES, MSSES, MSCSES, and MSUAS..............................................................................................865
B.3.21 MSFEBBE, MSFEES, MSFESES, MSFECSES, and MSFEUAS.......................................................................866
B.3.22 OSPITMPMAX, OSPITMPMIN, and OSPITMPCUR........................................................................................867
B.3.23 PG_IF_BBE, PG_IF_ES, PG_IF_SES, PG_IF_CSES, and PG_IF_UAS............................................................868
B.3.24 RPLMAX, RPLMIN, and RPLCUR....................................................................................................................870
B.3.25 RSBBE, RSES, RSSES, RSCSES, and RSUAS..................................................................................................870
B.3.26 RSL_MAX, RSL_MIN, RSL_CUR, and RSL_AVG..........................................................................................872
B.3.27 RSOOF and RSOFS..............................................................................................................................................872
B.3.28 QPSKWS, QPSK_S_WS, QAMWS16, QAM_S_WS16, QAMWS32, QAMWS64, QAMWS128, QAMWS256,
QAMWS512, QAM_L_WS512, QAMWS1024, and QAM_L_WS1024.......................................................................873
B.3.29 TLBMAX, TLBMIN, and TLBCUR....................................................................................................................874
B.3.30 RLHTT, RLLTT, TLHTT, TLLTT......................................................................................................................875
B.3.31 TPLMAX, TPLMIN, and TPLCUR.....................................................................................................................876
B.3.32 TSL_MAX, TSL_MIN, TSL_CUR, and TSL_AVG...........................................................................................876
B.3.33 TUPJCHIGH, TUPJCLOW, and TUPJCNEW....................................................................................................877
B.3.34 XPIC_XPD_VALUE............................................................................................................................................878
C RMON Event Reference..........................................................................................................879
C.1 List of RMON Alarm Entries....................................................................................................................................880
C.2 RMON Performance Entries List on the Packet-Plane..............................................................................................883
C.2.1 EM6F/EM6T/EM6FA/EM6TA/EG4/EG4P...........................................................................................................883
C.2.2 IFU2/IFX2...............................................................................................................................................................890
C.2.3 ISU2/ISX2/ISV3.....................................................................................................................................................896
C.2.4 ML1/MD1...............................................................................................................................................................903
C.2.5 CQ1.........................................................................................................................................................................909
C.2.6 CSH.........................................................................................................................................................................911
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide Contents
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xx
C.2.7 CSHU/CSHUA.......................................................................................................................................................918
C.2.8 EFP8/EMS6............................................................................................................................................................935
C.3 RMON Performance Entries List on the EoS/EoPDH-Plane....................................................................................937
C.3.1 EFP8........................................................................................................................................................................937
C.3.2 EMS6......................................................................................................................................................................942
C.4 RMON Events and Handling Procedures..................................................................................................................947
C.4.1 ETHDROP..............................................................................................................................................................947
C.4.2 ETHEXCCOL.........................................................................................................................................................948
C.4.3 ETHLATECOL.......................................................................................................................................................949
C.4.4 RXBBAD................................................................................................................................................................950
C.4.5 TXDEFFRM...........................................................................................................................................................951
C.4.6 ETHUNDER...........................................................................................................................................................952
C.4.7 ETHOVER..............................................................................................................................................................952
C.4.8 ETHFRG.................................................................................................................................................................953
C.4.9 ETHJAB..................................................................................................................................................................954
C.4.10 ETHCOL...............................................................................................................................................................955
C.4.11 ETHFCS................................................................................................................................................................956
C.4.12 ATMPW_LOSPKTS............................................................................................................................................957
C.4.13 ATMPW_MISORDERPKTS...............................................................................................................................957
C.4.14 ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELLS............................................................................................................................958
C.4.15 ATM_CORRECTED_HCSERR..........................................................................................................................959
C.4.16 ATM_UNCORRECTED_HCSERR.....................................................................................................................959
C.4.17 CES_MISORDERPKTS.......................................................................................................................................960
C.4.18 CES_STRAYPKTS..............................................................................................................................................961
C.4.19 CES_MALPKTS...................................................................................................................................................961
C.4.20 CES_JTRUDR......................................................................................................................................................962
C.4.21 CES_JTROVR......................................................................................................................................................963
C.4.22 CES_LOSPKTS....................................................................................................................................................964
D Alarm Management.................................................................................................................965
D.1 NE Alarm Management.............................................................................................................................................966
D.2 Board Alarm Management........................................................................................................................................966
D.2.1 Setting the Alarm Severity......................................................................................................................................966
D.2.2 Alarm Suppression..................................................................................................................................................966
D.2.3 Alarm Auto-Report.................................................................................................................................................967
D.2.4 Alarm Reversion.....................................................................................................................................................967
D.2.5 Setting of the Bit Error Alarm Threshold...............................................................................................................967
D.2.6 AIS Insertion...........................................................................................................................................................968
D.2.7 UNEQ Insertion......................................................................................................................................................969
E Performance Event Management...........................................................................................970
E.1 NE Performance Event Management.........................................................................................................................971
E.2 Board Performance Event Management....................................................................................................................971
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide Contents
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxi
F Alarm Suppression Relationship...........................................................................................972
F.1 Alarm Suppression on TDM Plane............................................................................................................................973
F.2 Alarm Suppression on Data Plane..............................................................................................................................976
G Indicators of Boards.................................................................................................................983
H Glossary....................................................................................................................................1008
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide Contents
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxii
1 Safety Precautions
About This Chapter
This topic describes the safety precautions that you must follow when installing, operating, and
maintaining Huawei devices.
1.1 General Safety Precautions
This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring
and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices.
1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols
Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment.
1.3 Electrical Safety
This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current,
power cables, fuses, and ESD.
1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas
This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.
1.5 Storage Batteries
This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.
1.6 Radiation
This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers.
1.7 Working at Heights
This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.
1.8 Mechanical Safety
This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans,
and carrying heavy objects.
1.9 Other Precautions
This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables,
and routing cables.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
1.1 General Safety Precautions
This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring
and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices.
All Safety Precautions
To ensure the safety of humans and a device, follow the marks on the device and all the safety
precautions in this document when installing, operating, and maintaining a device.
The "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" marks in this document do not cover all the
safety precautions that must be followed. They are supplements to the safety precautions.
Local Laws and Regulations
When operating a device, always comply with the local laws and regulations. The safety
precautions provided in the documents are in addition/supplementary to the local laws and
regulations.
Basic Installation Requirements
The installation and maintenance personnel of Huawei devices must receive strict training and
be familiar with the proper operation methods and safety precautions before any operation.
l Only trained and qualified personnel are permitted to install, operate, and maintain a device.
l Only certified professionals are permitted to remove the safety facilities, and to troubleshoot
and maintain the device.
l Only the personnel authenticated or authorized by Huawei are permitted to replace or
change the device or parts of the device (including software).
l The operating personnel must immediately report the faults or errors that may cause safety
problems to the person in charge.
Grounding Requirements
The grounding requirements are applicable to the device that needs to be grounded.
l When installing the device, always connect the grounding facilities first. When removing
the device, always disconnect the grounding facilities last.
l Ensure that the grounding conductor is intact.
l Do not operate the device in the absence of a suitably installed grounding conductor.
l The device must be connected to the PGND permanently. Before operating the device,
check the electrical connections of the device, and ensure that the device is properly
grounded.
Human Safety
l When there is a risk of a lightning strike, do not operate the fixed terminal or touch the
cables.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
l When there is risk of a lightning strike, unplug the AC power connector. Do not use the
fixed terminal or touch the terminal or antenna connector.
NOTE
The preceding requirements apply to wireless fixed station terminals.
l To avoid electric shocks, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to
telephone-network voltage (TNV) circuits.
l Do not look into optical ports without eye protection. Otherwise, human eyes may be hurt
by laser beams.
l Before operating the device, wear an ESD protective coat, ESD gloves, and an ESD wrist
strap. In addition, you need to get off the conductive objects, such as jewelry and watches,
to prevent electric shock and burn.
l In case of fire, escape from the building or site where the device is located and press the
fire alarm bell or dial the telephone number for fire alarms. Do not enter the burning building
again in any situation.
Device Safety
l Before any operation, install the device firmly on the ground or other rigid objects, such as
on a wall or in a rack.
l When the system is working, ensure that the ventilation hole is not blocked.
l When installing the front panel, use a tool to tighten the screws firmly, if required.
l After installing the device, clean up the packing materials.
1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols
Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment.
Table 1-1 lists the warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950 and their meanings.
Table 1-1 Warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950
Symbol Indication

This symbol is for ESD protection.
A notice with this symbol indicates that you should wear
an ES wrist strap or glove when you touch a board.
Otherwise, you may cause damage to the board.
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
This symbol is for the laser class.
A notice with this symbol indicates the class of the laser.
Avoid direct exposure to the laser beams. Otherwise, it may
damage you eyes or skin.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
Symbol Indication
A notice with this symbol indicates where the subrack is
grounded.
ATTENTION
CLEAN PERIODICALLY
A notice with this symbol indicates that the air filter should
be cleaned periodically.

DON'T TOUCH THE


FANLEAVESBEFORE
THEYSLOW DOWN!
This symbol is for fan safety.
A notice with this symbol indicates that the fan leaves
should not be touched when the fan is rotating.

1.3 Electrical Safety
This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current,
power cables, fuses, and ESD.
High Voltage
DANGER
l A high-voltage power supply provides power for device operations. Direct human contact
with the high voltage power supply or human contact through damp objects can be fatal.
l Unspecified or unauthorized high voltage operations could result in fire or electric shock, or
both.
Thunderstorm
The requirements apply only to wireless base stations or devices with antennas and feeders.
DANGER
Do not perform operations on high voltage, AC power, towers, or backstays in stormy weather
conditions.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
High Leakage Current
CAUTION
Before powering on a device, ground the device. Otherwise, the safety of humans and the device
cannot be ensured.
If a high leakage current mark is labeled near the power connector of the device, you must
connect the PGND terminal on the shell to the ground before connecting the device to an A/C
input power supply. This is to prevent the electric shock caused by leakage current of the device.
Power Cables
DANGER
Do not install or remove the power cable with a live line. Transient contact between the core of
the power cable and the conductor may generate electric arc or spark, which may cause fire or
eye injury.
l Before installing or removing power cables, you must power off the device.
l Before connecting a power cable, you must ensure that the label on the power cable is
correct.
Device with Power On
DANGER
Installing or removing a device is prohibited if the device is on.
DANGER
Do not install or remove the power cables of the equipment when it is powered on.
Short Circuits
When installing and maintaining devices, place and use the associated tools and instruments in
accordance with regulations to avoid short-circuits caused by metal objects.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
NOTICE
To avoid short-circuits when using a tool (such as a screwdriver), do not place the tool on the
ventilation plate of the subrack.
NOTICE
Prevent any screws from dropping into the subrack or chassis to avoid short-circuits.
Fuse
CAUTION
If the fuse on a device blows, replace the fuse with a fuse of the same type and specifications to
ensure safe operation of the device.
Electrostatic Discharge
NOTICE
The static electricity generated by the human body may damage the electrostatic sensitive
components on the board, such as the large-scale integrated circuit (LSI).
l The human body can generate static electromagnetic fields in the following situations:
physical movement, clothing friction, friction between shoes and the ground, plastics in
the hand. Such static electromagnetic effects can remain for an appreciable time.
l Before operating a device, circuit boards, or ASICs, wear an ESD wrist strap that is properly
grounded. The ESD wrist strap can prevent the electrostatic-sensitive components from
being damaged by the static electricity in the human body.
Figure 1-1 shows the method of wearing an ESD wrist strap.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas
This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.
DANGER
Do not place or operate devices in an environment of flammable or explosive air or gas.
Operating an electronic device in an environment of flammable gas causes a severe hazard.
1.5 Storage Batteries
This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.
DANGER
Before operating a storage battery, you must read the safety precautions carefully and be familiar
with the method of connecting a storage battery.
l Incorrect operations of storage batteries cause hazards. During operation, prevent any short-
circuit, and prevent the electrolyte from overflowing or leakage.
l If the electrolyte overflows, it causes potential hazards to the device. The electrolyte may
corrode metal parts and the circuit boards, and ultimately damage the circuit boards.
l A storage battery contains a great deal of energy. Misoperations may cause a short-circuit,
which leads to human injuries.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
Basic Precautions
To ensure safety, note the following points before installing or maintaining the storage battery:
l Use special insulation tools.
l Wear an eye protector and take effective protection measures.
l Wear rubber gloves and a protection coat to prevent the hazard caused by the overflowing
electrolyte.
l When handling the storage battery, ensure that its electrodes are upward. Leaning or
reversing the storage battery is prohibited.
l Before installing or maintaining the storage battery, ensure that the storage battery is
disconnected from the power supply that charges the storage battery.
Short-Circuit
DANGER
A battery short-circuit may cause human injuries. Although the voltage of an ordinary battery
is low, the instantaneous high current caused by a short-circuit emits a great deal of energy.
Avoid any short-circuit of batteries caused by metal objects. If possible, disconnect the working
battery before performing other operations.
Hazardous Gas
NOTICE
Do not use any unsealed lead-acid storage battery. Lay a storage battery horizontally and fix it
properly to prevent the battery from emitting flammable gas, which may cause fire or device
erosion.
Working lead-acid storage batteries emit flammable gas. Therefore, ventilation and fireproofing
measures must be taken at the sites where lead-acid storage batteries are placed.
Battery Temperature
NOTICE
If a battery overheats, the battery may be deformed or damaged, and the electrolyte may
overflow.
When the temperature of the battery is higher than 60C, you need to check whether the
electrolyte overflows. If the electrolyte overflows, take appropriate measures immediately.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
Battery Leakage
NOTICE
In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up appropriately.
When handling a leaky battery, protect against the possible damage caused by the acid. When
you find the electrolyte leaks, you can use the following substances to counteract and absorb the
leaking electrolyte:
l Sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO
3
)
l Sodium carbonate (Na
2
CO
3
)
In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up as recommended by
the battery manufacturer and any local regulations for acid disposal.
If a person contacts battery electrolyte, clean the skin that contacts the battery electrolyte
immediately by using water. In case of a severe situation, the person must be sent to a hospital
immediately.
1.6 Radiation
This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers.
1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers
The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. Hence, you must exercise caution when using
optical fibers.
DANGER
When installing or maintaining an optical interface board or optical fibers, avoid direct eye
exposure to the laser beams launched from the optical interface board or fiber connectors. The
laser beam can cause damage to your eyes.
Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Optical Interfaces
NOTICE
If fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriously
affected. Therefore, the two endfaces and flange of every external fiber must be cleaned before
the fiber is led into the equipment through the ODF for being inserted into an optical interface
on the equipment.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
The fiber connectors and optical interfaces of the lasers must be cleaned with the following
special cleaning tools and materials:
l Special cleaning solvent: It is preferred to use isoamylol. Propyl alcohol, however, can also
be used. It is prohibited that you use alcohol and formalin.
l Non-woven lens tissue
l Special compressed gas
l Cotton stick (medical cotton or long fiber cotton)
l Special cleaning roll, used with the recommended cleaning solvent
l Special magnifier for fiber connectors
For cleaning steps, see Task Collection "Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters" in the OptiX
RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance and Troubleshooting.
Replacing Optical Fibers
When replacing an optical fiber, cover the fiber connector of the unused optical fiber with a
protective cap.
Connecting Optical Fibers
l Use an attenuator if the optical power is excessively high. A high received optical power
damages the optical interface.
l Directly connect an attenuator to a slanting optical interface. Install the attenuator on the
IN port instead of the OUT port.
l Do not directly connect an attenuator to the level optical interface. Use the optical
distribution frame (ODF) to connect an attenuator to a level optical interface.
Figure 1-2 shows a slanting optical interface, and Figure 1-3 shows a level optical interface.
Figure 1-2 Slanting optical interface
Slanting optical
interface

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
Figure 1-3 Level optical interface
Level optical
interface

1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure
This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure.
If multiple transmit antennas are installed on a tower or backstay, keep away from the transmit
directions of the antennas when you install or maintain an antenna locally.
NOTICE
Ensure that all personnel are beyond the transmit direction of a working antenna.
1.6.3 Forbidden Areas
The topic describes requirements for a forbidden area.
l Before entering an area where the electromagnetic radiation is beyond the specified range,
the associated personnel must shut down the electromagnetic radiator or stay at least 10
meters away from the electromagnetic radiator, if in the transmit direction.
l A physical barrier and an eye-catching warning flag should be available in each forbidden
area.
1.6.4 Laser
This topic describes safety precautions for lasers.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
CAUTION
When handling optical fibers, do not stand close to, or look into the optical fiber outlet directly
without eye protection.
Laser transceivers are used in the optical transmission system and associated test tools. The laser
transmitted through the bare optical fiber produces a small beam of light, and therefore it has
very high power density and is invisible to human eyes. When a beam of light enters eyes, the
eyes may be damaged.
In normal cases, viewing an un-terminated optical fiber or a damaged optical fiber without eye
protection at a distance greater than 150 mm does not cause eye injury. Eye injury may occur,
however, if an optical tool such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to view
an un-terminated optical fiber.
Safety Instructions Regarding Lasers
To avoid laser radiation, obey the following instructions:
l All operations should be performed by authorized personnel who have completed the
required training courses.
l Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers.
l Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors.
l Do not look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not sure
whether the optical source is switched off.
l Use an optical power meter to measure the optical power and ensure that the optical source
is switched off.
l Before opening the front door of an optical transmission device, ensure that you are not
exposed to laser radiation.
l Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope, a magnifying glass, or an eye loupe to
view the optical connector or fiber that is transmitting optical signals.
Instructions Regarding Fiber Handling
Read and abide by the following instructions before handling fibers:
l Only trained personnel are permitted to cut and splice fibers.
l Before cutting or splicing a fiber, ensure that the fiber is disconnected from the optical
source. After disconnecting the fiber, cap to the fiber connectors.
1.6.5 Microwave
When installing and maintaining the equipment of Huawei, follow the safety precautions of
microwave to ensure the safety of the human body and the equipment.
CAUTION
Strong radio frequency can harm the human body.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
When installing or maintaining an aerial on the tower or mast that is installed with multiple
aerials, switch off the transmitter in advance.
1.7 Working at Heights
This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.
CAUTION
When working at heights, be cautious to prevent objects from falling down.
The requirements for working at heights are as follows:
l The personnel who work at heights must be trained.
l Carry and handle the operating machines and tools with caution to prevent them from falling
down.
l Safety measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt, must be taken.
l Wear cold-proof clothes when working at heights in cold areas.
l Check all lifting appliances thoroughly before starting the work, and ensure that they are
intact.
1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects
This topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow when
installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices.
CAUTION
When heavy objects are being hoisted, do not walk below the cantilever or hoisted objects.
l Only trained and qualified personnel can perform hoisting operations.
l Before hoisting heavy objects, check that the hoisting tools are complete and in good
condition.
l Before hoisting heavy objects, ensure that the hoisting tools are fixed to a secure object or
wall with good weight-bearing capacity.
l Issue orders with short and explicit words to ensure correct operations.
l Ensure that the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during the
lifting, as shown in Figure 1-4.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
Figure 1-4 Hoisting heavy objects

1.7.2 Using Ladders
This topic describes safety precautions for using ladders.
Checking Ladders
l Before using a ladder, check whether the ladder is damaged. After checking that the ladder
is in good condition, you can use the ladder.
l Before using a ladder, you should know the maximum weight capacity of the ladder. Avoid
overweighing the ladder.
Placing Ladders
The proper slant angle of the ladder is 75 degrees. You can measure the slant angle of the ladder
with an angle square or your arms, as shown in Figure 1-5. When using a ladder, to prevent the
ladder from sliding, ensure that the wider feet of the ladder are downward, or take protection
measures for the ladder feet. Ensure that the ladder is placed securely.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
Figure 1-5 Slanting a ladder

Climbing Up a Ladder
When climbing up a ladder, pay attention to the following points:
l Ensure that the center of gravity of your body does not deviate from the edges of the two
long sides.
l Before operations, ensure that your body is stable to reduce risks.
l Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder (counted from up to down).
If you want to climb up a roof, ensure that the ladder top is at least one meter higher than the
roof, as shown in Figure 1-6.
Figure 1-6 Ladder top being one meter higher than the roof

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
1.8 Mechanical Safety
This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans,
and carrying heavy objects.
Drilling Holes
CAUTION
Do not drill holes on the cabinet without prior permission. Drilling holes without complying
with the requirements affects the electromagnetic shielding performance of the cabinet and
damages the cables inside the cabinet. In addition, if the scraps caused by drilling enter the
cabinet, the printed circuit boards (PCBs) may be short-circuited.
l Before drilling a hole on the cabinet, remove the cables inside the cabinet.
l Wear an eye protector when drilling holes. This is to prevent eyes from being injured by
the splashing metal scraps.
l Wear protection gloves when drilling holes.
l Take measures to prevent the metallic scraps from falling into the cabinet. After the drilling,
clean up the metallic scraps.
Sharp Objects
CAUTION
Wear protection gloves when carrying the device. This is to prevent hands from being injured
by the sharp edges of the device.
Fans
l When replacing parts, place the objects such as the parts, screws, and tools properly. This
is to prevent them from falling into the operating fans, which damages the fans or device.
l When replacing the parts near fans, keep your fingers or boards from touching operating
fans before the fans are powered off and stop running. Otherwise, the hands or the boards
are damaged.
Carrying Heavy Objects
Wear protection gloves when carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent hands from being hurt.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
CAUTION
l The carrier must be prepared for load bearing before carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent
the carrier from being strained or pressed by the heavy objects.
l When you pull a chassis out of the cabinet, pay attention to the unstable or heavy objects on
the cabinet. This is to prevent the heavy objects on the cabinet top from falling down, which
may hurt you.
l Generally, two persons are needed to carry a chassis. It is prohibited that only one person
carries a heavy chassis. When carrying a chassis, the carriers should stretch their backs and
move stably to avoid being strained.
l When moving or lifting a chassis, hold the handles or bottom of the chassis. Do not hold
the handles of the modules installed in the chassis, such as the power modules, fan modules,
and boards.
1.9 Other Precautions
This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables,
and routing cables.
Removing and Inserting a Board
NOTICE
When inserting a board, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and handle the board gently to
avoid distorting pins on the backplane.
l Slide the board along the guide rails.
l Do not contact one board with another to avoid short-circuits or damage.
l When holding a board in hand, do not touch the board circuits, components, connectors,
or connection slots of the board to prevent damage caused by ESD of the human body to
the electrostatic-sensitive components.
Binding Signal Cables
NOTICE
Bind the signal cables separately from the high-current or high-voltage cables.
Routing Cables
In the case of extremely low temperature, heavy shock or vibration may damage the plastic skin
of the cables. To ensure the construction safety, comply with the following requirements:
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
l When installing cables, ensure that the environment temperature is above 0C.
l If the cables are stored in a place where the ambient temperature is below 0C, transfer
them to a place at room temperature and store the cables for more than 24 hours before
installation.
l Handle the cables gently, especially in a low-temperature environment. Do not perform
any improper operations, for example, pushing the cables down directly from a truck.
High Temperature
CAUTION
If the ambient temperature exceeds 55C, the temperature of the front panel surface marked the
flag may exceed 70C. When touching the front panel of the board in such an environment,
you must wear the protection gloves.
IF Cables
CAUTION
Before installing or removing an IF cable, you must turn off the power switch of the IF board.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
2 Notices for High-Risk Operations
About This Chapter
This topic provides notices for the operations that may cause bodily injury or equipment damage
if they are not performed properly during the commissioning and maintenance of microwave
equipment.
2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch
The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and off
as per the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board.
2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper
Before installing or removing IF jumpers, shut down the ODU power supply to prevent personal
injuries and damaged to the IF boards or ODU.
2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cables
Before installing or removing IF cables, shut down the ODU power supply to prevent personal
injuries and damaged to the IF boards or ODU.
2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board
Before removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury
or damage to the IF board and ODU.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch
The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and off
as per the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board.
Position and Description of the Toggle Lever Switch
The toggle lever switch is located on the IF board and controls the power that is fed to the ODU,
as shown in Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-1 Toggle lever switch

Turning On the Toggle Lever Switch
1. Gently pull on the toggle lever switch out.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
2. Turn it to the left.
3. Release the toggle lever switch.
Turning Off the Toggle Lever Switch
1. Gently pull on the toggle lever switch.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
2. Turn it to the right.
3. Release the toggle lever switch.
2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper
Before installing or removing IF jumpers, shut down the ODU power supply to prevent personal
injuries and damaged to the IF boards or ODU.
Procedure
Step 1 Follow instructions in 2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch to power off the
ODU.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
2
1
DANGER
Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF jumper.
Step 2 Remove or install the IF jumper.
----End
2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cables
Before installing or removing IF cables, shut down the ODU power supply to prevent personal
injuries and damaged to the IF boards or ODU.
Procedure
Step 1 Follow instructions in 2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch to power off the
ODU.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
2
1
DANGER
Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF cable.
Step 2 Install or remove the IF cables.
----End
2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board
Before removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury
or damage to the IF board and ODU.
Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for the
Toggle Lever Switch.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
3 2 1
3
DANGER
Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF board.
Step 2 Disconnect the IF jumper or IF cable.
Step 3 Remove or install the IF board.
----End
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
3 Routine Maintenance
Routine maintenance operations are performed to detect and rectify hidden faults before the
hidden faults cause damage to equipment and affect services. Routine maintenance operations
are preventive measures.
For the, routine maintenance items are classified into routine maintenance items carried out on
the network management system (NMS), field maintenance items for indoor equipment, and
field maintenance items for outdoor equipment.
Routine Maintenance Items Carried Out on the NMS
Maintenance Item Recommen
ded
Maintenan
ce Cycle
Remarks
Checking the NE status Every day l If the NE icon is green, the NE operates
properly.
l If the NE icon is gray, the NE is
unreachable due to DCN faults.
l If the NE icon is in other colors, alarms
are reported or exceptions occur. You
need to troubleshoot in time.
Browsing current alarms Every day l Handle the alarms by referring to A.3
Alarms and Handling Procedures.
l For port alarms due to the interconnected
equipment, see 4.3.3 Browsing Current
Performance Events to reduce the
number of alarms and prevent interference
to emergent alarms.
Browsing historical alarms Every week By finding causes of and solutions to
historical alarms, you can take precautions to
avoid related faults.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 3 Routine Maintenance
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
Maintenance Item Recommen
ded
Maintenan
ce Cycle
Remarks
Browsing abnormal events Every week l Security events are generally records of
normal operations. Investigate the illegal
operations if there are any.
l Abnormal events about equipment have
been properly solved.
Browsing current
performance events
Every week l Gauge type performance events such as
the board temperature and laser power are
stable.
l Bit error type performance events meet
requirements on link availability.
Browsing historical
performance events
Every week
Browsing historical transmit
power and receive power
Every week l Historical received signal levels do not
exceed the fade margin for a long time.
l When automatic transmit power control
(ATPC) is disabled, historical transmitted
signal levels are allowed to be 3 dB larger
or smaller than the specified value.
Testing IF 1+1 protection
switching
Half a year Applies only to the equipment that is
configured in 1+1 protection mode. During
the 1+1 protection switching, the protected
services are interrupted. Hence, it is
recommended that you perform the 1+1
protection switching when the traffic is light.
Testing the IF N+1 protection
switching
Half a year Applies only to the equipment that is
configured with N+1 protection.

Field Maintenance Items for Indoor Equipment
Maintenance Item Recommen
ded
Maintenan
ce Cycle
Remarks
Checking the
telecommunications room
Every two
months
The site environment meets equipment
operation requirements.
Maintaining the environment
of outdoor cabinets
Half a year

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 3 Routine Maintenance
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
Field Maintenance Items for Outdoor Equipment
Maintenance Item Recommended
Maintenance Cycle
Remarks
Checking the ODU
a
Half a year
NOTE
Perform a complete check after
a level-8 or higher-level
hurricane, an earthquake, or
other unexpected
circumstances.
The OptiX RTN 950 is
fixedly mounted and its
appearance is in good
condition, without the
coating being damaged or
corroded.
Checking the hybrid coupler The hybrid coupler is fixedly
mounted and its appearance
is in good condition, without
the coating being damaged or
corroded.
Checking the antenna The antenna is tightly placed
and does not deviate from the
designed angle.
Checking the IF cable and/or
flexible waveguide
The exterior of the cable is
intact, and the connectors are
properly waterproofed. The
cable is fixed properly with a
feeder fastener or cable ties,
and the cable bending degree
meets the requirement.
Checking the LOS condition A radio link is not blocked by
any visible object.

NOTE
a
: An area close to a pollution source refers to the area that covers a radius within any of the following
values:
l 3.7 km away from salty waters (such as an ocean and salty water)
l 3 km away from severe pollution sources (such as iron refinery works, and coal mines)
l 2 km away from intermediate pollution sources (such as chemical plants, rubber processing works, and
electroplating workshops)
l 1 km away from light pollution sources (such as food processing works, leather working plants, and
heating boilers).
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 3 Routine Maintenance
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
4 Network Monitoring
About This Chapter
4.1 Checking the NE Status
You can learn about the basic information such as whether the NE fails to communicate with
the NMS and whether any alarms are reported by checking the NE status.
4.2 Checking the Board Status
You can learn about the board status in a visual manner by checking the slot diagram.
4.3 Alarm and Performance Data Query
This section describes how to query alarms and non RMON-based performance data, such as
SDH performance data and microwave link performance data. You can query real-time and
historical performance data, which are monitored based on a 15minute or 24hour monitoring
period.
4.4 Microwave Link Performance Query
This section describes operations related to microwave link performance query.
4.5 Ethernet Performance Query
This section describes operations related to Ethernet performance query.
4.6 Ethernet Port Traffic Monitoring
This section describes operations related to Ethernet traffic monitoring on Ethernet ports and
microwave ports.
4.7 Long-term Network Performance Monitoring
The U2000 centrally monitors long-term performance of various Huawei devices through the
Performance Management System (PMS).
4.8 Report Query
This section describes operations related to report query. You can obtain network information
from reports.
4.9 Alarm and Performance Management Setting
This section describes operations related to alarm and performance management.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
4.1 Checking the NE Status
You can learn about the basic information such as whether the NE fails to communicate with
the NMS and whether any alarms are reported by checking the NE status.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
Precautions
NOTE
By default, the color of the NE icon on the U2000 indicates the NE status.
Procedure
Step 1 Query NE running status.
1
2
View NE running
status.
3
Select the
desired NE.
4
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
NOTE
You can also determine NE running status by referring to information on the Legend tab.
NOTE
Complete the following steps to check NE running status from the WebLCT:
1. Query Communication status and Login status of the NE in NE List.
2. If Login status is Offline, log in to the NE.
3. Select the NE and click Log in.
4. Set User Name and Password.
NOTE
The default user name is lct.
The lct account owns system-level rights.
The default password of the lct account is password.
5. View NE status and alarm status.
----End
4.2 Checking the Board Status
You can learn about the board status in a visual manner by checking the slot diagram.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Query board running status.
1
2
3
Right-click
the desired
NE.
4
Determine the board
running status by referring
to legend information.
NOTE
Complete the following step to query board running status from the WebLCT:
Click the Slot Layout tab in NE Explorer.
----End
4.3 Alarm and Performance Data Query
This section describes how to query alarms and non RMON-based performance data, such as
SDH performance data and microwave link performance data. You can query real-time and
historical performance data, which are monitored based on a 15minute or 24hour monitoring
period.
4.3.1 Browsing Current Alarms
You can find the faults that occur on the equipment by browsing current alarms.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
Procedure
Step 1 Open the current alarm window.
1
2
Step 2 Specify filter conditions.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
3
Configure the severity, type, and
maintenance status parameters of the
alarms to be queried.
Set the occurring time and clearing time
of the alarms to be queried.
4
5
6
Click the Alarm Source tab and
specify filter conditions.
8
7
Select the desired
NEs.
Configure the filter
type. For example,
you can filter alarms
by NE.
9
10
11
Step 3 View alarm information.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
Select an alarm and view its details
and possible causes in the following
panes.
12
Alarm details: contain information
about the board and optical port that
report the alarm as well as alarm
parameters.
Alarm handling: contains possible
causes for the alarm and reference
links to alarm handling suggestions
Step 4 Contact troubleshooting personnel in a timely manner for alarm handling.
For details about alarm handling, see A.3 Alarms and Handling Procedures.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
NOTE
Complete the following steps to browse current alarms from the WebLCT:
Select the NE from the NE Explorer and click in the tool bar.
The Browse Current Alarms tab page is displayed by default.
----End
Related Information
A current alarm refers to an alarm that is not cleared.
By U2000, you can browse the network-wide alarms based on the alarm severity by clicking the
alarm indicators in the upper right corner.
l You can click (red) to browse the network-wide critical alarms.
l You can click (orange) to browse the network-wide major alarms.
l You can click (yellow) to browse the network-wide minor alarms.
l You can click (light-blue) to browse the network-wide warning alarms.
NOTE
By default, the number shown by each indicator indicates the number of current network-wide alarms, which
are not cleared, of the specific severity.
By Web LCT, you can also click an alarm indicator on the toolbar to display the NE alarms of
the specific severity.
From left to right, the alarm indicators and corresponding alarm severities are as follows:
l Red: critical alarm
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
l Orange: major alarm
l Yellow: minor alarm
l Purple: warning
l Light blue: event
4.3.2 Browsing Historical Alarms
You can know the faults that occur on the equipment in a past period of time by browsing
historical alarms. A historical alarm refers to an alarm that is already cleared.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the historical alarm window.
1
2
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
Step 2 Specify filter conditions.
3
Configure the severity, type, and maintenance
status parameters of the alarms to be queried.
Set the occurring time and clearing time
of the alarms to be queried.
4
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
5
6
Click the Alarm Source tab and
specify filter conditions.
8
7
Select the desired
NEs.
Configure the filter
type. For example,
you can filter alarms
by NE.
9
10
11
Step 3 View alarm information.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
Select an alarm and view its details
and possible causes in the following
panes.
12
Alarm details: contain information about
the board and optical port that report the
alarm as well as alarm parameters.
Alarm handling: contains possible
causes for the alarm and reference
links to alarm handling suggestions
NOTE
Complete the following steps to browse current alarms from the WebLCT:
Select the NE from the NE Explorer and click in the tool bar.
Click the Browse Historical alarms tab.
----End
4.3.3 Browsing Current Performance Events
You can know the running status of the equipment by browsing current SDH/PDH performance
events. The counter of current performance events measures all the performance events that arise
between the start time of the monitoring period and the current time.
Prerequisites
l The performance monitoring function must be enabled. For details about how to enable the
performance monitoring function, see Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of
NEs.
l You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the performance data window.
1
2
Step 2 View current performance data.
Select performance event types and
specify the performance monitoring
period.
(Optional) Output the
performance data.
3
5
6
8
Select the desired
NEs.
Configure the query type.
For example, Measure is
selected here.
7
4
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
NOTE
Complete the following steps to query current performance data from the WebLCT:
Select the desired board in the NE Explorer and choose Performance > Current Performance from the
Function Tree.
----End
4.3.4 Browsing Historical Performance Events
You can know the faults that occur on the equipment in a past period of time by browsing
historical performance events.
Prerequisites
l The performance monitoring function must be enabled. For details about how to enable the
performance monitoring function, see Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of
NEs.
l You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Open the performance data window.
1
2
3
Step 2 View historical performance data.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
5
4
6
7
Select the desired
NEs.
Configure the
query type. For
example, Count is
selected here.
8
Select performance event types and
specify the performance monitoring
period.
NOTE
Complete the following steps to query historical performance data from the WebLCT:
Select the desired board in the NE Explorer and choose Performance > Historical Performance from the
Function Tree.
----End
4.3.5 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records
You can learn about the threshold-crossing information of the performance events of an NE by
browsing the performance event threshold-crossing records.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the Performance Threshold-Crossing Record window.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
1
2
3
Step 2 Query performance threshold-crossing records.
5
4
6
Select the desired
NEs.
7
Select performance event types
and specify the performance
monitoring period.
NOTE
Complete the following steps to query performance threshold-crossing records from the WebLCT:
Select a desired board in the NE explorer and choose Performance > Threshold-Crossing Record from the
Function Tree.
----End
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
4.3.6 Browsing UAT Events
Learn about the severe abnormalities on the transmission line by browsing UAT events.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context
UAT refers to a period of 10 consecutive seconds during which the bit error ratio per second of
the digital signal in either of the transmission directions of a transmission system is inferior to
10
-3
. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of the unavailable time.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the UAT window
1
2
3
Step 2 Query UAT events.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
5
4
6
Select the
desired board.
7
Specify the time period, data source
and functional block type.
----End
4.4 Microwave Link Performance Query
This section describes operations related to microwave link performance query.
4.4.1 Querying the Historical Transmit Power and Receive Power
If the radio link requires troubleshooting, query the change trend for the historical transmit power
and receive power for reference.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding IF boards and the ODUs connected to the IF boards must be added to
the NE Panel.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 Query historical receive power or transmit power information.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
2
1
In the NE Explorer,
select the desired
ODU.
3
Set the time range, monitoring period, and
power parameters.
4
Click Draw.
The power curve is
displayed.
----End
4.4.2 Querying the SNR Values of a Radio Link
This section describes how to query the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) change curve of a radio link,
assisting in handling radio link faults.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected have been added in the
NE Panel.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 Query how the SNR or Root-mean-square (RMS) error changes on microwave links.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
2
1
In the NE Explorer,
select the desired IF
board.
3
Set the time range, monitoring period, and
performance type (SNR or MSE).
4
Click Draw.
The SNR or MSE curve is
displayed.
----End
4.4.3 Browsing Current Performance Events of the radio link
You can learn about the current operating status of a radio link by browsing its current
performance data.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click a microwave link in the main topology and choose Microwave Link Performance
Statistics.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
2
1
Right-click the desired
microwave link.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
NOTE
Uncheck Auto Refresh. Click Save as to save current performance of the microwave link into a TXT file.
Complete the following steps to query current performance of the microwave link from the WebLCT:
Select the desired microwave link in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > Microwave Link
Performance from the Function Tree.
----End
4.4.4 Browsing Historical Performance Data of a Radio Link
You can learn about the operating status of a radio link by browsing its historical performance
data over a specific period.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 Query historical performance of the microwave link.
2
1
Right-click the desired
microwave link.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
3 4
Specify the query period and
monitoring period of the the
desired performance data.
5
(Optional) Specify the data type to be
displayed. By default, link transmit power and
receive power are displayed.
6
8
(Optional) Move the cursor
over the desired node to
check link information at a
specific time.
7
NOTE
Complete the following steps to query historical performance of the microwave link from the WebLCT:
Select the desired microwave link in the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > Microwave Link
Performance from the Function Tree.
----End
4.5 Ethernet Performance Query
This section describes operations related to Ethernet performance query.
Context
NOTE
You can query real-time performance data and recent performance data.
Ethernet performance is monitored through RMON. Available performance monitoring periods include 30s, 30
minutes, custom period 1 (15 minutes by default), and custom period 2 (24 hours by default).
4.5.1 Browsing Current Ethernet Performance
After setting the RMON statistics group. you can browse real-time Ethernet performance
statistics.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding board must be added in the NE Panel.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, navigate to the performance query interfaces for different objects according
to the following tables.
Table 4-1 Packet plane
Performa
nce
Object
Browsed
Object
Navigation Path
Basic
performan
ce
Ethernet
port
a
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE
Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the
Function Tree.
NOTE
a: Packet Ethernet ports include FE/GE ports, Integrated IP radio ports,
PORT8 on the EMS6 board, and PORT10 on the EFP8 board.
Extended
performan
ce
MPLS
tunnel
performan
ce
MPLS
Tunnel
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object
Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management >
Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Static Tunnel tab.
3. Select one or more tunnels, right-click the tunnel(s), and
choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.
L2 VPN-
PW
performan
ce
ETH
PWE3
service
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line
Service from the Function Tree.
2. Select one or more ETH PWE3 services, right-click the service
(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.
L2 VPN
performan
ce
UNI-UNI
E-Line
service
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line
Service from the Function Tree.
2. Select one or more UNI-UNI E-Line services, right-click the
service(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut
menu.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
Performa
nce
Object
Browsed
Object
Navigation Path
CES-PW
performan
ce
CES
performan
ce
CES
service
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and
choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the
Function Tree.
2. Select one or more CES services, right-click the service(s), and
choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.
ATM/IMA
(access
side)
performan
ce
Smart E1
port
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE
Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the
Function Tree.
ATM-PW
performan
ce
ATM
PWE3
performan
ce
ATM
PWE3
service
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and
choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from
the Function Tree.
2. Select one or more ATM PWE3 services, right-click the
service(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut
menu.
Port traffic
classificati
on
performan
ce
Ports that
perform
complex
traffic
classificati
on
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management
> Port Policy from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Application Object tab.
3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
Complete the operation Creating Traffic before monitoring the port traffic
classification performance.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
Performa
nce
Object
Browsed
Object
Navigation Path
Port
priority
performan
ce
Egress
queues
For FE/GE ports:
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.
4. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list.
For Integrated IP radio ports:
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.
4. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list.
Port DS
domain
performan
ce
Ports in a
DS
domain
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain
Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the
Function Tree.
2. Select the desired DS domain.
3. Click the Application Object tab.
4. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.

Table 4-2 EoS/EoPDH plane
Performa
nce
Object
Obrowse
Object
Navigation Path
Basic
performan
ce
Ethernet
port
b
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 or EMS6 board from the
Object Tree and choose Performance > RMON Performance
from the Function Tree.
NOTE
b:
EoPDH Ethernet ports include PORT1 to PORT9 on the EFP8 board.
EoS Ethernet ports include PORT1 to PORT7 on the EMS6 board.
Extended
performan
ce
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
Performa
nce
Object
Obrowse
Object
Navigation Path
VCG-other
performan
ce
VCTRUN
K port

NOTE
If you browse current Ethernet performance using the Web LCT: Select the corresponding board from the Object
Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Statistics Group tab.
Step 3 Set the required parameters for the statistics group.
1. Select the desired object or port from the drop-down list.
2. Select the performance items for which statistics need to be collected.
3. Set Sampling Period.
Sampling Period represents the time unit of the performance statistics.
Step 4 Click Resetting begins.
NOTE
If you click Start, the register of the statistics group is not reset to clear the existing data.
----End
4.5.2 Configuring Ethernet Performance Threshold-Crossing
Parameters
After setting the RMON alarm group. you can monitor whether the Ethernet performance value
crosses its threshold for a long time.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding boards must be added in the NE Panel.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, navigate to the performance query interfaces for different objects according
to the following tables.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
Table 4-3 Packet plane
Performa
nce
Object
Browsed
Object
Navigation Path
Basic
performan
ce
Ethernet
port
a
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE
Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the
Function Tree.
NOTE
a: Packet Ethernet ports include FE/GE ports, Integrated IP radio ports,
PORT8 on the EMS6 board, and PORT10 on the EFP8 board.
Extended
performan
ce
MPLS
tunnel
performan
ce
MPLS
Tunnel
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object
Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management >
Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Static Tunnel tab.
3. Select one or more tunnels, right-click the tunnel(s), and
choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.
L2 VPN-
PW
performan
ce
ETH
PWE3
service
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line
Service from the Function Tree.
2. Select one or more ETH PWE3 services, right-click the service
(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.
L2 VPN
performan
ce
UNI-UNI
E-Line
service
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line
Service from the Function Tree.
2. Select one or more UNI-UNI E-Line services, right-click the
service(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut
menu.
CES-PW
performan
ce
CES
performan
ce
CES
service
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and
choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the
Function Tree.
2. Select one or more CES services, right-click the service(s), and
choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.
ATM/IMA
(access
side)
performan
ce
Smart E1
port
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE
Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the
Function Tree.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
Performa
nce
Object
Browsed
Object
Navigation Path
ATM-PW
performan
ce
ATM
PWE3
performan
ce
ATM
PWE3
service
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and
choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from
the Function Tree.
2. Select one or more ATM PWE3 services, right-click the
service(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut
menu.
Port traffic
classificati
on
performan
ce
Ports that
perform
complex
traffic
classificati
on
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management
> Port Policy from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Application Object tab.
3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
Complete the operation Creating Traffic before monitoring the port traffic
classification performance.
Port
priority
performan
ce
Egress
queues
For FE/GE ports:
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.
4. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list.
For Integrated IP radio ports:
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.
4. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list.
Port DS
domain
performan
ce
Ports in a
DS
domain
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain
Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the
Function Tree.
2. Select the desired DS domain.
3. Click the Application Object tab.
4. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57

Table 4-4 EoS/EoPDH plane
Performa
nce
Object
Obrowse
Object
Navigation Path
Basic
performan
ce
Ethernet
port
b
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 or EMS6 board from the
Object Tree and choose Performance > RMON Performance
from the Function Tree.
NOTE
b:
EoPDH Ethernet ports include PORT1 to PORT9 on the EFP8 board.
EoS Ethernet ports include PORT1 to PORT7 on the EMS6 board.
Extended
performan
ce
VCG-other
performan
ce
VCTRUN
K port

NOTE
If you browse current Ethernet performance using the Web LCT: Select the corresponding board from the Object
Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Event tab and set the corresponding parameters.
Step 3 Click Apply. Close the displayed dialog box.
----End
4.5.3 Setting Parameters for Monitoring Historical Ethernet
Performance
After configuring a historical control group, you can specify how the historical Ethernet
performance data is monitored.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding boards must be added in the NE Panel.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
NOTE
To set parameters for monitoring historical Ethernet performance of multiple NEs on the U2000, choose
Performance > RMON History Control Group Management from the main menu.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON History
Control Group.
Step 2 Set the parameters of the historical control group.
Step 3 Click Apply. Close the displayed dialog box.
----End
4.5.4 Browsing Historical Ethernet Performance Data
After configuring an history group, you can browse the historical performance statistics.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding boards must be added in the NE Panel.
l The objects and performance events to be monitored must be set.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, navigate to the performance query interfaces for different objects according
to the following tables.
Table 4-5 Packet plane
Performa
nce
Object
Browsed
Object
Navigation Path
Basic
performan
ce
Ethernet
port
a
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE
Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the
Function Tree.
NOTE
a: Packet Ethernet ports include FE/GE ports, Integrated IP radio ports,
PORT8 on the EMS6 board, and PORT10 on the EFP8 board.
Extended
performan
ce
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
Performa
nce
Object
Browsed
Object
Navigation Path
MPLS
tunnel
performan
ce
MPLS
Tunnel
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object
Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management >
Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Static Tunnel tab.
3. Select one or more tunnels, right-click the tunnel(s), and
choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.
L2 VPN-
PW
performan
ce
ETH
PWE3
service
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line
Service from the Function Tree.
2. Select one or more ETH PWE3 services, right-click the service
(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.
L2 VPN
performan
ce
UNI-UNI
E-Line
service
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line
Service from the Function Tree.
2. Select one or more UNI-UNI E-Line services, right-click the
service(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut
menu.
CES-PW
performan
ce
CES
performan
ce
CES
service
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and
choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the
Function Tree.
2. Select one or more CES services, right-click the service(s), and
choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.
ATM/IMA
(access
side)
performan
ce
Smart E1
port
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE
Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the
Function Tree.
ATM-PW
performan
ce
ATM
PWE3
performan
ce
ATM
PWE3
service
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and
choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from
the Function Tree.
2. Select one or more ATM PWE3 services, right-click the
service(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut
menu.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
Performa
nce
Object
Browsed
Object
Navigation Path
Port traffic
classificati
on
performan
ce
Ports that
perform
complex
traffic
classificati
on
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management
> Port Policy from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Application Object tab.
3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
Complete the operation Creating Traffic before monitoring the port traffic
classification performance.
Port
priority
performan
ce
Egress
queues
For FE/GE ports:
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.
4. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list.
For Integrated IP radio ports:
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.
4. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list.
Port DS
domain
performan
ce
Ports in a
DS
domain
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain
Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the
Function Tree.
2. Select the desired DS domain.
3. Click the Application Object tab.
4. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
Table 4-6 EoS/EoPDH plane
Performa
nce
Object
Obrowse
Object
Navigation Path
Basic
performan
ce
Ethernet
port
b
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 or EMS6 board from the
Object Tree and choose Performance > RMON Performance
from the Function Tree.
NOTE
b:
EoPDH Ethernet ports include PORT1 to PORT9 on the EFP8 board.
EoS Ethernet ports include PORT1 to PORT7 on the EMS6 board.
Extended
performan
ce
VCG-other
performan
ce
VCTRUN
K port

NOTE
If you browse current Ethernet performance using the Web LCT: Select the corresponding board from the Object
Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the History Group tab.
Step 3 Set the parameters of the historical group.
1. Select the desired object or port from the drop-down list.
2. Click and specify the required time span.
3. Select the performance items to browse.
4. Under History Table Type, set the time span for the performance items to be browsed.
Step 4 Click Query.
----End
4.6 Ethernet Port Traffic Monitoring
This section describes operations related to Ethernet traffic monitoring on Ethernet ports and
microwave ports.
4.6.1 Setting Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization
of Ethernet Ports
To query the traffic, physical bandwidth, or bandwidth utilization of Ethernet ports within a
certain period, you need to enable the monitoring for the object before that period starts. The
FE/GE ports and the ports on the packet plane support this operation.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
The flow monitoring function is enabled on the Ethernet port. To enable the flow monitoring
function on a port, see 4.6.1 Setting Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization
of Ethernet Ports.
Tools, Instruments, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Background Information
After the flow monitoring function is enabled, the system saves the statistics about the received
traffic and transmitted traffic with an interval of 15 minutes. In normal cases, the system stores
the statistics that are collected in the last 30 days. In the system, every measurement entry shows
the average transmit rate and average receive rate within a period of 15 minutes. You can query
the statistics in the last 30 days.
Procedure
Step 1 Set Ethernet performance monitoring parameters.
1
2
3
Select the board where
the desired Ethernet
port resides.
4
Configure whether to flow
monitoring, physical bandwidth
monitoring, and bandwidth
utilization monitoring.
----End
4.6.2 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth
Utilization
This section describes how to query the change curve of the traffic, physical bandwidth, or
bandwidth utilization within a certain period. The FE/GE ports and the ports on the packet plane
support this operation.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
The flow monitoring function is enabled on the Ethernet port. To enable the flow monitoring
function on a port, see 4.6.1 Setting Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization
of Ethernet Ports.
Tools, Instruments, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Background Information
After the flow monitoring function is enabled, the system saves the statistics about the received
traffic and transmitted traffic with an interval of 15 minutes. In normal cases, the system stores
the statistics that are collected in the last 30 days. In the system, every measurement entry shows
the average transmit rate and average receive rate within a period of 15 minutes. You can query
the statistics in the last 30 days.
This operation allows only the queries about port-based Ethernet traffic by using U2000. For
how to query tunnel- or PW-based traffic, see 4.5.1 Browsing Current Ethernet
Performance.
Procedure
Step 1 Query traffic, physical bandwidth, and bandwidth utilization.
1
2
3
Select the
desired board.
5
Specify the time period
and display mode.
4
Specify the data type. Available data
types include the flow data, physical
bandwidth data, and bandwidth usage
data.
----End
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
4.7 Long-term Network Performance Monitoring
The U2000 centrally monitors long-term performance of various Huawei devices through the
Performance Management System (PMS).
4.7.1 Creating a Performance Monitoring Template
This section describes how to create a performance monitoring template. Performance
monitoring templates specify counters used by performance monitoring instances and their
thresholds (if any). When counter values collected exceed the preset thresholds, the system
reports corresponding threshold crossing alerts (TCAs).
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Context
NOTE
You can create data monitoring templates and remote network monitoring (RMON) TCA monitoring
templates. To monitor Ethernet performance counters supporting TCAs, create RMON TCA monitoring
templates. To monitor other counters, create data monitoring templates.
Procedure
Step 1 Create a data monitoring template.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
Select the monitoring
resource type.
1
2 3
4
5
Set the parameters of the
data monitoring template.
6
7
Click Add, and select the
performance monitoring
indicators.
9
8
Step 2 Create an RMON TCA monitoring template.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
Select the monitoring
resource type.
1
2 3
4
5
Enter the template name and
set the template type to RMON
TAC.
6
7
Click Add, and select the
performance monitoring
indicators.
8
9 Set the monitoring
threshold parameters.
10
----End
4.7.2 Creating a Performance Monitoring Instance
This section describes how to create a performance monitoring instance. A performance
monitoring instance can monitor the performance of multiple objects at the same time. You can
associate a created performance monitoring template and a created performance statistics
collection policy to a performance monitoring instance.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the Create Monitoring Instance dialog box.
2
3
1
Step 2 Select monitoring resources.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
Select the desired
NE.
4
5
7
6
Select the desired
port.
8
Step 3 Select the monitoring template.
(Optional) If there is no desired
data monitoring template, create
one for the instances.
9
(Optional) Select the desired data
monitoring template if it is available. If
there is no desired template, go to step
10.
10
11
(Optional) Select the desired RMON
threshold monitoring template if it is
available. If there is no desired template,
go to step 12.
12
(Optional) If there is no desired RMON
threshold monitoring template, create one
for the instances.
13
NOTE
Complete step 9 and step 10 when creating a data monitoring instance.
Complete step 11 and step 12 when creating an RMON TCA monitoring instance.
Step 4 Specify the monitoring time.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
14
NOTE
Skip this step for the OptiX RTN 950, which does not support the setting of monitoring time.
Step 5 Close the dialog box.
15
NOTE
If a creation success message is displayed, the creation is successful.
If the creation fails, determine the failure cause according to the displayed error information and recreate the
instance.
----End
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
4.7.3 Browsing the Real-Time Data of a Performance Monitoring
Instance
This section describes how to browse the real-time performance data of objects monitored by a
performance monitoring instance.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l There is at least one performance monitoring instance.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the real-time monitoring window.
2
1
Right-click the desired
performance monitoring
instance.
Step 2 View real-time performance data.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
3
(Optional) Set the timeline
granularity. The default value is 10s.
4
(Optional) Set the
performance display
mode. The default value is
line chart.
----End
4.7.4 Browsing the Historical Data of a Performance Monitoring
Instance
This section describes how to browse the performance data of objects monitored by a
performance monitoring instance in a specific time range.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l There is at least one performance monitoring instance.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the historical performance data window.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
2
1
Right-click the desired
performance monitoring
instance.
Step 2 View historical performance data.
----End
4.8 Report Query
This section describes operations related to report query. You can obtain network information
from reports.
4.8.1 Querying the Microwave Link Information Report
You can obtain the current and recent transmit/receive power of microwave links by querying
the microwave link information report.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Procedure
Step 1 Query the microwave link information report.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
1
2
Select the desired
NEs.
3
4
6
(Optional) Output the link report.
5
7
----End
4.8.2 Querying the Network-wide License Report
By querying the network-wide license report, you can check the license information of each NE.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Procedure
Step 1 Query the license capacity report of NEs.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
1
2
Select the desired
NEs.
3
4
(Optional) Output the microwave
capacity report.
5
6
Step 2 Query the air-interface license capacity report of the network.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
1
2
3
4
(Optional) Output the air-interface
capacity report.
----End
4.8.3 Querying the Microwave Configuration Report
You can output the configuration report into an XLS file.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Procedure
Step 1 Export the microwave configuration report of an RTN NE.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
1
2
Select the desired NEs. You
can also click the icon in the
red circle to quickly locate
desired NEs.
3
Select the types of
configuration data to be
exported.
4
Specify the directory for
saving the report.
5
----End
4.8.4 Querying the Board Information Report
You can obtain the logic version, and software version of each board by querying the board
information report.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the board information query window.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
1
2
Set Physical
Inventory Type to
Board.
3
4
Step 2 Specify filter conditions.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
Select the
desired NEs.
7
5
6
Specify filter conditions. For
example, you can filter board
information by NE.
8
9
Step 3 View query results.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
(Optional) Output the board
information report.
10
NOTE
Complete the following steps to query the board information report from the WebLCT:
Select the NE from in the NE Explorer and choose Report > Board Information Report from the Function
Tree.
Version information of all boards is displayed in Board Information Report.
----End
4.8.5 Querying the Board Manufacturing Information Report
You can obtain the manufacturing information about each board and the SFP module by querying
the board manufacturing information report.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Query the board manufacturing information report.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
1
2
Select the desired
NEs.
3
4
(Optional) Output the board
manufacturing information report.
5
6
NOTE
Complete the following steps to query the board manufacturing information report from the WebLCT:
Select the NE from in the NE Explorer and choose Report > Board Details Report from the Function Tree.
Manufacturing information of all boards is displayed in Board Details Report.
----End
4.8.6 Querying the ODU Information Report
You can query information about the ODUs on a network by querying the ODU information
report.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Query ODU information.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
(Optional) Output the ODU
information report.
1
2
3
4
----End
4.9 Alarm and Performance Management Setting
This section describes operations related to alarm and performance management.
Context
NOTE
The performance management in this section does not cover Ethernet performance
4.9.1 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs
By performing this operation task, you can manually enable or disable performance monitoring
for NEs, or set the performance monitoring period.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
Context
NOTE
To perform batch NE configurations on the U2000, choose Performance > Set NE Performance Monitoring
Time from the main menu.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree, and then choose Performance > NE
Performance Monitoring Time from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Configure the performance monitoring parameters of the NEs.
1. Select 15-Minute or 24-Hour.
2. Select Enabled or Disabled in Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring.
3. Set the start time and end time of the performance monitoring of NEs.
NOTE
l Generally, both Set 15-Minute Monitoring and Set 24-Hour Monitoring are enabled.
l You can specify the start time of the performance monitoring function, only after selecting Enabled
in the Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring area.
l You can specify the end time of the performance monitoring function, only after selecting Enabled
and then selecting To in the Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring area.
4. Click Apply. Close the displayed dialog box.
----End
4.9.2 Setting Severity and Auto Reporting Status of Alarms
This section describes how to set the severity and auto reporting status of specific alarms.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments and Materials
U2000
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired object.
Step 2 Choose Alarm > Alarm Severity and Auto Reporting from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select any items in the column Event and set Severity and Auto Reporting Status for them.
Step 4 Click Apply to save the settings.
Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
----End
4.9.3 Suppressing Alarms for Monitored Objects
This section describes how to suppress specific alarms for a specific monitored object.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board.
Step 2 Choose Alarm > Alarm Suppression from the Function Tree.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
Step 3 Set Monitored Object and click Query.
Step 4 Set Status in Alarm Suppression.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
----End
4.9.4 Suppressing Alarms for NEs
This section describes how to suppress certain alarms for NEs.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE.
Step 2 Choose Alarm > Alarm Suppression from the Function Tree.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
Step 3 Set Status in Alarm Suppression.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
----End
4.9.5 Reversing Alarms for Service Ports
This section describes how to reverse alarms for service ports.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE.
Step 2 Choose Alarm > NE Alarm Attribute from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Set Alarm Reversion to Enable (Manually Restore).
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Step 6 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board.
Step 7 Choose Alarm > Alarm Reversion from the Function Tree.
Step 8 Set Reversion Status for the required port.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
Step 9 Click Apply.
Step 10 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
----End
4.9.6 Setting Trigger Conditions of AIS Insertion
This section describes how to set the trigger conditions of AIS insertion for specific monitored
objects.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board.
Step 2 Choose Alarm > QoS Alarm > AIS Insertion from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Set the trigger conditions of AIS insertion. If you select Enabled under an alarm, the AIS signal
is inserted when this alarm occurs; otherwise, the AIS signal is not inserted when this alarm
occurs.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
----End
4.9.7 Setting Trigger Conditions of UNEQ Insertion
This section describes how to set the trigger conditions of UNEQ insertion for service ports.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
Tools, Instruments and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board.
Step 2 Choose Alarm > QoS Alarm > UNEQ Insertion Switch from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Set the trigger conditions of UNEQ insertion. If you select Enabled under an alarm, the UNEQ
signal (all 0s) is inserted when this alarm occurs; otherwise, the UNEQ signal is not inserted
when this alarm occurs.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
----End
4.9.8 Setting Bit Error Thresholds for Service Ports
This section describes how to set bit error thresholds for service ports.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board.
Step 2 Choose Alarm > QoS Alarm > Bit Error Alarm Threshold from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Set bit error thresholds.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
----End
4.9.9 Setting Monitoring and Auto-Report Status of Performance
Events
This section describes how to set monitoring and auto-report status of specific performance
events for monitored objects.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board.
Step 2 Choose Performance > Performance Monitor Status from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Set the following parameters: Monitor Status, 15-Minute Auto-Report, and 24-Hour Auto-
Report.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
----End
4.9.10 Setting Performance Thresholds
This section describes how to set the thresholds of specific performance events for monitored
objects.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board.
Step 2 Choose Performance > Performance Threshold from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Set Threshold Value.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
4.9.11 Resetting Performance Registers
This section describes how to reset performance registers. After performance registers are reset,
their counts are cleared and they immediately start a new counting period.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
Tools, Instruments and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board.
Step 2 Choose Performance > Reset Board Performance Register from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Set Monitored Object and register types.
Step 4 Click Reset.
Step 5 In the Hint dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.
Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 4 Network Monitoring
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
5 Troubleshooting
About This Chapter
This guide describes the general troubleshooting procedure and the methods of rectifying the
common faults.
5.1 General Troubleshooting Procedure
When handling a fault, make a detailed record of the fault phenomena. The customers in China
can contact our 24-hour technical support center at 400-830-2118, and the customers in areas
outside China can contact the local Huawei offices.
5.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruptions
The service interruption fault indicates the service transmission failure due to an equipment fault
or a link fault.
5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link
When an NE reports MW_LOF, MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD or MW_FEC_UNCOR due
to failure or performance deterioration of a radio link, there is a radio link fault.
5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services
When an NE reports an alarm or a performance event on the IF board, regenerator section (RS),
multiplex section (MS), higher order path (HP), or lower order path (LP), there are bit errors in
services.
5.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications
When an NE reports a large number of justification events about the administrative unit (AU)
pointer or the tributary unit (TU) pointer, there are pointer justification faults.
5.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH Equipment
An interconnection fault occurs when the NE fails in transmitting SDH services with other SDH
equipment.
5.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH Equipment
An interconnection fault occurs when the NE fails in transmitting PDH services with other PDH
equipment.
5.8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults
An Ethernet service fault may be the Ethernet service interruption or Ethernet service
deterioration.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
5.9 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH Plane
The Ethernet services transmitted on the EoS/EoPDH plane can be transmitted over a TDM
network. The faults of the EoS/EoPDH-plane Ethernet services include service interruption and
service degradation.
5.10 Troubleshooting MPLS Tunnels
This section describes how to troubleshoot MPLS tunnels by using the MPLS OAM function or
MPLS Ping/Traceroute function.
5.11 Troubleshooting CES Services
This section describes how to troubleshoot CES services that are interrupted or degraded.
5.12 Troubleshooting ATM Services
This section describes how to troubleshoot ATM services that are interrupted or degraded.
5.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs
This section describes how to troubleshoot Ethernet services that are carried by PWs and
transmitted in the PSN. These Ethernet services are considered faulty when they are interrupted
or deteriorate.
5.14 Troubleshooting L3VPN Services
L3VPN service faults means that services are unavailable after the L3VPN function is
configured. This section describes how to troubleshoot L3VPN services.
5.15 Troubleshooting DCN Faults
A data communication network (DCN) fault causes an NE to be unreachable due to failed or
unstable communications between the NE and the NMS.
5.16 Troubleshooting Orderwire Faults
If orderwire calls cannot get through when services are normal, there is an orderwire fault.
5.17 Typical Cases
This section describes typical microwave link troubleshooting cases.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
5.1 General Troubleshooting Procedure
When handling a fault, make a detailed record of the fault phenomena. The customers in China
can contact our 24-hour technical support center at 400-830-2118, and the customers in areas
outside China can contact the local Huawei offices.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
General Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-1 General troubleshooting procedure
Start
Record the fault phenomena
Analyze fault causes and locate
the fault
Is the fault
rectified?
Report to Huawei
Make a solution together
Attempt to rectify the fault
Is the service restored?
Observe the operation
Is the fault
rectified?
Fill in the troubleshooting
report
End
Other troubleshooting
procedures
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Caused by external factors?
Yes
4
3
2
1
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95

Table 5-1 General troubleshooting procedure
Comment
No.
Description
1 When recording the fault phenomena, make a true and detailed record of the
entire process of the fault. Record the exact time when the fault occurs and
the operations performed before and after the fault occurs. Save the alarms,
performance events, and other important information. You can use the click-
to-collect function on the NMS to collect data.
2 Faults owing to external factors, including the power supply, cables,
environment, and terminal equipment (such as switch devices)
3 Determine the fault type according to preliminary analysis on alarms. Handle
different types of faults as follows:
l 5.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruptions
l 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link
l 5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services
l 5.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications
l 5.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH Equipment
l 5.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH Equipment
l 5.8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults
l 5.9 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH Plane
l 5.10 Troubleshooting MPLS Tunnels
l 5.11 Troubleshooting CES Services
l 5.12 Troubleshooting ATM Services
l 5.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs
l 5.15 Troubleshooting DCN Faults
l 5.16 Troubleshooting Orderwire Faults
l 5.14 Troubleshooting L3VPN Services
4 To provide feedbacks or obtain technical support, customers in China can
contact the 24-hour technical support center at 400-830-2118, and the
customers in areas outside China can contact the local Huawei offices.

5.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruptions
The service interruption fault indicates the service transmission failure due to an equipment fault
or a link fault.
Fault Causes
l The operation is improper.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
The configuration data changes, the loopback is performed, the cable is replaced, or the
board is replaced.
l The transmission NE or link is faulty.
l The interconnection is improper.
If the transmission equipment functions normally and the connection is normal, check
whether the interconnection between the transmission equipment is proper and whether the
switch equipment is faulty.
Fault Locating Methods
1. Check the operations before the service interruption to determine whether the service
interruption results from an incorrect operation.
2. Query alarms on the centralized NMS or the NMS that is used on the site, and then locate
the fault based on the alarm analysis.
If multiple NEs report alarms, analyze the alarms in the following order: equipment alarm,
line alarm, higher order path alarm, and lower order path alarm.
3. If the fault cannot be located through the alarm analysis method, locate the fault by
performing loopback section by section or replacing the corresponding parts.
NOTICE
If the fault cannot be rectified immediately, restore the services quickly by adjusting the service
route or performing a forced switching.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Handle the fault by following the emergency maintenance process.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
Figure 5-2 Description of the general procedure
Start
Service interruoted by
external causes?
Yes
No
NE access successful and
alaarms cleared?
Query NE status and
alarms by using the NMS
Yes
Clear the alarm
No
Rectify the fault on site
Is there an incorrect
operation?
Cancel the operation
1
Yes
No
Is the service restored?
Contact Huawei engineers
No
Proceed with the next step
Is the service
restored?
No
End
Yes
Check the troubleshooting result
5
4
Yes
2
3
Contact related departments
to handle the problem

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
Table 5-2 Description of the main procedure
Comment
No.
Description
1 The common incorrect operations are as follows:
l Modifying data configuration
l Performing loopback operations
l Shutting down the laser
l Muting the ODU
l Replacing boards/cables
l Loading the software
2 Faults owing to external factors, including the power supply, cables,
environment, and terminal equipment (such as switch devices)
3 The procedure is as follows:
1. Check the NE status.
2. If the NE is unreachable to the NMS, perform field troubleshooting
according to Figure 5-3. If alarms are reported on the NE, browse the
current alarms.
4 Generally, the following alarms can be cleared on the NMS:
l APS_MANUAL_STOP, APS_FAIL
l ETH_APS_LOST
l BD_NOT_INSTALLED, DBMS_ERROR, NESOFT_MM,
NESF_LOST
l ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL, ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH
l HP_TIM, HP_UNEQ
l IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN, IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN
l LOOP_ALM
l J0_MM
l LPS_UNI_BI_M
l LP_SLM, LP_TIM, LP_UNEQ
l RADIO_MUTE
l MW_CFG_MISMATCH
l WRG_BD_TYPE
l ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI, ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
Comment
No.
Description
5 After the fault is rectified, proceed as follows:
1. Check the alarms, and ensure that the system is running properly.
2. Assign personnel to monitor the operation of the system during the peak
service hour, ensuring that subsequent faults can be handled in time.
3. Fill in the field maintenance operation sheet, record the fault symptoms
and troubleshooting results, and then send them to Huawei. Table 2 shows
the field maintenance operation sheet.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
Figure 5-3 Field troubleshooting sub-procedure
Equipment
alarm?
3
No
4
Yes
Clear the alarm
Yes
Clear the alarm
No
5
Yes
Clear the alarm
No
6
Yes
Clear the alarm
No
End
Proceed to the next
step
Is the service
restored?
Yes
No
Start
Obvious equipment
damage?
Yes
Repair or replace
the equipment
No Troubleshoot the
power input
Browse alarms
locally by using the
LCT
2
1
No
Yes
Troubleshoot the
inter-connection
faulty
Locate the fault by
performing loopback
operations section by
section
7
Yes
Troubleshoot the
packet service fault
8
Radio link
alarm?
No
Yes
Is the PWR indicator
on the PIU on?
High order
path alarm?
Low order
path alarm?
Faulty inter-
connection with
SDH/PDH equipment?
Packet service
fault?
No

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
Table 5-3 Description of the field troubleshooting sub-procedure
Comment
No.
Description
1 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:
1. Check whether the circuit breaker for the input power is off. If the circuit
breaker is automatically turned off, find the cause (such as short circuits
or insufficient fuse capacity), and rectify the fault accordingly.
2. Check the power cables, especially the connectors of the power cables. If
the power cables or connectors of the power cables are incorrect, replace
the power cables or re-prepare the connectors of the power cables.
3. Check the voltage and polarization of the input power. If the voltage or
polarization of the input power does not meet the requirements, contact
power engineers for troubleshooting.
NOTE
The recommended fuse capacity of 10 A can meet requirements under the maximum
power consumption. The following formula can be used to calculate the fuse capacity:
Fuse capacity = (Total power consumption x 1.5) / (Rated voltage x 87.5%).
The rated voltage of the input power is -48 V/-60 V and the permitted voltage ranges
from -38.4 V to -72.0 V.
2 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:
1. Logging In to the Web LCT (Through NMS Interface).
2. Creating NEs by Using the Search Method.
3. Logging In to an NE (Web LCT).
4. Checking Alarms.
NOTE
If you fail to log in to the created NE, ensure that the operations you performed are
correct, and then locate and rectify the fault according to the indicators of the system
control, switching, and timing board. For details about the indicators, see the IDU
Hardware Description.
3 Pay special attention to the following alarms:
l HARD_BAD, BD_STATUS, FAN_FAIL
l NESF_LOST
l POWER_ALM, TEMP_ALARM
l RADIO_TSL_HIGH, RADIO_TSL_LOW
l IF_INPWR_ABN, IF_CABLE_OPEN
l VOLT_LOS
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
Comment
No.
Description
4 Pay special attention to the following alarms:
l PG_LINK_FAIL, PG_PRT_DEGRADED
l MW_LIM, MW_LOF
l MW_BER_EXC
l RADIO_RSL_HIGH, RADIO_RSL_LOW
l R_LOS, R_LOF, R_LOC
l MS_AIS
l AU_AIS, AU_LOP
l B1_EXC, B2_EXC
5 Pay special attention to the following alarms:
l HP_LOM, HP_UNEQ
l B3_EXC
6 Pay special attention to the following alarms:
l T_ALOS
l E1_LOC
l LP_UNEQ
l TU_AIS, TU_LOP
l BIP_EXC
7 See Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH Equipment or
Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH Equipment.
8 See Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults, Troubleshooting
Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH Plane, Troubleshooting CES
Services, Troubleshooting ATM Services, Troubleshooting L3VPN
Services, and Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs.

Experience and Summary
The maintenance personnel need to perform the routine maintenance operations periodically, to
detect and rectify faults before the faults affect the services and therefore to reduce the equipment
fault rate.
5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link
When an NE reports MW_LOF, MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD or MW_FEC_UNCOR due
to failure or performance deterioration of a radio link, there is a radio link fault.
Radio Link Faults
Radio link faults are classified into:
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
l Equipment faults, including outdoor component faults, cable faults, and power supply faults
l Propagation faults, including fading, interference, and poor line of sight (LOS)
l Poor construction quality, including poor antenna/component installation, poor grounding,
and poor waterproofing
Figure 5-4 Radio link faults
Hardware
Faults
Causes of radio
link faults
Propagation
faults
Interference
Fading
Poor LOS
External
interference
Over-reach
interference
Rain
fading
Multipath
fading
Reflection
LOS not
achieved
Near-field
blocking
Poor construction
quality
Antenna
installation
Cables
Antennas
not aligned
Antennas
loosened or
offset
Poor
grounding
Poor
waterproofing
Equipment
faults
Power
faults
Damaged
cable
components

Fading Phenomena and Causes
During microwave network maintenance, link fading is the main cause for radio link faults. Link
fading is more difficult to locate and handle than hardware faults.
Table 5-4 Fading phenomena and causes
Fading Type Fading Phenomena Fading Cause
Classifie
d by RSL
Down
fading
The RSL is lower than the RSL
after free space fading. The
difference can be tens of
decibels.
l Multi-path fading
l Duct-type fading
l Rain fading
Up
fading
The RSL is higher than the RSL
in the free space. The difference
can be 10-odd decibels.
l Interference
l Long delay caused by terrain
reflection
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
Fading Type Fading Phenomena Fading Cause
Classifie
d by
fading
duration
Fast
fading
The fading lasts from several
milliseconds to tens of seconds.
Generally, fast fading is caused
by multipath fading. It occurs
periodically. To be specific, fast
fading occurs in the period from
18:00 to 20:00 of a day or in a
certain season of a year.
l Multi-path fading
l Duct-type fading
l Long delay caused by terrain
reflection
Slow
fading
The fading lasts from tens of
seconds to several hours.
l Generally, slow up fading is
caused by interference.
l Slow down fading is caused
by rain, and therefore is also
called rain fading. Rain
fading occurs on links
working at a frequency of 10
GHz or in areas where heavy
rain occurs.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-5 Procedure for troubleshooting the radio link
Start
RSL greater than the
receiver sensitivity?
Is there an
incorrect operation?
Undo the operation.
Yes
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
End
Hardware
alarms exist?
Rectify equipment faults.
Co-channel or adjacent-
channel interference
Long delay caused
by terrain reflection
The link is blocked.
The antennas are offset.
Passive components like
hybrid couplers or flexible
waveguides are faulty.
Rain fading
Multipath fading
Terrain reflection
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Is the RSL value
always less than the
designed value?
Analyze the historical RSL
records and the current
RSL value
Are there IF or RF
alarms on the link?
Troubleshoot the fault as
a non-radio link fault.
Does the fault occur
regularly?
Troubleshoot the fault by
replacing the suspected
faulty parts.
Is the fault rectified?
Is it raining when the
fault occurs?

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
Table 5-5 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting the radio link
Mark Description
1 Check whether any misoperation has been performed:
l Shutting down the power supply, which caused the local or remote NE to be
unreachable to the NMS
l Muting the radio transmitter, which caused the RADIO_MUTE alarm to be
reported
l Looping back IF ports, which caused the LOOP_ALM alarm to be reported
l Configuring incorrect radio link data, which caused the
MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm to be reported
l Enabling an AM self-check, which caused the MW_AM_TEST alarm
l Enabling IF consecutive wave output
2 Hardware fault alarms include:
l HARD_BAD
l RADIO_TSL_HIGH, RADIO_TSL_LOW
3 IF and RF alarms include:
l MW_LOF, MW_LIM, MW_RDI
l MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR
l RADIO_RSL_HIGH, RADIO_RSL_LOW
l RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH
l AM_DOWNSHIFT
4 RSL is the major reference for locating and handling propagation faults. Follow
instructions in 4.4.3 Browsing Current Performance Events of the radio link
and 4.4.4 Browsing Historical Performance Data of a Radio Link to browse and
analyze the historical RSL records and the current RSL value.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
Mark Description
5 l If the receive power fluctuates within a range less than 10 dB, mute the opposite
NE and check the RSL at the local NE.
After the opposite NE is muted, if the RSL value is greater than -90 dBm, there
may be co-channel interference that affects long-term availability and error-
second performance of the system.
1. Follow instructions in 8.1.2 Scanning Interfering Signals or use a
frequency spectrum analyzer to locate the possible interfering frequencies.
2. If a third-party RF device is the interfering source, contact the local frequency
spectrum management department to clear the interference.
If interference is caused due to improper route planning, modify the
frequency plan to minimize the interference impacts.
l If there is an intensively reflective terrain, adjust the mounting height of the
antenna to change the link elevation, therefore minimizing reflection impacts.
Alternatively, replan the route to avoid the intensively reflective terrain.
If receive power changes radically within seconds (fluctuation range varying
from more than 10 dB to dozens of dB) and the change occurs periodically (for
example, always at midnight), there may be a fault caused by terrain reflection.
Check whether there are rivers or lakes on the propagation trail.
6 If the RSL value had been smaller than the designed value for a long time before
the fault occurred, the propagation trail is faulty. Proceed as follows:
l Check whether the antenna connection is loose or the antenna is unaligned. If
yes, re-align the antenna.
l Check whether there are any blocks in the radio transmission trail or in the near
field of the antenna. If yes, adjust the mounting height of the antenna to avoid
blocks, replan the radio link route.
l Check whether loss increases because the antenna, hybrid coupler, and flexible
waveguide are not intact or are wet. If yes, replace the faulty components.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
Mark Description
7 If a radio link fault occurred in poor weather conditions (such as rainy, snowy, or
foggy) and was rectified after the conditions disappeared, the fault cause was
weather fading. For a fault caused by weather fading, check whether the link fading
margin is insufficient.
1. Calculate the actual link availability. Calculate the total link fault time within
one year or half a year. Calculate the actual link availability using the following
formula: <Link availability> = <Total fault time>/<Calculation period>.
l If the actual link availability is lower than the designed value by an order of
magnitude, the link fading margin is insufficient. Re-plan the radio link
parameters.
l If the difference between the actual link availability and the designed value
is small, no special handling operations are required.
2. Before re-planning a radio link, check whether the rain zone parameters, the
refractivity gradient, and the planning algorithm are incorrect. The practicable
measure could be as follows:
l Increase the transmit power or replace the original antenna with a new one
having a larger diameter to increase the system gain and the fading margin.
l Use a frequency band on which rain fading has smaller impacts.
8 If the receive power fluctuates greatly and fast (by more than 10 dB or several 10
dB within several seconds or several 10 seconds), fast fading occurs.
Fast fading may occur due to:
l Multi-path fading: Faults occur periodically, for example, at the day-and-night
alternating time period.
l Duct-type fading: random fast fading
To handle fast fading, proceed as follows:
l Increase the path inclination: That is, adjust the antenna mount heights at both
ends to increase the height differences between the antennas at both ends.
l Reduce surface reflection. For apparent strong reflection surfaces, for example,
large areas of water, flat lands, and bold mountain tops, adjust antennas to move
reflection points out of the strong reflection areas or mask the reflection by using
landforms.
l Reduce the path clearance. With LOS conditions guaranteed, lower antenna
mount heights as much as possible.
9 If all preceding actions cannot rectify the fault, replace the ODU at both ends. Then,
check whether services are functional. If the fault persists, replan the radio link by
changing the operating frequency, using antennas with a larger diameter, changing
the antenna heights, or changing the routes.

Experience and Summary
l During the commissioning, ensure that the antenna is aligned properly, to prevent possible
incipient faults.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
l Periodically collect and analyze the data about the changes in the transmit power and receive
power so that you can detect and then rectify the incipient faults accordingly in time.
5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services
When an NE reports an alarm or a performance event on the IF board, regenerator section (RS),
multiplex section (MS), higher order path (HP), or lower order path (LP), there are bit errors in
services.
Fault Phenomena
Table 5-6 Bit errors
Bit Error
Type
Description Related Alarm and Performance Event
IF bit errors Refer to the bit errors that the
IF board detects through the
self-defined overhead byte in
the microwave frame
l MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD
l IF_BBE, IF_ES, IF_SES, IF_CSES,
IF_UAS
RS bit errors Refer to the bit errors that the
line processing unit or the IF
board that works in SDH
mode through the B1
overhead byte in the RS
overhead
l B1_EXC, B1_SD
l RS_CROSSTR
l RSBBE, RSES, RSSES, RSCSES,
RSUAS
NOTE
The IF board that works in PDH mode may also
detect the previous RS bit error alarms and
performance events. In this case, the IF board
detects bit error alarms and performance events in
the PDH microwave frame through the self-
defined B1 byte.
MS bit errors Refer to the bit errors that the
line board detects through the
B2 byte in the MS overhead
l B2_EXC, B2_SD
l MS_CROSSTR
l MSBBE, MSES, MSSES, MSCSES,
MSUAS
HP bit errors Refer to the bit errors that the
line board detects through the
B2 byte in the MS overhead
l B3_EXC, B3_SD
l HP_CROSSTR
l HPBBE, HPES, HPSES, HPCSES,
HPUAS
LP bit errors Refer to the bit errors that the
tributary board or IF board
detects through the V5 byte
in the VC-12 overhead
l BIP_EXC, BIP_SD
l LP_CROSSTR
l LPBBE, LPES, LPSES, LPCSES,
LPUAS

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
Fault Causes
Table 5-7 Causes of bit errors
Fault Common Fault Cause
There are IF bit errors. l The radio link is faulty.
Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD,
MW_FEC_UNCOR, MW_LOF or RPS_INDI alarm is
reported. If yes, the radio link is faulty.
l The services are incorrectly configured.
Check whether the MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported.
If yes, the number of E1 services is inconsistent on both ends of
the radio link.
l The IF board at the local end or opposite end is faulty.
There are RS bit
errors.
l The line is faulty.
The common causes for bit errors on the optical line are as
follows: the optical fiber line, the optical power is abnormal,
the fiber performance deteriorates, or the fiber connector is
not clean.
In the case of bit errors on the radio link, check whether the
MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR or
RPS_INDI alarm is reported. If yes, the radio link is faulty.
l The line processing unit or IF board is faulty.
l The clock unit is faulty.
l The quality of the clock over the network declines.
When the quality of the clock over the network declines, a pointer
justification event occurs.
There are not any RS
bit errors but there are
MS bit errors or HP bit
errors.
l The line processing unit or IF board is faulty.
l The quality of the clock over the network declines.
When the quality of the clock over the network declines, a pointer
justification event occurs.
l The working temperature of the line processing unit or IF board
is excessively high.
There are only LP bit
errors.
l The tributary board is faulty.
l The cross-connect unit is faulty.
l The working temperature of the board is excessively high.
l The working temperature of the cross-connect unit is excessively
high.
l There is a power surge or an external interference source, or the
equipment is not properly grounded. (This cause does not need
to be considered during the troubleshooting of an IF board.)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
Fault Locating Methods
1. Analyze the equipment alarms and performance events that are related to service
configuration errors and bit errors.
2. When there are many types of alarms and performance events on a service path, first analyze
RS bit errors, then MS bit errors, HP bit errors, and finally LP bit errors.
3. When multiple paths have bit errors, first check whether the overlapping part of the service
paths is faulty.
4. If you fail to locate the fault by analyzing the alarms and performance events, perform
loopback operations section by section.
5. Replace the parts whose performance may deteriorate with new ones.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-6 Procedure for troubleshooting bit errors
Start
Is there an
equipment alarm?
No
Yes
Clear the alarm
Is there an
RS bit error alarm or a
performance
event?
Yes
Troubleshoot RS bit errors
on the IF board
No
Is there an
MS/ HP alarm or
performance
event?
Yes Troubleshoot MS/HP bit
errors
No
Is there an LP
alarm?
Yes Troubleshoot LP bit
errors
Locate the fault by performing
loopback operations section
by section
No
Proceed with the next step
Is the fault
rectified?
End
Yes
No
Is there a pointer
justification event?
Yes
Troubleshoot the pointer
justification
No
If the
alarming
board is
Troubleshoot RS bit errors
on the SDH optical interface
board
IF board
SDH optical
interface board
2
3
4
5
6
1

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
Table 5-8 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting bit errors
Comment
No.
Description
1 Pay special attention to the following alarms:
l TEMP_ALARM
l HARD_BAD
2 See 5.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications.
3 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:
1. Check whether the line board reports the B1_EXC, B1_SD, or
RS_CROSSTR alarm.
2. Interchange the Tx fiber core and the Rx fiber core at both ends of the
service path. If bit errors change after the exchange, it indicates that the
fiber is faulty. Otherwise, the equipment at both ends of the service path
is faulty.
3. In the case of a fiber fault, check whether the fiber between the equipment
and the ODF and the section of the fiber that is led out of the
telecommunications room are pressed. In addition, check whether the fiber
connectors are clean.
4. In the case of faults at both ends of the service path, use a fiber jumper to
loop back the optical ports. If the fault persists after the loopback, the line
board may be faulty.
5. In the case of faults at both ends of the service path, you can also replace
the board where the line unit is located or interchange between the board
and another board of the same type that is working normally. If the alarm
changes after the exchange, it indicates that the board is faulty.
4 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:
1. Check whether the IF board reports the MW_BER_EXC,
MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR, MW_LOF, RPS_INDI,
B1_EXC, B1_SD, or RS_CROSSTR alarm.
2. If any of the alarms are reported, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio
Link and rectify the fault.
5 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:
1. Perform a loopback on the line board that reports the alarm.
If the fault persists after the loopback, replace the line board.
If the fault is rectified after the loopback, replace the line board at the
transmit end.
2. If you fail to rectify the fault by replacing the line board, check whether
there is a power surge or an external interference source or whether the
equipment is not properly grounded.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
Comment
No.
Description
6 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:
1. Replace the board where the services are configured based on how the
service paths that have bit errors overlap each other.
2. If you fail to rectify the fault by replacing the board, check whether there
is a power surge or an external interference source or whether the
equipment is not properly grounded.

Experience and Summary
NOTE
The TDM services mentioned refer to Native TDM services.
The handling procedure applies when the STM-1e port is faulty
l During the routine maintenance, check bit error performance events periodically and handle
them in time.
l To locate a fault, prefer the method of analyzing alarms and performance events to the
method of performing loopback operations and the method of replacing the parts.
5.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications
When an NE reports a large number of justification events about the administrative unit (AU)
pointer or the tributary unit (TU) pointer, there are pointer justification faults.
Fault Phenomena
When the position of the first byte of the VC-4 in the AU-4 payload changes, the AU pointer
makes a justification accordingly. The performance events related to the AU pointer justification
are as follows:
l AUPJCHIGH
l AUPJCLOW
l AUPJCNEW
NOTE
The AU pointer justification is made at an upstream NE but is detected and reported at a downstream NE.
When the service is configured to be at the VC-12 level, apply the reframing process to terminate
the AU pointer justification. The terminating method is to transform the AU pointer justification
into the TU pointer justification. The performance events related to the TU pointer justification
are as follows:
l TUPJCHIGH
l TUPJCLOW
l TUPJCNEW
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
NOTE
The TU pointer justification is made at the NE where the AU pointer is transformed into the TU pointer,
but is detected and reported by the tributary board of the NE where services are terminated.
Fault Causes
l The clock sources or the clock source levels are configured incorrectly. As a result, there
are two clock sources on the same network or a timing loop occurs.
l The fiber connections are incorrect. As a result, a timing loop occurs.
l The quality of the clock source declines, the clock unit is faulty, or there are other clock-
related faults.
l The tributary board is faulty (only for the TU pointer justification).
Fault Locating Methods
When there are both AU pointer justifications and TU pointer justifications on a service path,
first handle the AU pointer justifications and then the TU pointer justifications.
Fault Fault Locating Method
AU pointer justification 1. Analyze and clear clock alarms.
2. Rectify the incorrect data configuration and incorrect fiber
connections.
3. Change the clock configuration to locate the station whose
clock is asynchronous with the entire network.
4. Replace the parts whose performance may deteriorate with
new ones.
TU pointer justification 1. Analyze and clear clock alarms.
2. Rectify the incorrect data configuration and incorrect fiber
connections.
3. Change the clock and service configuration to locate the
station whose clock is asynchronous with the entire
network.
4. Replace the parts whose performance may deteriorate with
new ones.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-7 Procedure for troubleshooting pointer justifications
Start
Is there a clock-related
alarm?
No
Yes
Clear the alarm
Incorrect fiber
connection?
Yes
Reconnect the fibers
No
An AU pointer
justification event?
Yes
No
A TU pointer
justification event?
Yes
Proceed with the
next step
Is the fault rectified?
End
Yes
No
Incorrect
configuration?
Modify the data
configuration
No
Check the clock
configuration
Yes
Check the fiber
connection
Locate the faulty board
Locate the NE whose clock
is out of synchronization
Locate the faulty board
Locate the NE whose clock
is out of synchronization
No
1
2
3
4
6
5
7

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
Table 5-9 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting pointer justifications
Comment
No.
Description
1 Pay special attention to the following alarms:
l TEMP_ALARM
l HARD_BAD
l LTI
l SYNC_C_LOS
l S1_SYN_CHANGE
l EXT_SYNC_LOS
2 Check the following points:
l Check whether there are two clock reference sources on the entire network.
l Check whether a timing loop is generated.
3 Query ECC routes to check whether the fibers are connected correctly. Check
the fiber connections in the east and west directions of the NE that reports the
pointer justification event.
4 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:
1. Locate a VC-4 channel that reports an AU pointer justification event.
2. Along the service source direction of the VC-4 channel, locate the source
NE of the entire VC-4 service (not the source NE of a timeslot in the VC-4).
3. Set the clock of the source NE to the free-run mode. Set the other NEs to
trace the clock of the source NE along the direction of the VC-4 service.
4. Along the clock tracing direction, locate the line board that is the first to
report the AU pointer justification of the VC-4 path.
The clock of the remote NE to which the line board is connected is
asynchronous with the reference clock. Hence, the line board on the remote
NE that receives the clock signal, the line board that sends the clock signal
to the remote NE, and the clock unit of the remote NE, may be faulty.
5. Set the clock of the sink NE to the free-run mode. Set the other NEs to
trace the clock of the sink NE along the direction of the VC-4 service.
6. Along the clock tracing direction, locate the line board that is the first to
report the AU pointer justification of the VC-4 path.
The clock of the remote NE to which the line board is connected is
asynchronous with the reference clock. Hence, the line board on the NE
that receives the clock signal, the line board that sends the clock signal to
the NE, and the clock unit of the NE, may be faulty.
7. Compare the results and find out the common points.
5 Replace the possibly faulty boards.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
Comment
No.
Description
6 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:
1. Modify the service configuration to ensure that the NE where the clock
reference source functions as the central NE and that the other NEs have
the E1 services of the central NE.
2. Along the clock tracing direction, locate the NE that is the first to report
the TU pointer justification event.
The clock of the NE is asynchronous with the reference clock. Hence, the
line board on the NE that receives the clock signal, the line board that sends
the clock signal to the NE, and the clock unit of the NE, may be faulty.
3. Modify the configuration data to ensure that all the NEs trace the clock
along the other direction.
4. Along the clock tracing direction, locate the NE that is the first to report
the TU pointer justification event.
The clock of the NE is asynchronous with the reference clock. Hence, the
line board on the NE that receives the clock signal, the line board that sends
the clock signal to the NE, and the clock unit of the NE, may be faulty.
5. Compare the results and find out the common points.
NOTE
This method is also applicable to locating an AU pointer justification event.
7 Replace the possibly faulty boards. In the case of a TU pointer justification
event, check whether the line board, the clock board, and the tributary board
are faulty.

Experience and Summary
On a properly synchronized network, there are few pointer justifications (less than six per day
on each port). Hence, monitoring the pointer of an SDH transmission system is an effective way
to check the synchronization status of the system.
5.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH
Equipment
An interconnection fault occurs when the NE fails in transmitting SDH services with other SDH
equipment.
Fault Causes
l The VC-12 numbering method of the OptiX equipment is different from the numbering
method of the equipment of certain vendors.
The OptiX equipment applies the timeslot numbering method. The numbering formula is:
VC-12 number = TUG-3 number + (TUG-2 number - 1) x 3 + (TU-12 number - 1) x 21.
This method is also called as the method of numbering by order.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
Certain equipment applies the line numbering method. The numbering formula is: VC-12
number = (TUG-3 number - 1) x 21 + (TUG-2 number - 1) x 3 + TU-12 number. This
method is also called as the interleaved method.
l The overhead bytes at both ends are inconsistent.
l The indexes of the SDH interfaces do not meet the requirements.
NOTE
In the case of interconnection with ATM or Ethernet equipment, the common cause for an interconnection
failure is that the service is not set to the VC-4 pass-through service and thus the overheads are processed
in the terminating mode instead of the pass-through mode.
Fault Locating Methods
Analyze the fault phenomena and alarms that are generated on the equipment. Check the possible
fault causes one after another.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-8 Procedure for troubleshooting the interconnection with SDH equipment
Start
Is the
interconnected equipment
the ATM/IP equipment?
No
Yes
Set the interconnection
service to be the VC-4 pass-
through service
Is there an overhead
setting related alarm?
Yes
Handle the alarm
No
Is the interface the
STM-1 electrical
interface?
Yes
No
Go to the next
step
Is the fault cleared?
End
Yes
No
Is the
numbering mode the
line numbering?
Modify the data configuration.
Use the line numbering
method to set the VC-12
No
Query the VC-12 numbering
method of the interconnected
equipment
Yes
1
Check the grounding
2
Test the indexes of interfaces
Do the interfaces meet
relevant standards?
Handle the faults of the local
equipment
Handle the faults of the
interconnected equipment
Yes
No
3

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
121
Table 5-10 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting the interconnection with SDH
equipment
Comment
No.
Description
1 Pay special attention to the following alarms:
l J0_MM
l HP_TIM
l LP_TIM
l HP_SLM
l LP_SLM
2 Check the following points:
l Check whether all the equipment and the DDF in the equipment room are
jointly grounded.
l Check whether the shielding layer of the coaxial cable connector on the
DDF is connected to the protection ground.
l Check whether the shielding layers of coaxial cables are grounded in the
same way.
NOTE
Disconnect all the signal cables between the interconnecting equipment. Use a
multimeter to measure the level between the shielding layers of the coaxial cables at the
receive and transmit ends of the SDH equipment. In addition, measure the level between
the shielding layers of the coaxial cables at the receive and transmit ends of the opposite
equipment. If the potential difference is large (about 0.5 V), the fault may be caused by
the grounding.
3 Common indexes of the optical interfaces are as follows:
l Mean launched optical power
l Receiver sensitivity
l Overload optical power
l Permitted frequency deviation of the input interface
Common indexes of the electrical interfaces:
l Permitted frequency deviation of the input interface
l Allowed attenuation of the input interface

Experience and Summary
To rectify an interconnection fault, you must be familiar with the characteristics of the interfaces
on the interconnected equipment.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
5.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH
Equipment
An interconnection fault occurs when the NE fails in transmitting PDH services with other PDH
equipment.
Fault Causes
l There is an impedance mismatch between interfaces.
l The equipment is not grounded properly.
l The cable performance deteriorates.
l The indexes of the PDH interfaces do not meet the requirements.
Fault Locating Methods
Analyze the fault phenomena and alarms that are generated on the equipment. Check the possible
fault causes one after another.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-9 Procedure for troubleshooting the interconnection with PDH equipment
Start
Is there an
impedance mismatch?
Yes
Replace the cable or the
tributary board
Check the cables.
Is in good conditions?
No
Yes
Proceed with the next step. Is the fault rectified?
End
Yes
No
Is the cable a
coaxial cable?
No
Check the impedance of
the interfaces.
Yes
Adjust the cables.
Test the indexes of
Interfaces.
Do the interfaces
meet standards?
Troubleshoot the faults
on the local equipment.
Troubleshoot the faults on
the interconnected
Equipment.
Yes
No
Check the grounding.
No
1
2
3
4

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
Table 5-11 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting the interconnection with PDH
equipment
Comment
No.
Description
1 Check the impedance of the E1 path. Ensure that the impedance of the E1
path is consistent with the cable type.
2 Check the following points:
l Check whether all the equipment and the DDF in the telecommunications
room are jointly grounded.
l Check whether the shield layers of the coaxial cable connectors on the
DDF are connected to the protection ground.
l Check whether the shield layers of coaxial cables are grounded in the same
manner.
NOTE
Disconnect all the signal cables between the interconnecting equipment sets. Use a
multimeter to measure the level between the shield layers of the coaxial cables at the
receive and transmit ends of the PDH equipment and the level between the shield layers
of the coaxial cables at the receive and transmit ends of the equipment at the opposite
end. If the potential difference is large (about 0.5 V), the fault may be caused due to the
improper grounding.
3 Check the following points:
l Check whether the wires of the cable are correctly connected.
l Check whether the cable is broken or pressed.
l Check whether the cable signal is interfered (for example, when the trunk
cable is bound with the power cable, the cable signal is interfered by the
power signal).
NOTE
Checking the cables involves checking the cables from the DDF to the client side
and checking the cables from the DDF to the transmission equipment side.
4 Check the following indexes:
l Input jitter tolerance
l Permitted frequency deviation of the input interface
l Output jitter
l Output frequency deviation

Experience and Summary
NOTE
The PDH services mentioned refer to Native E1 services.
In the case of interconnection with PDH equipment, improper grounding is the most common
cause for an interconnection failure.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
5.8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults
An Ethernet service fault may be the Ethernet service interruption or Ethernet service
deterioration.
Fault Phenomena
The Ethernet service interruption indicates that the Ethernet service is interrupted. The Ethernet
service deterioration indicates that the Ethernet service is abnormal. For example, the network
access speed is low, the equipment delay is long, the packet loss occurs, or incorrect packets
exist in the received or transmitted data.
Table 5-12 Common faults of Ethernet services
Symptom Alarm
Ethernet
services are
interrupted.
Hardware
alarms
Such as HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM,
WRG_BD_TYPE, BD_STATUS, COMMUN_FAIL,
and LASER_MOD_ERR.
Link alarms Such as ETH_LOS, ETH_LINK_DOWN,
ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK, LOOP_ALM,
PORTMODE_MISMATCH, and LAG_DOWN.
Service alarms Such as ETH_CFM_AIS, ETH_CFM_LCO, and
ETH_NO_FLOW.
Radio link
alarms
Such as MW_LOF, MW_LIM.
Ethernet
services suffer
degradation.
Hardware
alarms
Such as HARD_BAD, and TEMP_ALARM.
Link alarms Such as PORTMODE_MISMATCH, and
LAG_MEMBER_DOWN.
Service alarms Such as FLOW_OVER, MAC_EXT_EXC,
MAC_FCS_EXC, and DROPRATIO_OVER.
Radio link
alarms
Such as AM_DOWNSHIFT, MW_BER_EXC, and
MW_BER_SD.

Fault Causes
l The possible human factors are as follows:
An Ethernet board loopback or a transmission line loopback occurs.
The parameter settings of the Ethernet ports, such as the port enabled state, working
mode, and flow control, are different from the parameter settings of the Ethernet ports
on the interconnected equipment.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
The service configuration is incorrect.
l The equipment at the local end is faulty.
l The line board is faulty or has bit errors.
l A LAG or PLA group has faulty member links, resulting in decreased Ethernet bandwidth.
l When the AM function is enabled, the Ethernet service bandwidth decreases due to the
downward AM switch.
l The interconnected equipment is faulty.
l The network cable is faulty.
l External electromagnetic interference is severe.
Fault Locating Methods
1. Rectify the human-caused faults such as a loopback and a data configuration error.
2. Locate the fault cause according to the equipment alarms.
3. Locate the fault cause according to the RMON performance events and alarms.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis
Figure 5-10 Procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet services configured on a per NE basis
Any abnormal
RMON performance
events?
Clear the alarm
6
No
Yes
An equipment
alarm or alarm on
the radio link?
An Ethernet alarm?
Yes
No
Yes
Troubleshoot the fault
according to the flow of
handling RMON
performance events
3
2
Troubleshoot equipment
faults by performing
loopbacks section by
section or replacing boards
Proceed
with the
next step
Is the fault
rectified?
End
Yes
No
A loop formed by
the E-LAN service
trails?
No
No
Yes
Release the loop
Start
Incorrect operation?
1
Cancel this operation
No
Yes
44
3
2
1
Query the port and service
traffic and analyze the fault
causes
Clear the alarm
5
No

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
Table 5-13 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet services configured on a
per NE basis
Comment
No.
Description
1 Check the following points:
l Whether a loopback is set for the Ethernet port
l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission line
l Whether the parameter settings of the Ethernet port, such as the port
enabled state, working mode, and flow control, are the same as the
parameter settings of the Ethernet port on the interconnected equipment
l Check whether the Ethernet protocol and the Ethernet service
configuration (especially the attributes of the Ethernet port) are correct.
2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms:
l POWER_ALM, FAN_FAIL, HARD_BAD, BD_STATUS,
TEMP_ALARM
l NESF_LOST
l RADIO_TSL_HIGH, RADIO_TSL_LOW
l IF_INPWR_ABN
Pay special attention to the following line alarms:
l MW_LIM
l MW_LOF
l MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR
l MW_RDI
l RADIO_RSL_HIGH, RADIO_RSL_LOW
3 Pay special attention to the following alarms:
l ETH_LOS
l ETH_NO_FLOW
l LAG_DOWN, LAG_MEMBER_DOWN
l FLOW_OVER
4 Follow the instructions in Detecting E-LAN Service Loops to check whether
E-LAN services are looped back. Release the loops if any are formed.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
Comment
No.
Description
5 Query Ethernet service rates on various ports to analyze the service rates
and locate faults.
l If the Ethernet port connecting the peer equipment has a too high or too
low receive rate, the peer equipment is faulty.
l If the rate of the port approaches or reaches the license capacity of the IF
port, the license capacity is too low and you need to apply for a license
allowing for a higher capacity.
l If the transmit rate of the port approaches or reaches the maximum Ethernet
bandwidth of the IF port, the bandwidth of the IF port is too low and needs
to be increased by the network planning personnel.
l If the transmit rate of the port is much lower than the receive rate of the
Ethernet port, or if the receive rate of the port is much higher than the
transmit rate of the Ethernet port, the local end is faulty. Locate the fault
as follows:
Check the Ethernet service configuration and QoS configuration.
By Querying port flow classification or packet loss performance of
egress queues on the NMS, check whether QoS settings are correct
according to the packet loss data.
Check the Ethernet interface board, IF board, and system control,
switching and timing board by means of board replacement.
If the transmitted traffic is equal to the received traffic, create flows specific
to the VLANs in the port policy, and check if sufficient bandwidth is available
for the flows by querying flow traffic.
6 For RMON performance events, see the C RMON Event Reference.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
Figure 5-11 Procedure for troubleshooting an RMON performance event
Is it a MTU setting
problem?
Yes
Modify the MTU
value
No
Proceed with
the next step
Is the fault
rectified?
End
Yes
No
No
Is the test passed?
No
Yes
Use a meter to perform the test
Rectify the fault of the
interconnected equipment
Rectify the equipment fault by
loopback section by section or
replacing the board
5
Are broadcast packets
excessive?
No
Yes Handle the problem on
excessive broadcast
packets
4
Start
Rectify the fault of line bit
errors
No
Yes
Is there any FCS error?
Is there any collision
or fragment?
Yes
Check the working mode
of the port
2
3
View the statistics group
performance on an Ethernet port
1

Table 5-14 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting an RMON performance event
No. Description
1 4.6.2 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization to
obtain the real-time performance statistics data of the Ethernet port.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
No. Description
2 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:
l Check the Ethernet cable. If the Ethernet cable is not qualified, replace it
with a new one.
l Change the Ethernet port that accesses the services on the Ethernet board.
If the new port does not have the RMON performance of an FCS error, it
indicates that the hardware of the original port is faulty. Otherwise, the
hardware of the Ethernet port on the equipment at the opposite end is
faulty.
3 Check the following points:
l Whether the port operating rates on the equipment at both ends are the
same
l Whether the working modes (full duplex or half duplex) of the Ethernet
port on the equipment at both ends are the same
l Whether the Ethernet port is set to auto-negotiation mode at one end and
the Ethernet port is set to full duplex mode at the opposite end (When the
Ethernet port is set to auto-negotiation mode at one end, the Ethernet port
must not be set to full duplex mode at the opposite end.)
4 Check for the cause for excessive broadcast packets (for example, you have
set the loopback for the Ethernet interface board or set the VB filtering table
incorrectly) and solve the problem. If the problem is caused on the equipment
at the opposite end, set the threshold of broadcast packet suppression for an
Ethernet port to reduce broadcast packets.
5 Test the MTU of the network by using a test meter. The maximum frame
length that is set for a port should be longer than the MTU of the network.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Configured in an End-to-End Manner
Figure 5-12 Procedure for troubleshooting faults in Ethernet services configured in an end-to-
end manner
Success
Troubleshoot according to the
relevant handling suggestions.
Refer to the procedure for
troubleshooting Ethernet
services configured on a per
NE basis.
Proceed with the
next step.
Is the fault rectified?
End
Yes
No
Start
Incorrect operation?
1
Cancel this operation.
No
Yes
Failure
2
Perform intelligent
diagnosis on Ethernet
services.

Table 5-15 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet services configured in an
end-to-end manner
Comment
No.
Description
1 Check the following points:
l Whether a loopback is set for the Ethernet port
l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission line
l Whether the Ethernet port parameters, such as port enabling/disabling
status, working mode, and flow control, are configured consistently at the
local end and peer end
l Whether Ethernet protocol and Ethernet service configurations (especially
Ethernet port attributes) are correct
2 Intelligent fault diagnosis uses OAM to implement fault diagnosis over
services, PWs, and tunnels, and the physical layer, and supports the output of
diagnostic results for further troubleshooting.
NOTE
Only the Native E-Line services configured end to end support intelligent fault
diagnosis. For the troubleshooting of E-LAN services, see the instructions in the
Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis section.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
Experience and Summary
To troubleshoot an Ethernet service fault, you must be familiar with the characteristics, working
mode, and configured protocols of interfaces on the Ethernet equipment.
5.9 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH
Plane
The Ethernet services transmitted on the EoS/EoPDH plane can be transmitted over a TDM
network. The faults of the EoS/EoPDH-plane Ethernet services include service interruption and
service degradation.
Fault Phenomena
The Ethernet service interruption indicates that the Ethernet service is completely interrupted.
The Ethernet service deterioration indicates that the Ethernet service is abnormal. For example,
the network access speed is low, the equipment delay is long, the packet loss occurs, or incorrect
packets exist in the received or transmitted data.
Table 5-16 Common faults of Ethernet services
Symptom Alarm Board
Ethernet
services are
interrupted.
HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM,
WRG_BD_TYPE, or BD_STATUS
EMS6/EFP8
ALM_GFP_dLFD or ALM_GFP_dCSF
ETH_LOS or LOOP_ALM
LAG_PORT_FAIL,
LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL, LCAS_TLCT, or
LCAS_TLCR
Ethernet
services are
abnormal.
HARD_BAD or TEMP_ALARM
FLOW_OVER
LCAS_FOPT, LCAS_FOPR, LCAS_PLCT,
or LCAS_PLCR

Fault Causes
l The possible human factors are as follows:
An Ethernet board loopback or a transmission line loopback occurs.
The parameter settings of the Ethernet ports, such as the port enabled state, working
mode, and flow control, are different from the parameter settings of the Ethernet ports
on the interconnected equipment.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
The configuration of the encapsulation/mapping protocol or the LCAS protocol is
inconsistent on both ends of the link.
The timeslot binding of VCTRUNKs is inconsistent on both ends of the link
The service configuration is incorrect.
l The equipment at the local end is faulty.
l The line board is faulty or has bit errors.
l The interconnected equipment is faulty.
l The network cable is faulty.
l The external electromagnetic interference is severe.
Fault Locating Methods
1. Rectify the human-caused faults such as a loopback and a data configuration error.
2. Locate the fault cause according to the equipment alarms.
3. Locate the fault cause according to the RMON performance events and alarms.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-13 Procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet service faults
Any abnormal
RMON performance
events?
Clear the alarm
5
No
Yes
An equipment alarm
or alarm on the radio
link?
An Ethernet
alarm?
Yes
Query the port and service
traffic and analyze the fault
causes
No
Fault on the
opposite
equipment?
Yes
Troubleshoot the fault according
to the flow of handling RMON
performance events
Yes
Troubleshoot faults on the
opposite equipment
No
3
2
Troubleshoot equipment
faults by performing
loopbacks section by
section or replacing boards
Proceed
with the
next step
Is the fault
rectified?
En
d
Yes
No
A loop formed by the
E-LAN service trails?
No
No
Yes
Release the loop
Start
Incorrect operation?
1
Cancel this operation
No
Yes
Clear the alarm
4
5
4
3
2
1

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
Table 5-17 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet service faults
Comment
No.
Description
1 Check the following points:
l Whether a loopback is set for the Ethernet port
l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission line
l Whether the parameter settings of the Ethernet port, such as the port
enabled state, working mode, and flow control, are the same as the
parameter settings of the Ethernet port on the interconnected equipment
l The configuration of the encapsulation/mapping protocol or the LCAS
protocol is inconsistent on both ends of the link.
l The timeslot binding of VCTRUNKs is inconsistent on both ends of the
link.
l Check whether the Ethernet protocol and the Ethernet service
configuration (especially the attributes of the Ethernet port) are correct.
2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms:
l POWER_ALM
l FAN_FAIL
l HARD_BAD
l BD_STATUS
l NESF_LOST
l TEMP_ALARM
l RADIO_RSL_HIGH
l RADIO_RSL_LOW
l RADIO_TSL_HIGH
l RADIO_TSL_LOW
l IF_INPWR_ABN
Pay special attention to the following line alarms:
l MW_LIM
l MW_LOF
l R_LOS
l R_LOF
l MS_AIS
l AU_AIS
l AU_LOP
l B1_EXC
l B2_EXC
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
Comment
No.
Description
3 Pay special attention to the following alarms:
l ETH_LOS
l FLOW_OVER
l ALM_GFP_dCSF
l ALM_GFP_dLFD
l FCS_ERR
l LCAS_PLCT
l LCAS_TLCT
l LCAS_PLCR
l LCAS_TLCR
l LCAS_FOPT
l LCAS_FOPR
4 If the LOOP_ALM alarm is reported after the configuring the Advanced
Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces operation is performed, it indicates that the
network to which Ethernet ports are connected has loops.
5 For RMON performance events, see B Performance Event Reference.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
Figure 5-14 Procedure for troubleshooting an RMON performance event
Start
Rectify the fault of line bit
errors
No
Yes
Is there any FCS error?
Is there any collision
or fragment?
Yes
Check the working mode
of the port
Is it a MTU setting
problem?
Yes
Modify the MTU value
No
2
Proceed with
the next step
Is the fault
rectified?
End
Yes
No
Is there any
PAUSE frame?
3
No
No
Yes
Handle the flow control
problem or increase the
bandwidth
View the statistics group
performance on an Ethernet port
Is the test passed?
No
Yes
Use a meter to perform the test
Rectify the fault of the
interconnected equipment
Rectify the equipment fault by
loopback section by section or
replacing the board
1
4
6
Are broadcast packets
excessive?
No
Yes Handle the problem on
excessive broadcast
packets
5

Table 5-18 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting an RMON performance event
Comment
No.
Description
1 View the statistics group performance on an Ethernet port to obtain the
real-time performance statistics data of the Ethernet port.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
Comment
No.
Description
2 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:
l Check the Ethernet cable. If the Ethernet cable is not qualified, replace it
with a new one.
l Change the Ethernet port that accesses the services on the Ethernet board.
If the new port does not have the RMON performance of an FCS error, it
indicates that the hardware of the original port is faulty. Otherwise, the
hardware of the Ethernet port on the equipment at the opposite end is
faulty.
3 Check the following points:
l Whether the port operating rates on the equipment at both ends are the
same
l Whether the working modes (full duplex or half duplex) of the Ethernet
port on the equipment at both ends are the same
l Whether the Ethernet port is set to auto-negotiation mode at one end and
the Ethernet port is set to full duplex mode at the opposite end (When the
Ethernet port is set to auto-negotiation mode at one end, the Ethernet port
must not be set to full duplex mode at the opposite end.)
4 Check the following points:
l Whether the flow control method is the same.
l Whether the Ethernet service traffic exceeds the bandwidth of the
VCTRUNK.
5 Check for the cause for excessive broadcast packets (for example, you have
set the loopback for the Ethernet interface board or set the VB filtering
table incorrectly) and solve the problem. If the problem is caused on the
equipment at the opposite end, set the threshold of broadcast packet
suppression for an Ethernet port to reduce broadcast packets.
6 Test the MTU of the network by using a test meter. The maximum frame
length that is set for a port should be longer than the MTU of the network.

Experience and Summary
To troubleshoot an Ethernet service fault, you must be familiar with the characteristics, working
mode, and configured protocols of interfaces on the Ethernet equipment.
5.10 Troubleshooting MPLS Tunnels
This section describes how to troubleshoot MPLS tunnels by using the MPLS OAM function or
MPLS Ping/Traceroute function.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
Fault Phenomena
NOTE
In this section, an MPLS tunnel refers to a static label switched path (LSP).
Common faults of MPLS tunnels are as follows:
l MPLS tunnels fail to be created, and services are unavailable.
l MPLS tunnels are faulty, and services are interrupted.
l MPLS APS switching fails, services are interrupted, and packet loss or bit errors occur.
Table 5-19 Common faults of MPLS tunnels
Symptom Alarm Board
MPLS
tunnels are
faulty.
HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM,
WRG_BD_TYPE, BUS_ERR,
BD_STATUS, MPLS_TUNNEL_OAM-
FAIL, MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV,
MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess,
MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH,
MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE,
MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN,
MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI,
MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI,
MPLS_TUNNEL_SD,
MPLS_TUNNEL_SF,
MPLS_TUNNEL_AIS,
MPLS_TUNNEL_RDI,
MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEG,
MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEP,
MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPPER
CSH
MW_CFG_MISMATCH
MW_LIM
MW_LOF
ISV3, ISU2, ISX2, IFU2 or
IFX2

Fault Causes
l Incorrect operations are performed.
The transmission link is looped back.
Service configuration data is inconsistent between the local end and the opposite end.
Service configuration is incorrect.
l The local NE is faulty.
l The transmission link is faulty or has bit errors.
l Service bandwidth decreases due to an AM downshift.
l The opposite NE is faulty.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
141
l External electromagnetic interference is severe.
Fault Locating Methods
1. Check whether the data is modified, whether the line is looped back, and whether any boards
are replaced.
2. Handle the link alarms on the MPLS server trail.
3. Locate the faulty section by using the LSP Traceroute or MPLS-TP OAM function.
4. Locate the fault by replacing boards.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-15 Procedure for troubleshooting MPLS tunnels
Clear the alarm.
No
Yes
Yes
Troubleshoot equipment faults by
performing loopbacks on sections
or replacing boards.
Contact Huawei
technical engineers.
Faults are rectified?
End
Yes
No
Clear the alarm using
LB/LT/LSP Ping/LSP Tracerout.
Start
Any incorrect
operation?
Cancel the operation.
No
Yes
Any equipment- or
link-related alarm?
No
Any alarm related to MPLS
tunnel ?
Yes
Handle the fault.
No
Any fault in
interconnection
equipment?
3
2
1

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
Table 5-20 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting MPLS tunnels
Comment
No.
Description
1 Check the following points:
l Whether a loopback is set for E1 ports
l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission link
l Whether the parameter settings such as the working mode of Ethernet ports
match those of the opposite NE
l Whether the parameter settings such as frame format and frame mode at
E1 ports match those of the opposite NE
l Whether MPLS service configuration is correct, especially whether tunnel
attributes are set correctly
2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms:
l POWER_ALM
l FAN_FAIL
l HARD_BAD
l BD_STATUS
l BUS_ERR
l NESF_LOST
l TEMP_ALARM
l RADIO_RSL_HIGH
l RADIO_RSL_LOW
l RADIO_TSL_HIGH
l RADIO_TSL_LOW
l IF_INPWR_ABN
l AM_DOWNSHIFT
l MW_CFG_MISMATCH
Pay special attention to the following line alarms:
l MW_LIM
l MW_LOF
l MW_BER_EXC
l MW_BER_SD
l MW_RDI
l MW_FEC_UNCOR
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
Comment
No.
Description
3 Check whether the tunnel is faulty using LSP Ping, LSP Tracerout, or MPLS-
TP Tunnel OAM.
Pay special attention to the following alarms:
l MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI
l MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess
l MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI
l MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV
l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH
l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE
l MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL
l MPLS_TUNNEL_SD
l MPLS_TUNNEL_SF
l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN
l MPLS_TUNNEL_AIS
l MPLS_TUNNEL_RDI
l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEG
l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEP
l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPPER

Experience and Summary
Learn about the working principle and protocol configuration of MPLS tunnels before
troubleshooting MPLS tunnels.
5.11 Troubleshooting CES Services
This section describes how to troubleshoot CES services that are interrupted or degraded.
Fault Phenomena
CES services are interrupted if they are completely unavailable. CES services are degraded if
they have packet loss or incorrect packets.
Table 5-21 Common faults of CES services
Symptom Alarm Board
CES services
are
interrupted.
HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM,
WRG_BD_TYPE, BUS_ERR,
BD_STATUS, CES_LOSPKT_EXC
CSH, CSHU, CSHUA, ML1,
MD1, CQ1
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
Symptom Alarm Board
AM_DOWNSHIFT
MW_CFG_MISMATCH
ISV3, ISU2, ISX2, IFU2,
IFX2
CES services
are
degraded.
HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM,
CES_JTROVR_EXC,
CES_JTRUDR_EXC,
CES_MALPKT_EXC,
CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC,
CES_STRAYPKT_EXC
CSH, CSHU, CSHUA, ML1,
MD1, CQ1
AM_DOWNSHIFT
MW_CFG_MISMATCH
ISV3, ISU2, ISX2, IFU2,
IFX2

Fault Causes
l Incorrect operations are performed.
The transmission link is looped back.
Service configuration data is inconsistent between the local end and the opposite end.
Service configuration is incorrect.
l The clock source is asynchronous.
l Jitters and delays on the network are too great.
l The local NE is faulty.
l The transmission link is faulty or has bit errors.
l Service bandwidth decreases due to an AM downshift.
l The opposite NE is faulty.
l External electromagnetic interference is severe.
Fault Locating Methods
1. Check whether the data is modified, whether the line is looped back, and whether any boards
are replaced.
2. Check whether the PW works properly by using the PW ping function. If the PW is faulty,
check whether the MPLS tunnel works properly by using the LSP ping function. If the
MPLS tunnel works properly, check whether the PW has the same configuration at both
ends. If the configuration is the same, replace the board on the NNI side.
3. If the PW works properly, check whether the PE data configured at both ends is the same.
If the PE data is different, change the PE data to the same.
4. Check whether UNI-side data and CE-side data are consistent.
5. Analyze the RMON performance events of CES services.
6. Check whether there is impedance mismatch on channels and whether any electrical cables
are connected incorrectly.
7. Replace Smart E1 interface boards.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-16 Procedure for troubleshooting CES services
Clear the alarm
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Clear the alarm
Troubleshoot equipment faults by
performing loopbacks on sections
or replacing boards
Contact Huawei
technical engineers
Faults are rectified?
End
Yes
No
Clear the alarm
Start
Any incorrect
operation?
Cancel the operation
No
Yes
Any equipment- or
link-related alarm?
No
No
Any alarm related to
tunnels/PWs?
Any alarm on E1
ports?
Yes
Handle the fault
No
Any fault of
interconnection with
PDH equipment
7
5
3
2
1
Yes
Handle the performance event
No
Any RMON
performance event?
6
Yes
Clear the alarm
Any alarm related to
CES services?
4

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
Table 5-22 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting CES services
Commen
t No.
Description
1 Check the following points:
l Whether a loopback is set for the E1 port
l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission link
l Check whether the parameter settings of CES services, PWs, and tunnels are
consistent at the source end and sink end.
l Check whether the parameter settings of physical ports (including frame
format, code, electrical port impedance, and overhead byte), are consistent.
l Check whether the network bandwidth is sufficient for the service traffic.
2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms:
l POWER_ALM
l FAN_FAIL
l HARD_BAD
l BD_STATUS
l BUS_ERR
l NESF_LOST
l TEMP_ALARM
l RADIO_RSL_HIGH
l RADIO_RSL_LOW
l RADIO_TSL_HIGH
l RADIO_TSL_LOW
l IF_INPWR_ABN
l AM_DOWNSHIFT
l MW_CFG_MISMATCH
Pay special attention to the following line alarms:
l MW_LIM
l MW_LOF
l MW_BER_EXC
l MW_BER_SD
l MW_RDI
l MW_FEC_UNCOR
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
Commen
t No.
Description
3 Pay special attention to the following alarms:
l MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI
l MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess
l MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI
l MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV
l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH
l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE
l MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL
l MPLS_TUNNEL_SD
l MPLS_TUNNEL_SF
l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN
4 Pay special attention to the following alarms:
l CES_JTROVR_EXC
l CES_JTRUDR_EXC
l CES_LOSPKT_EXC
l CES_MALPKT_EXC
l CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC
l CES_STRAYPKT_EXC
5 Pay special attention to the following alarms:
l T_ALOS
l UP_E1_AIS
l LFA
l LMFA
l ALM_E1RAI
6 Pay special attention to the following alarms:
l CES_MISORDERPKT
l CES_LOSPKT
l CES_MALPKT
l CES_JTRUDR
l CES_JTROVR
l CES_STRAYPKT
7 Troubleshoot the interconnection with the PDH equipment.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
Experience and Summary
Learn about the working principle and protocol configuration of CES services before
troubleshooting CES services.
5.12 Troubleshooting ATM Services
This section describes how to troubleshoot ATM services that are interrupted or degraded.
Fault Phenomena
ATM services are interrupted if they are completely unavailable. ATM services are degraded if
they have packet loss or incorrect packets.
Table 5-23 Common faults of ATM services
Symptom Alarm Board
ATM
services are
interrupted.
HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM,
WRG_BD_TYPE, BUS_ERR,
BD_STATUS, ALM_IMA_LIF,
ALM_IMA_LODS,
ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE,
ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE,
IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN,
IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN, LCD
CSH, CSHU, CSHUA, ML1,
MD1
AM_DOWNSHIFT
MW_CFG_MISMATCH
ISV3, ISU2, ISX2, IFU2,
IFX2
ATM
services are
degraded.
HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM,
ALM_IMA_LIF, ALM_IMA_LODS,
ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE,
ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE, OCD
CSH, CSHU, CSHUA, ML1,
MD1
AM_DOWNSHIFT
MW_CFG_MISMATCH
ISV3, ISU2, ISX2, IFU2,
IFX2

Fault Causes
l Incorrect operations are performed.
The transmission link is looped back.
Service configuration data is inconsistent between the local end and the opposite end.
Service configuration is incorrect.
l The local NE is faulty.
l The transmission link is faulty or has bit errors.
l Service bandwidth decreases due to an AM downshift.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
149
l The opposite NE is faulty.
l External electromagnetic interference is severe.
Fault Locating Methods
1. Check whether the data is modified, whether the link is looped back, and whether any
boards are replaced.
2. Check whether the PW works properly by using the PW ping function. If the PW is faulty,
check whether the MPLS tunnel works properly by using the LSP ping function. If the
MPLS tunnel works properly, check whether the PW has the same configuration at both
ends. If the configuration is the same, replace the board on the NNI side.
3. If the PW works properly, check whether the PE data configured at both ends is the same.
If the PE data is different, change the PE data to the same.
4. Check whether UNI-side data and CE-side data are consistent.
5. Analyze the RMON performance events of ATM services.
6. Check whether there is impedance mismatch on channels and whether any electrical cables
are connected incorrectly.
7. Replace Smart E1 processing boards.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-17 Procedure for troubleshooting ATM services
Clear the alarm
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Clear the alarm
Troubleshoot equipment faults by
performing loopbacks on sections
or replacing boards
Contact Huawei
technical engineers
Faults are rectified?
End
Yes
No
Clear the alarm
Start
Any incorrect
operation?
Cancel the operation
No
Yes
Any equipment- or
link-related alarm?
No
No
Any alarm related to ATM
services?
Any alarm at the E1
port?
Yes
Handle the fault
No
Any fault of
interconnection with
PDH equipment
6
4
3
2
1
Yes
Handle the performance event
No
Any RMON
performance event?
5

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
151
Table 5-24 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting ATM services
Comment
No.
Description
1 Check the following points:
l Whether a loopback is set for the E1 port
l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission link
l Whether the parameter settings of ATM VPI/VCI, PWE3 CW, PW, and
Tunnel are consistent between the source end and the sink end.
l Whether the parameter settings of interconnected ports are consistent
Whether E1 frame format, coding, overhead bytes, and E1 timeslot
mode (30/31) are correctly configured
Whether IMA parameters (including protocol version, clock mode,
frame length, and maximum differential delay) are correctly
configured
l Check whether the network bandwidth is sufficient for the service traffic.
2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms:
l POWER_ALM
l FAN_FAIL
l HARD_BAD
l BD_STATUS
l BUS_ERR
l NESF_LOST
l TEMP_ALARM
l RADIO_RSL_HIGH
l RADIO_RSL_LOW
l RADIO_TSL_HIGH
l RADIO_TSL_LOW
l IF_INPWR_ABN
l AM_DOWNSHIFT
l MW_CFG_MISMATCH
Pay special attention to the following line alarms:
l MW_LIM
l MW_LOF
l MW_BER_EXC
l MW_BER_SD
l MW_RDI
l MW_FEC_UNCOR
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
152
Comment
No.
Description
3 Pay special attention to the following alarms:
l ALM_IMA_LIF
l ALM_IMA_LODS
l ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE
l ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE
l IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN
l IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN
l OCD
l LCD
4 Pay special attention to the following alarms:
l T_ALOS
l UP_E1_AIS
l LFA
l LMFA
5 Pay special attention to the following alarms:
l ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELLS
l ATM_UNCORRECTED_HCSERR
6 Troubleshoot the interconnection with the PDH equipment.

Experience and Summary
Learn about the working principle and protocol configuration of ATM services before
troubleshooting ATM services.
5.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs
This section describes how to troubleshoot Ethernet services that are carried by PWs and
transmitted in the PSN. These Ethernet services are considered faulty when they are interrupted
or deteriorate.
Fault Symptoms
Ethernet services are interrupted if they are unavailable. Ethernet services deteriorate if they
have great delays, packet loss, or incorrect packets.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
153
Table 5-25 Common faults of Ethernet services
Symptom Alarm Board
Ethernet
services are
interrupted.
HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM,
WRG_BD_TYPE, BUS_ERR,
BD_STATUS
EG4, EG4P, EM6TA,
EM6FA, EM6F or EM6T
COMMUN_FAIL, LAG_DOWN
ETH_LOS, ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK, or
LOOP_ALM
LASER_MOD_ERR EG4, EG4P, EM6FA, EM6F
Ethernet
services
deteriorate.
HARD_BAD or TEMP_ALARM EG4, EG4P, EM6TA,
EM6FA, EM6F or EM6T
PORTMODE_MISMATCH, FLOW_OVER
or LAG_MEMBER_DOWN
MAC_FCS_EXC
MAC_EXT_EXC
DROPRATIO_OVER
EG4, EG4P, EM6TA,
EM6FA, EM6F or EM6T
AM_DOWNSHIFT
MAC_FCS_EXC
MAC_EXT_EXC
DROPRATIO_OVER
ISV3, ISU2, ISX2, IFU2 or
IFX2

Fault Causes
l Incorrect operations are performed.
The transmission link is looped back.
Service configuration data is inconsistent between the local end and the opposite end.
Service configuration is incorrect.
l The local NE is faulty.
l The transmission link is faulty or has bit errors.
l Service bandwidth decreases due to an AM downshift.
l The opposite NE is faulty.
l External electromagnetic interference is severe.
Fault Locating Methods
1. Check whether the data is modified, whether the link is looped back, and whether any
boards are replaced.
2. Check whether the PW works properly by using the PW ping or MPLS-TP PW OAM
function. If the PW is faulty, check whether the MPLS tunnel works properly by using the
LSP ping or MPLS-TP Tunnel OAM function. If the MPLS tunnel works properly, check
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
154
whether the PW has the same configuration at both ends. If the configuration is the same,
replace the boardon the NNI side.
3. If the PW works properly, check whether the PE data configured at both ends is the same.
If the PE data is different, change the PE data to the same.
4. Check whether UNI-side data and CE-side data are consistent.
5. Analyze the RMON performance events of Ethernet services.
6. Check whether there is impedance mismatch on channels and whether any electrical cables
are connected incorrectly.
7. Replace Ethernet interface board.
Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis
Figure 5-18 Procedure for troubleshooting PW-carried Ethernet services configured on a per
NE basis
Clear the alarm.
No
Yes
Yes
Contact Huawei
technical engineers.
Is the fault rectified?
End
Yes
No
Clear the alarm.
Start
Any incorrect
operation?
Cancel the operation.
No
Yes
Any equipment-
or link-related
alarm?
No
3
2
1
Yes
Handle the tunnel fault.
No
Any fault in the tunnel
that carries the PW?
Incorrect PW
configuration?
6
Yes
Re-configure the PW.
Yes
Handle the UNI-side fault.
No
Can the PW be
pinged after a PW
ping test is enabled?
4
No
5
Analyze PW traffic.
7
Any PW-related
alarm?
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
155

Table 5-26 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting PW-carried Ethernet services
configured on a per NE basis
No. Description
1 Check the following points:
l Whether a loopback is set for the E1 port
l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission link
l Whether the parameter settings of ATM VPI/VCI, PWE3 CW, PW, and
tunnel are consistent between the source end and the sink end
l Whether the parameter settings of interconnected ports are consistent
Whether E1 frame format, coding, overhead bytes, and E1 timeslot
mode (30/31) are correctly configured
Whether IMA parameters (including protocol version, clock mode,
frame length, and maximum differential delay) are correctly
configured
l Check whether the network bandwidth is sufficient for the service traffic.
2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms:
l POWER_ALM
l FAN_FAIL
l HARD_BAD
l BD_STATUS
l BUS_ERR
l NESF_LOST
l TEMP_ALARM
l RADIO_RSL_HIGH
l RADIO_RSL_LOW
l RADIO_TSL_HIGH
l RADIO_TSL_LOW
l IF_INPWR_ABN
l AM_DOWNSHIFT
l MW_CFG_MISMATCH
Pay special attention to the following radio link alarms:
l MW_LIM
l MW_LOF
l MW_BER_EXC
l MW_BER_SD
l MW_RDI
l MW_FEC_UNCOR
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
156
No. Description
3 Pay special attention to the following alarms:
l MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI
l MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess
l MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI
l MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV
l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH
l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE
l MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL
l MPLS_TUNNEL_SD
l MPLS_TUNNEL_SF
l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN
l MPLS_TUNNEL_AIS
l MPLS_TUNNEL_RDI
l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEG
l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEP
l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPPER
l MPLS_PW_AIS
l MPLS_PW_BDI
l MPLS_PW_RDI
l MPLS_PW_Excess
l MPLS_PW_LOCV
l MPLS_PW_MISMATCH
l MPLS_PW_MISMERGE
l MPLS_PW_OAMFAIL
l MPLS_PW_SD
l MPLS_PW_SF
l MPLS_PW_UNEXPMEG
l MPLS_PW_UNEXPMEP
l MPLS_PW_UNEXPPER
l MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
No. Description
4 Check whether the PW is faulty using PW Ping.
If the PW cannot be pinged, check the following points:
l Whether the UNI-side hardware and cables are normal
l Whether the UNI-side PWE3 service configurations are correct
l Whether the working mode and tag attribute of the UNI are consistent with
those at the peer port
Pay special attention to the following alarms:
l ETH_LOS
l ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
l ETH_NO_FLOW
l MAC_FCS_EXC
l MAC_EXT_EXC
5 Check whether the MPLS tunnel is faulty using LSP Ping or LSP Tracerout.
Handle tunnel faults by following the instructions in 5.10 Troubleshooting
MPLS Tunnels.
6 Check PW configurations. If the PW configurations are incorrect, re-
configure the PW according to the network plan.
7 Check if packet loss occurs by querying the received and transmitted
packets on L2VPN PWs on the PEs at both ends.
If packet loss occurs, identify the cause by querying packet loss of egress
queues on all nodes of a PW. Handle UNI-side faults by following the
instructions in step 4.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
158
Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Configured in an End-to-End Manner
Figure 5-19 Procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet services configured in an end-to-end
manner
Success
Troubleshoot according to the
relevant handling suggestions.
Refer to the procedure for
troubleshooting Ethernet
services configured on a per
NE basis.
Proceed with the
next step.
Is the fault rectified?
End
Yes
No
Start
Incorrect operation?
1
Cancel this operation.
No
Yes
Failure
2
Perform intelligent
diagnosis on Ethernet
services.

Table 5-27 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet services configured in an
end-to-end manner
Comment
No.
Description
1 Check the following points:
l Whether a loopback is set for the Ethernet port
l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission link
l Whether the Ethernet port parameters, such as port enabling/disabling
status, working mode, and flow control, are configured consistently at the
local end and peer end
l Whether Ethernet protocol and Ethernet service configurations (especially
Ethernet port attributes) are correct
2 Intelligent fault diagnosis uses OAM to implement fault diagnosis over
services, PWs, and tunnels, and the physical layer, and supports the output of
diagnostic results for further troubleshooting.

Experience and Summary
Learn about the working principle and protocol configuration of Ethernet services carried by
PWs before troubleshooting these services.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
5.14 Troubleshooting L3VPN Services
L3VPN service faults means that services are unavailable after the L3VPN function is
configured. This section describes how to troubleshoot L3VPN services.
Fault Causes
l Data configurations are incorrect.
VPN instance configurations are incorrect.
BGP configurations are incorrect.
IGP configurations are incorrect.
Tunnel configurations are incorrect.
Tunnel policy configurations are incorrect.
l Equipment is faulty.
The local microwave equipment is faulty.
The peer equipment is faulty.
l Links are faulty, or bit errors occur.
Fault Locating Method
1. Collect L3VPN-related alarms and analyze the causes. L3VPN-related alarms include
BGPBACKTRANSITION, GSP_RSVP_NB_AUTH_ERR,
GSP_RSVP_NB_DOWN, GSP_TNNL_DOWN, ISISADJACENCYCHANGE,
L3V_TRAP_THRE_EXCEED, L3V_TRAP_VRF_DOWN, and RT_TBL_LACK.
2. Check whether any alarms indicating Ethernet link, microwave link, or equipment faults
are reported. The following table lists these alarms.
Alarm Type Alarm
Alarms indicating Ethernet link faults ETH_LOS, ETH_NO_FLOW,
ETH_AUTO_LINK_DOWN,
ETH_PWR_SUPPLY_FAIL
Alarms indicating microwave link faults MW_LIM, MW_LOF,
MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD,
MW_RDI, MW_FEC_UNCOR
Alarms indicating equipment faults POWER_ALM, FAN_FAIL,
HARD_BAD, BD_STATUS,
BUS_ERR, NESF_LOST,
TEMP_ALARM, RADIO_RSL_HIGH,
RADIO_RSL_LOW,
RADIO_TSL_HIGH,
RADIO_TSL_LOW,
IF_INPWR_ABN, IF_CABLE_OPEN

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
Troubleshooting Processes
L3VPN service troubleshooting processes include the traffic-related fault troubleshooting
process and the route-related fault troubleshooting process.
Start
Traffic-
related fault
Yes No
Route-
related fault
Does the local VPN
instance routing
table contain VPN
routes?
l Traffic-related fault troubleshooting process
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
Figure 5-20 Traffic-related fault troubleshooting process
Bind the VPN
with a tunnel
policy.
1
Tracert the VPN IP
address at the local
end to locate the
fault.
Yes
No
Yes
Correct the
tunnel policy.
No
Correct the tunnel
configurations.
Contact Huawei
technical
support.
No
Yes
Traffic-
related fault
Is the fault
rectified?
No
Yes
Yes
Is the fault
rectified?
No
Yes
Is the fault
rectified?
No
End
2
3
4
5
6
7
Is the tunnel
policy correct?
Is the VPN instance
bound with a tunnel
policy?
Use LSP Ping
to check whether the tunnel
where a service fault has
occurred is working
properly.
l Route-related fault troubleshooting process
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
Figure 5-21 Route-related fault troubleshooting process
Yes
No
Correct the VPN instance
configurations, such as RT.
No
Yes
Are the BGP
configurations
correct?
Correct the BGP
configurations.
Yes No
Rectify the fault.
No
Are the IGP
configurations
correct?
No
Correct the IGP
configurations.
No Yes
Enable the interfaces
and configure IP
addresses for them.
Yes No
Are the
Ethernet/
microwave links
faulty?
Rectify the link
faults.
Yes
Is the
equipment
faulty?
No
Rectify the
equipment fault.
Yes
No
Contact Huawei
technical
support.
Route-
related fault
End
Is the fault
rectified?
Is the fault
rectified?
Is the fault
rectified?
Is the fault
rectified?
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
3
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
Does the BGP routing
table contain VPN routes?
Does the IGP routing table
contain a route to the
peer?
Are the VPN
instance
configurations
correct?
Does the VPN instance
routing table on the peer
contain VPN routes?
Are interfaces enabled
or configured with IP
addresses?
Summary
Learn about the principles and protocol configuration of the L3VPN feature before
troubleshooting L3VPN services.
5.15 Troubleshooting DCN Faults
A data communication network (DCN) fault causes an NE to be unreachable due to failed or
unstable communications between the NE and the NMS.
Context
If links or lines that bear DCN channels, including data communication channels (DCCs) and
inband DCN channels, are faulty, the DCN communication is interrupted. In this case, handle
the fault in the same manner as a service fault. In other cases, the DCN communication between
an NE and the NMS is interrupted or unstable, but the services between them are normal for the
moment. This fault also needs to be rectified in time, otherwise, you will fail to check the NE
information, obtain NE alarms, or change NE configurations when the services become faulty.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
Fault Symptoms and Causes
Table 5-28 Fault symptoms and causes
Symptom Possible Cause
NEs connected through their
service ports like air
interfaces and Ethernet ports
are unreachable to their
NMS.
l Cause 1: Services are interrupted.
l Cause 2: DCN parameters are incorrectly set.
l Cause 3: System control boards are faulty.
NEs connected through their
NMS ports are unreachable
to their NMS.
l Cause 1: The network cable of the NMS is disconnected
or damaged.
l Cause 2: DCN parameters are incorrectly set.
l Cause 3: System control boards are faulty.
A few NEs are unreachable
or their connection to the
NMS is unstable.
l Cause 1: DCN parameters are incorrectly set.
l Cause 2: An NE ID or NE IP address conflict occurs
between NEs on the DCN subnet.
l Cause 3: The DCN subnet is too large.
l Cause 4: The system control unit of the NE is faulty.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
164
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-22 Procedure for troubleshooting DCN faults
Start
Icon of the faulty
NE in gray

Fault rectified
End
Contact Huawei technical
service engineers
SCC boards are
being reset
The NMS cannot
reach the NE
Yes
NM
Information
loss?
No response to
commands from the
NMS
Too low DCN
channel bandwidth
Increase the DCN
channel bandwidth
Wait for the completion
of SCC resetting
5
Locate a
faulty NE
1
6
NO
NO
Yes
Yes
NO
Yes
NO
Yes
Yes
Yes
NO
Hardware
fault?
Settings
incorrectly
modified?
Large DCN
subnet?
2
3
4
Check settings
or undo
modifications
Check for hardware
alarms and check
cable connections
Divide the DCN
subnet

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
165
Table 5-29 Procedure description for troubleshooting DCN faults
Mark Operation Typical Symptom Measures
1 Locate the faulty
NE.
Locate the faulty NE
based on a DCN
networking diagram.
l If all NEs within an
area are unreachable to
their NMS, the
unreachable NE
closest to a normal NE
is probably the faulty
NE.
l If only one NE is
unreachable to its
NMS, the NE is the
faulty NE.
l If the faulty NE has a service fault, rectify the service
fault first.
l If an unreachable NE connects to its NMS through
an external DCN, verify that the external DCN
equipment or the cable used for DCN connection is
working correctly.
2 Handle
hardware faults.
l The faulty NE reports
hardware alarms like
HARD_BAD.
l Check whether the
NMS/COM port on the
faulty NE is connected
to a correct cable or
whether the network
cable of the faulty NE
is damaged.
l Handle hardware alarms based on the maintenance
and fault management procedure.
l Remove and then install, or replace the network
cable and optical fibers.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
Mark Operation Typical Symptom Measures
3 Modify
incorrect
configurations.
The following operations
are performed before a
faulty NE becomes
unreachable to its NMS:
l Modifying NE
attributes or NE
communication
settings
l Adding a new NE to
the network, or
replacing the faulty NE
or its system control
board
l Check for unplanned NE IDs and NE IP addresses
in the ECC routing table of the faulty NE's upstream
NE. If there is an unplanned NE ID or IP address in
the ECC routing table, the faulty NE is incorrectly
configured. To rectify the fault, log in to the faulty
NE using the unplanned NE ID and NE IP address
on the NMS and correct the settings.
l Change the DCC settings or inband DCN settings of
the faulty NE to interrupt the DCN channel between
the faulty NE and its upstream NE. Then, check for
the ID and IP address of the faulty NE in the ECC
routing table of the upstream NE. If the ID and IP
address of the faulty NE exist in the ECC routing
table of the upstream NE, another NE on the ECC
subnet has the same ID and IP address as the faulty
NE. In this case, correct the settings to ensure that
each NE on the ECC subnet has a unique ID and IP
address.
l If the inband DCN is enabled for the faulty NE and
its upstream NE, verify that the VLAN ID is
correctly set on the upstream NE.
l Verify that static routes are correctly set on the faulty
NE's upstream NE.
l Verify that OSPF parameters are correctly set on the
faulty NE's upstream NE. OSPF parameter settings
must be consistent for all NEs on the same ECC
subnet.
4 Analyze the
DCN subnet
size.
Check the number of NEs
in the IP routing table or
ECC routing table of the
faulty NE's upstream NE.
If there is a large number of NEs in the routing table,
the DCN subnet is too large in size and some NEs on
the DCN subnet may occasionally become unreachable
to their NMS. It is recommended that an DCN subnet
consist of no more than 120 NEs, if a 192 kbit/s
bandwidth is provided. If L2 DCN is used, an L2 DCN
subnet consists of not more than 30 NEs.
5 Troubleshoot
NMS
information
loss.
Some NEs may
occasionally become
unreachable to their NMS.
l Verify that a minimum of 192 kbit/s bandwidth is
allocated to the inband DCN. If the allocated
bandwidth is lower than 192 kbit/s, packets from the
NMS may be lost.
l Check whether the QoS priority allocated to the
inband DCN by a third-party network is high enough
if inband DCN packets are transmitted over the
third-party network. Lower QoS priority of inband
DCN packets may cause NEs unreachable to the
NMS due to congestive packet loss. The per-hop
behavior (PHB) priority of inband DCN packets
must not lower than expedited forwarding (EF).
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
Mark Operation Typical Symptom Measures
6 Troubleshoot
no-response
problems.
l The NE fails to be
logged in to onsite.
l The NE does not
respond to commands.
l Search for the IP address of the faulty NE on the
NMS.
l If the IP address is not found, or if the IP address is
found but the NMS still cannot reach the faulty NE,
restart the OptiX RTN 950 after a power-off, in a
authorized maintenance window which service can
be interrupted.

5.16 Troubleshooting Orderwire Faults
If orderwire calls cannot get through when services are normal, there is an orderwire fault.
Fault Causes
l The phone set is set incorrectly.
l The phone line is connected incorrectly.
l The orderwire is configured incorrectly.
l The orderwire unit is faulty.
l The system control unit is faulty.
l The line unit or radio link is faulty.
Fault Locating Methods
l Check whether the phone set is set correctly, whether the phone line is connected correctly,
and whether the orderwire is configured correctly.
l Replace the possibly faulty board to locate the fault.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
168
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-23 Procedure for troubleshooting orderwire faults
Start
Is the phone
correctly set?
No
Modify the phone setting
Check the orderwire
configuration
Is the configuration
correct?
No
Yes
Proceed with the next step
Is the fault rectified?
End
Yes
No
Is the phone line
correctly connected?
Yes
Check the phone setting
No
Modify the configuration
Replace the possibly faulty
board
Reconnect the phone line
Yes
3
2
1

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
169
Table 5-30 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting orderwire faults
Comment
No.
Description
1 Check the following points:
l Check whether the ring current switch "RING" on the phone set is set to
"ON".
l Check whether the dialing mode switch is set to "T", namely, the dual tone
multi-frequency mode.
l An orderwire phone set should be in on-hook state when it is not in
communication, and the upper-right red indicator in the front view of the
orderwire phone set should be off.
If the red indicator is on, it indicates that the phone set is in off-hook state.
Press the "TALK" button in the front of phone set to hook it up. In certain
occasions, the maintenance personnel press the "TALK" button is pressed
by mistake. As a result, the phone set stay in off-hook state all the time
and the orderwire call from the other NEs cannot get through.
2 Check the following points:
l Whether all orderwire phone numbers on a subnet are of the same length
l Whether all orderwire phone numbers on a subnet are unique
l Whether the overhead bytes of all the NEs on a subnet are the same
l Whether the orderwire port is set correctly
3 Replace the boards where the orderwire unit, system control unit, and
line unit are located to locate the fault.

Experience and Summary
To troubleshoot orderwire faults, you must check the orderwire phone periodically.
5.17 Typical Cases
This section describes typical microwave link troubleshooting cases.
5.17.1 Transient Link Unavailability Due to Multi-path Fading
Fault Symptoms
A 20 km long cross-ocean 1+1 hot standby (HSB) radio link was interrupted intermittently, and
alarms such as B1_SD, HSB_INDI, MW_LOF, and R_LOF, were reported and lasted several
seconds to dozens of seconds.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
170
Cause Analysis and Handling Procedure
1. Checked the ODU receive power that was recorded during the alarm period.
The difference between the maximum receive power and the minimum receive power was
more than 40 dB, and the minimum receive power was close to or less than the receiver
sensitivity. Therefore, it was inferred that the fault was caused by spatial fading.
2. Checked the network planning design.
The ODU operated at the 8 GHz band, which was less prone to rain fading, and therefore
multipath fading caused intermittent link interruptions. In addition, 1+1 HSB protection
does not well protect radio links against multipath fading.
3. Replaced 1+1 HSB protection with 1+1 space diversity (SD) protection.
Conclusions and Suggestions
l Routinely check whether the receive power reaches the designed value. If not, it is
recommended that you check the configuration, adjust antennas, or replace ODUs so the
receive power reaches the designed value.
l Minimize the impact of multipath fading by using one of the following methods, depending
on the actual conditions:
Use low capacity, low-order modulation schemes, and low bandwidths.
Increase the height difference between antennas at both ends providing that line-of-sight
(LOS) is guaranteed.
Add two antennas and configure an SD protection group.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
171
5.17.2 Transoceanic Link Transient Unavailability Due to
Insufficient Height Difference between Diversity Antennas
Fault Symptoms
The received signal levels (RSLs) at both ends of a 1+1 SD cross-ocean radio link fluctuated
dramatically, leading to bit errors or even link interruptions.
Cause Analysis and Handling Procedure
1. Checked the alarms reported by NEs at both ends of the radio link.
The NEs did not report any hardware alarms but frequently reported radio link alarms and
service interruption alarms.
2. Checked the RSLs of the main and standby ODUs at each end.
The RSLs of the main and standby ODUs at each end fluctuated dramatically, with a
fluctuation range over 30 dB. Therefore, the fault was possibly caused by multipath fading.
3. Checked the network plans and the mounting height difference between the main and
standby antennas at each end.
The mounting height difference between the main and standby antennas at each end was
only 4 meters, so space diversity performance was poor.
NOTE
To protect long-distance cross-ocean radio links against multipath fading, take the following measures
during network planning:
l Ensure that the fading margin is greater than or equal to 30 dB.
l Increase the mounting height difference between the main and standby antennas at both ends of a 1
+1 SD radio link.
4. Adjusted the mounting heights of the main antennas to 24 meters and those of the standby
antennas to 10 meters.
The following figure shows the simulation result and illustrates satisfactory diversity
compensation.
NOTE
The value of K generally ranges from 0.67 to 1.33. In this case, the RSLs of the main and standby antennas
are not correlated with each other. When designing mounting heights for main and standby antennas, keep
appropriate antenna spacing for minimizing the impact of reflection on radio links. When reflection causes
high attenuation on the main path, the attenuation on the standby path is low.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
Conclusions and Suggestions
When planning cross-ocean radio links, especially long-distance cross-ocean radio links, take
measures to minimize the impact of multipath fading. 1+1 SD protection is recommended for
these radio links. When mounting the main and standby antennas at one end, keep an appropriate
mounting height difference between them so attenuation has no impact on RSLs. In addition,
the main and standby antennas can be tilted slightly upwards providing that RSLs be not affected.
5.17.3 Link Unavailability Due to Inter-building Reflection
Fault Symptoms
On a 900-meter 1+0 microwave hop, IFX2 boards are used, working with 18 GHz HP ODUs,
at 28 MHz channel bandwidth and in 256QAM modulation, with XPIC disabled. One end of the
link continuously reports MW_LOF alarms and the other end reports MW_RDI alarms.
On this microwave hop, ODUs are mounted onto 0.3-meter diameter dual-polarized antennas
in separate-mount manner. Both ends of the radio hop are located on roofs. Antennas are installed
at the middle of poles about 5 meters high standing on the roofs.
Cause Analysis and Handling Procedure
1. The total hop spans only 900 meters. The receive power is ideal but the MSE is poor. The
faulty microwave link end is surrounded by many buildings, most of which have glass
walls. Therefore, it is suspected that some signals are reflected for many times between the
buildings before reaching the receive end or that some microwave signals are reflected
twice when traveling through the glass walls before reaching the receive end. See Figure
5-24.
Figure 5-24 Microwave link between buildings
Site A
Site B
Reflected signal
Main signal
2. To suppress signal reflection, do as follows:
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
l Change the pole position.
l Adjust the antenna elevation.
l Increase the antenna mount height.
l Use antennas with a larger diameter.
NOTE
Move poles near the building roof edges to decrease the inter-building reflection possibility or number of
reflection times. Generally, antennas can be adjusted upwards, downwards, leftwards, or rightwards.
During antenna adjustment, notice the MSE changes and ensure that the RSL is within its allowed range.
The larger the antenna diameter, the denser the beams. The smaller the beam angle at the receive end, the
powerful the capabilities to suppress reflection.
3. By means of the preceding methods, you can adjust the MSE values at both ends to be -30
dB to clear alarms.
Conclusions and Suggestions
The addressed problem is characterized by satisfactory receive power, poor MSE, and failure in
clearing alarms. To find out the cause, check whether the equipment hardware is faulty, whether
the equipment operates abnormally, and whether any exceptions occur on the path from an
antenna to an indoor unit (IDU). Then narrow down the cause on the space link, and determine
whether reflection and refraction are possible according to the topography.
5.17.4 Unidirectional Link Availability Due to Interference
Fault Symptoms
The1+0 link formed by NE A and NE B using IF1 board and 8G/HP ODU is available only in
one direction after the link is expanded from mode 5 (QPSK/28M/16E1) to mode 7 (128QAM/
28M/STM-1). The link is available only in one direction after the link is expanded from mode
5 (QPSK/28M/16E1) to mode 7 (128QAM/28M/STM-1).
Cause Analysis and Handling Procedure
1. The ODU supports 128QAM modulation scheme according to query results of NE data in
mode 7 and query of ODU product manual.
2. The receive power is unlikely to fade because the RSL is stable and the link is only 1.27
Km long.
3. The MSE values on the NE A are -35.35 dB and -34.57 dB in the mode 5 and the mode 7
respectively. The MSE values on the NE B are -26.77 dB and -20.56 dB in the mode 5 and
the mode 7 respectively. The MSE value on the NE B is greatly different from the required
modulation threshold from -24 dB to -35 dB in the mode 7. The modulation threshold of
the MSE value in the mode 7 is from -24 dB to -35 dB. When the link is normal, the MSE
value of NE B is also low. It is suspected that interference exists. Because the anti-
interference capability in QPSK modulation is more powerful than that in 128QAM
modulation, signal modulation is successful in QPSK modulation but fails in 128QAM
modulation.
4. Scan the frequency on the NE B to find out the interference source. Change the operating
frequency to eliminate interference.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
174
Conclusions and Suggestions
For unidirectional link availability in case of modulation upshift, the possible causes are as
follows:
l The ODU cannot support the new IF mode of high modulation and of large capacity after
the link capacity is expanded.
l The link is interrupted because the receive power cannot meet the sensitivity requirement
in the new IF mode.
l The link is interrupted because the MSE value cannot reach the demodulation threshold
due to interference occurrence on the link.
Check the above items to prevent the link from being interrupted before the link capacity
expansion.
5.17.5 Bit Errors on Microwave Links
Fault Symptoms
Bit errors occurred in the services carried by a 2.5 km long radio link between NE A and NE B.
Both NEs used antennas with a diameter of 0.6 meters and 15 GHz ODUs. The IF1 boards on
both NEs worked in mode 5 (28 MHz/QPSK).
Cause Analysis and Handling Procedure
1. Checked the alarms and logs of the two NEs.
The NEs did not report any hardware alarm. NE A reported an MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm,
but NE B did not.
2. Checked the RSLs at the two NEs.
The RSL at NE A was 62 dBm and that at NE B was 70 dBm. These two values were
greater than the receiver sensitivity (85 dBm) in mode 5.
3. Checked for interference signals by muting the ODU at NE B.
The RSL at NE A was 80 dBm. Therefore, interference signals existed.
4. Used one of the following methods for eliminating interference signals:
l Using frequencies that are not affected by interference signals (tests showed that the
sub-bands supported by the ODU were all interfered)
l Using antennas with a diameter greater than 0.6 meters (the workload is heavy and
interference signals are also amplified)
l Changing a polarization direction (cross-polarization discrimination of 30 dB can be
achieved)
5. Changed the polarization direction of the radio link.
The fault was rectified.
Conclusions and Suggestions
If the RSL of an ODU is normal or apparently greater than the receiver sensitivity, frequent and
intermittent radio link interruptions or bit errors are generally caused by interference signals.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
175
5.17.6 Poor Reliability Due to Network Planning Errors
Fault Symptoms
A radio link frequently but intermittently reported MW_RDI, R_LOC, and RPS_INDI alarms,
and HSB switchovers were triggered.
Table 5-31 Link information
Protection 1+1 HSB
IF board IF1B boards
IF mode IF mode 7 (28M/128QAM/STM-1)
ODU type SPA ODUs operating at the 8 GHz frequency
band
Receiver sensitivity 70.5 dBm
Transmit power 20 dBm
Receive power 39.5 dBm
Planned availability 99.994%
Predicted annual interruption time 1877 seconds

Cause Analysis and Handling Procedure
1. Queried historical receive power values of the radio link.
The receive power decreased to a value close to the receiver sensitivity when an alarm was
reported. Most alarms were reported during the night or in the early morning. When the
weather was favorable at noon, the receive power was normal. Therefore, intermittent radio
link interruptions were caused by multipath fading.
2. Checked annual interruption time predicted for the radio link.
The actual annual interruption time was longer than the predicted time of 1877 seconds.
Therefore, the fading margin was insufficient.
3. Checked the network planning methods.
The ITU-R-P.530-7/8 method was used. The area covered by the radio link was in the
Middle East, and therefore the ITU-R-P.530-9 method should be used.
4. Used the ITU-R-P.530-9 method to predict annual interruption time without changing other
conditions.
The obtained value was about 175833 seconds, which was longer than the value obtained
using the ITU-R-P.530-7/8 method.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
176
Figure 5-25 Using the ITU-R-P.530-7/8 method
Figure 5-26 Using the ITU-R-P.530-9 method
5. Deleted 1+1 HSB protection settings and configured 1+1 SD protection. The link
availability met service requirements.
Conclusions and Suggestions
Network planning is crucial to radio link performance. For radio links that are frequently
interrupted due to fading, it is recommended that you first check their network planning
information.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
6 Part Replacement
About This Chapter
Part replacement is a method frequently used to locate faults. The replacement operation varies
according to the specific part type.
Background Information
Table 6-1 Part replacement description
Part Name Operation Tool
CQ1 6.4 Replacing the Channelized
STM-1 Processing Board
l ESD wrist strap
l Screwdriver
l U2000
l Fiber remover
SL1D, SL1DA 6.3 Replacing the SDH Optical
Interface Board
EG4, EG4P,
EM6T, EM6F,
EMS6,
EM6TA,
EM6FA, and
EFP8
6.7 Replacing the Ethernet
Interface Board
CF card 6.9 Replacing the CF Card
CST, CSH,
CSHU and
CSHUA
6.10 Replacing the System
Control, Switching and Timing
Board
AUX 6.11 Replacing the Auxiliary
Board
SP3D and SP3S 6.5 Replacing the PDH Interface
Board
l ESD wrist strap
l Screwdriver
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
Part Name Operation Tool
ISV3, IF1,
IFU2, ISX2,
ISU2, and IFX2
l U2000 6.8 Replacing the IF Board
PIU 6.13 Replacing the Power Board
ML1 and MD1 6.6 Replacing the Smart E1
Interface Board
FAN 6.12 Replacing the Fan Board l ESD wrist strap
l U2000
ODU 6.15 Replacing the ODU l Ejector lever (torque wrench)
l U2000
l Silicon
l Waterproof adhesive tape
IF cable 6.16 Replacing the IF Cable l Multimeter
l Ejector lever
l Electro-technical knife
l File
l Installation parts and
accessories of the connector
l IF cable
l Waterproof adhesive tape
SFP 6.14 Replacing the SFP l ESD wrist strap
l Tweezer fiber remover
l U2000

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
179
6.1 Removing a Board
Removing a board is a basic operation for replacing a board.
Procedure
Step 1 Insert one end of the ESD wrist strap into the ESD connector on the cabinet. Wear the ESD wrist
strap.
Figure 6-1 Wear the ESD wrist strap

Step 2 Optional: If cables are connected to the board, make labels for the cables and then remove the
cables.
NOTE
Use fiber removers to remove fibers or network cables.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
180
Figure 6-2 Tweezer fiber remover

Step 3 Remove the board.
1. Loosen the screws on the panel of the board.
Figure 6-3 Removing a board (1)

2. Hold the left and right ejector levers with hands. Push them outwards to disengage the board
from the backplane.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
Figure 6-4 Removing a board (2)

NOTE
As shown in Figure 6-5, there is a latch on each ejector lever of the System control Switch&Timing
board. To remove the System control Switch&Timing board, you need to push the latches when
pulling the ejector levers outward.
Figure 6-5 Removing the System control Switch&Timing board

3. Pull out the board gently along the slot guide rail.
Figure 6-6 Removing a board (3)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
182
NOTICE
Remove the board slowly to prevent the components on the boards from colliding.

Step 4 Put the removed board into the antistatic box or bag.
----End
6.2 Inserting a Board
Inserting a board is a basic operation for replacing a board.
Procedure
Step 1 Insert one end of the ESD wrist strap into the ESD connector on the cabinet. Wear the ESD wrist
strap.
Figure 6-7 Wear the ESD wrist strap

Step 2 Insert the board.
1. Hold the ejector levers on the panel with both hands. Push them outwards so that the angle
between the ejector lever and the panel is about 45 degrees.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
2. Push the board gently along the slot guide rail until the board cannot slide further.
Figure 6-8 Inserting a board (1)

NOTICE
Insert the board slowly to prevent the components on the boards from colliding.
3. Press the two ejector levers inward with force.
Figure 6-9 Inserting a board (2)

4. Tighten screws on the panel.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
Figure 6-10 Inserting a board (3)

Step 3 Optional: If cables are connected to the board, recover the original cable connections according
to the labels that are made previously.
----End
6.3 Replacing the SDH Optical Interface Board
When the SDH optical interface board is replaced, the unprotected services on the board are
interrupted.
Prerequisites
l You must know the impact of board replacement.
l You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced.
l You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced.
l The spare SDH optical interface board must be available, and the version and type of the
spare board must be the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. You can
query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be
replaced.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l ESD wrist strap
l Screwdriver
l U2000
l Fiber remover
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
Step 2 Optional: If the services on the board are configured with SNCP, ensure that the services are
already switched to the protection channel.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
1. Query the SNCP protection group.
2. Perform the forced switching, if the port on the board functions as the current working
channel, the current protection channel is not on the board, and the state of the current
protection channel is normal or SD.
Step 3 Optional: If the services on the board are configured with linear MSP, ensure that the services
are already switched to the protection channel.
1. Query the linear MSP group.
2. Perform the forced switching, if the port on the board functions as the current working
channel, the current protection channel is not on the board, and the state of the current
protection channel is normal or SD.
Step 4 Remove the board.
Step 5 Check whether the version and SFP type of the spare board are the same as the version and SFP
type of the board to be replaced.
Step 6 Insert the board.
Step 7 After the board starts to work, check the STAT indicator on the board. The STAT indicator
should be on and green.
Step 8 Query the current alarms of the board.
There should be no new alarms on the board.
Step 9 Optional: If the forced switching has been performed on the board, release the forced switching.
Step 10 Optional: If the linear MSP switching has been performed for the services, release the forced
switching.
----End
6.4 Replacing the Channelized STM-1 Processing Board
When the channelized STM-1 processing board is replaced, the unprotected services on the board
are interrupted.
Prerequisites
l You must know the impact of board replacement.
l You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced.
l You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced.
l The spare channelized STM-1 processing board must be available, and the version and type
of the spare board must be the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced.
You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board
to be replaced.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l ESD wrist strap
l Screwdriver
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
l U2000
l Fiber remover
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
Step 2 Optional: If the services on the board are configured with linear MSP, ensure that the services
are already switched to the protection channel.
1. Query the linear MSP group.
2. Perform the forced switching, if the port on the board functions as the current working
channel, the current protection channel is not on the board, and the state of the current
protection channel is normal or SD.
Step 3 Remove the board.
Step 4 Check whether the version and SFP type of the spare board are the same as the version and SFP
type of the board to be replaced.
Step 5 Insert the board.
Step 6 After the board starts to work, check the STAT indicator on the board. The STAT indicator
should be on and green.
Step 7 Query the current alarms of the board.
There should be no new alarms on the board.
Step 8 Optional: If the linear MSP switching has been performed for the services, release the forced
switching.
----End
6.5 Replacing the PDH Interface Board
When the PDH interface board is replaced, the services on the board are interrupted.
Prerequisites
l You must know the impact of board replacement.
l You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced.
l You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced.
l The spare board must be made available, and the version and type of the spare board must
be the same as those of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing
information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l ESD wrist strap
l Screwdriver
l U2000
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
187
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
Step 2 Remove the board.
Step 3 Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version and
type of the board to be replaced.
Step 4 Insert the board.
Step 5 After the board starts to work, check the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator should be
on and green.
Step 6 Query the current alarms of the board.
There should be no new alarms on the board.
----End
6.6 Replacing the Smart E1 Interface Board
When the Smart E1 Interface board is replaced, the services on the board are interrupted.
Prerequisites
l You must know the impact of board replacement.
l You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced.
l You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced.
l The spare board must be available, and the version and type of the spare board must be the
same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. You can query the board
manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.
Tools, Instruments and Materials
l ESD wrist strap
l Screwdriver
l U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board to be replaced.
Step 2 Remove the board.
Step 3 Verify that the spare board has the same board version and board type as the board to be replaced.
Step 4 Insert the spare board.
Step 5 After the substitute board starts to work, check the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator
is on and green.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
NOTE
Smart E1 boards are hot-swappable. After the spare board is installed, it enters initialization state and starts to
work 2 minutes later.
Step 6 Query the current alarms of the substitute board.
There is no new alarm on the board.
----End
6.7 Replacing the Ethernet Interface Board
When the Ethernet interface board is replaced, the unprotected services on the board are
interrupted.
Prerequisites
l You must know the impact of board replacement.
l You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced.
l You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced.
l The spare board must be made available, and the version and type of the spare board must
be the same as those of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing
information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l ESD wrist strap
l Screwdriver
l U2000
l Fiber remover
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
Step 2 Optional: If the services are configured with MPLS APS, ensure that the services are already
switched to the protection tunnel.
1. Querying MPLS APS Status.
2. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.
Step 3 Optional: If the services are configured with PW APS, ensure that the services are already
switched to the protection PW.
1. Querying PW APS Status.
2. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.
Step 4 Remove the board.
Step 5 Check and ensure that the board version and the model of the SFP module on the spare board
are the same as the board version and the model of the SFP module on the board to be replaced.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
189
Step 6 Insert the board.
NOTE
Ethernet interface boards are hot-swappable. After the substitute board is installed, it enters initialization state
and starts working two minutes later.
If dynamic ARP is disabled on the NE at the opposite end of an MPLS tunnel, you need to change the static
ARP table entries of the opposite NE.
Step 7 After the board starts to work, check the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator should be
on and green.
Step 8 Query the current alarms of the board.
There should be no new alarms on the board.
Step 9 Optional: If the forced switching has been performed for the services, release the forced
switching.
----End
6.8 Replacing the IF Board
When the IF board is replaced, the unprotected services on the board are interrupted.
Prerequisites
l You must know the impact of board replacement.
l You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced.
l You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced.
l The spare board must be available, and the version and type of the spare board must be the
same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. You can query the board
manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l ESD wrist strap
l Screwdriver
l U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
Step 2 Optional: If the services on the board are configured with SNCP, ensure that the services are
already switched to the protection channel.
1. Query the SNCP protection group.
2. If the port on the board functions as the current working channel, the current protection
channel is not on the board, perform the forced switching.
Step 3 Optional: If the services on the radio link are configured with 1+1 protection, switch the service
to the protection IF board.
1. Query the IF 1+1 protection group.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
190
2. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.
Step 4 Optional: If the services on the radio link are configured with N+1 protection, ensure that the
services are already switched to the protection IF board.
1. Query the IF N+1 protection group.
2. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.
Step 5 Optional: If the services are configured with MPLS APS, ensure that the services are already
switched to the protection tunnel.
1. Querying MPLS APS Status.
2. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.
Step 6 Optional: If the services are configured with PW APS, ensure that the services are already
switched to the protection PW.
1. Querying PW APS Status.
2. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.
Step 7 Optional: If the IF board is configured with the XPIC function, see 8.1.3 Muting/Unmuting
an ODU and mute the ODU at the opposite end.
Step 8 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board to be replaced.
NOTICE
To turn off the ODU-PWR switch, you need to pull the switch lever outwards slightly and then
set the switch to the "O" position.
Step 9 Remove the board.
Step 10 Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version and
type of the board to be replaced.
Step 11 Ensure that the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the spare IF board is turned off.
Step 12 Insert the board.
Step 13 After the board starts to work, check the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator should be
on and green.
Step 14 Turn on the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
191
NOTICE
To turn on the ODU-PWR switch, you need to pull the switch lever outwards slightly and then
set the switch to the "I" position.
IF boards are hot-swappable. After the substitute board is installed, it enters initialization state
and starts working two minutes later.
If dynamic ARP is disabled on the NE at the opposite end of an MPLS tunnel, you need to change
the static ARP table entries of the opposite NE.
Step 15 Query the current alarms of the board.
There should be no new alarms on the board.
Step 16 Optional: If the forced switching has been performed for the services, release the forced
switching.
Step 17 Optional: If the forced protection switching has been performed for the radio link, release the
forced switching.
Step 18 If the IF board is configured with the XPIC function, see 8.1.3 Muting/Unmuting an ODU and
unmute the ODU at the opposite end.
----End
6.9 Replacing the CF Card
If the NE is configured with only one System control Switch&Timing board, all the services are
interrupted during the replacement of the CF card.
Prerequisites
l You must be aware of the impact of CF card replacement.
l You must know the specific position of the CF card to be replaced.
l You must be a user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.
l You must obtain a spare CF card that has the same capacity as the CF card to be replaced.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l ESD wrist strap
l U2000
l Fiber remover
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
Step 2 Optional: If the board is configured with 1+1 protection, ensure that the services are switched
from the current working board to the protection board.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
1. See 8.9 Switching the System Control Unit and the Cross-Connect Unit, and ensure
that the current working board functions as the protection board.
2. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the manual switching.
Step 3 Remove the board.
Step 4 Remove the CF card according to the illustration in the following figure.
Step 5 Check the spare CF card.
Step 6 Install the spare CF card according to the illustration in the following figure.
Step 7 Insert the board.
Step 8 After the board starts to work, observe the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator should
be on and green.
Step 9 Query the current alarms of the board.
There should be no new alarms.
Step 10 Optional: If the manual switching has been performed on the board, release the manual
switching.
----End
6.10 Replacing the System Control, Switching and Timing
Board
All the services are interrupted during the period of replacing the system control, switching, and
timing board, if the NE is configured with only one system control switch and timing board. If
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
193
a CSH/CST board is replaced, you can restore NE data by replacing the CF card. If a CSHU/
CSHUA board is replaced, you can back up and restore NE data from a USB flash drive. Perform
the operations specific to the type of the board to be replaced.
Prerequisites
l You must be aware of the impact of board replacement.
l You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced.
l You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced.
l The spare board must be made available, and the version and type of the spare board must
be the same as those of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing
information to learn about the version of the board to be replaced.
l If a CSHU/CSHUA board is to be replaced, NE data has been obtained.
The backup NE data has been imported to a laptop where the Web LCT is installed, if
there is a backup of the NE database on the NMS.
The network plan document has been obtained if there is no backup of the NE database
on the NMS.
Impact on System
If no protection board is available, the replacement of the system control, switching, and timing
board results in service interruption.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l ESD wrist strap
l Screwdriver
l U2000
l Fiber remover
l A USB flash drive with the authorization file if a CSHU/CSHUA board is to be replaced
The file folders related to the NE (\db, \pkg, \patch, \sysdata, \script, and \license)
should not exist in the USB flash drive.
The RTN.CER file of the NE should be copied to the root directory of the USB flash
drive.
The RTN.CER file, which stores the account and password information at the system
administration level (the password is encrypted), is generated by the system
administrator of a network management center using dedicated tools.
Context
NOTE
After the NE database is restored successfully, a cold reset is automatically performed on the NE.
Procedure
Step 1 If a CSH/CST board is replaced, restore NE data by replacing the CF card.
1. Query the current alarms of the board.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
194
2. Replace the system control, switching, and timing board.
If... Then...
One system
control,
switching, and
timing board is
configured
1. Notify the onsite maintenance personnel to remove the board.
2. Verify that the version and type of the spare board (including the
patch version) are correct.
NOTE
If the spare board and the board to be replaced have different patch
versions, contact Huawei engineers for loading correct patches.
3. Remove the CF card from the original board and then install the
CF card to the spare board. For details about how to install the CF
card, see 6.9 Replacing the CF Card.
4. Insert the spare board into the chassis.
5. Press and hold the CF RCV button on the board for 8 seconds so
that the board automatically restores the NE databases, system
parameters, software packages, and NE logs from the CF card.
NOTE
l In the process of restoring the NE database, the PROG indicator on the
board blinks green for about 20 minutes.
l If the database restoration is successful, the NE resets automatically.
After the NE resets successfully, the STAT and PROG indicators are
on and green.
l If the database restoration fails, the NE does not reset, and the PROG
is red. In this case, contact Huawei technical support engineers for
rectifying the fault.
NOTE
After the NE starts up normally, the STAT and PROG indicators on the board
are green.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
If... Then...
Two system
control,
switching, and
timing boards
are configured
1. Before replacing a working system control, switching, and timing
board, switch services from the working board to the protection
board. For details, see 8.9 Switching the System Control Unit
and the Cross-Connect Unit.
NOTICE
When the data of the working board is being synchronized to the protection
board or synchronization data is being delivered to the chip of the
protection board, removing the working board may interrupt services.
Before removing the working board, ensure that the board is in standby
status.
Wait until the protection switchover is completed, and then go to the next
step. A protection switchover is completed only after the data of the
working board has been synchronized to the protection board and
synchronization data has been delivered to the chip of the protection board.
2. After completing the protection switchover, Remove the board
to be replaced.
3. Check whether the version and type of the spare board are the
same as the version and type of the board to be replaced.
4. Insert the spare board.
5. Wait for about 10 minutes to complete the backup of the data on
the main and standby system control units.
NOTE
After the NE starts up normally, the STAT and PROG indicators on the board
are green.

3. Query the current alarms of the board. There should be no new alarms.
Step 2 If a CSHU/CSHUA board is replaced, back up and restore NE data from a USB flash drive.
1. Query the current alarms of the board.
2. Optional: If the NE is running, back up the NE data to the USB flash drive.
a. Insert the USB flash drive in the USB port on the OptiX RTN 950.
The indicator beside the USB port is blinking yellow during the data backup, and is
steady green after the data backup is complete.
b. Remove the USB flash drive after the data backup is complete.
3. Turn off the power supply for the IDU.
If the OptiX RTN 950 uses a two-input power supply, turn off both power inputs.
4. Replace the CSHU/CSHUA board.
a. Make labels for the cables and then remove the cables connected to the board.
NOTE
When removing the power cable, press the former section of the red button and pull the red button.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
196
1
2
1
1
2
Press
2
Press the front of the red latch. Properly move the red latch outwards. 2
1
b. Remove the CSHU/CSHUA board.
c. Verify that the spare board and the board to be replaced are of the same version and
use the same type of SFP modules.
d. Insert the spare CSHU/CSHUA board into the slot.
e. Recover the original cable connections according to the labels that are made
previously.
5. See the Commissioning Guide to power on the NE.
6. Restore NE configuration data.
If... Then...
The original NE is in the running state
and NE database is backed up by
following Step 2.2
Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port
of the CSHU/CSHUA board
The indicator beside the USB port is
blinking yellow during data restoration,
and is steady green after the data is restored.
It takes more than 10 minutes to restore NE
configuration data.
The original NE is not in the running
state and NE database is backed up to a
USB flash drive
1. Set the ID and IP address of the NE to
the predefined values by referring to
Changing the NE ID and Changing the
NE IP Address.
2. Restore NE configuration data by
referring to 7.4 Restoring the
Database by NMS.
The original NE is not in the running
state and NE database is not backed up
Configure NE data according to the
network plan.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
7. Query the current alarms of the board.
There should be no new alarms.
----End
6.11 Replacing the Auxiliary Board
When the auxiliary board is replaced, the services on the auxiliary board are interrupted.
Prerequisites
l You must know the impact of board replacement.
l You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced.
l The spare board must be made available, and the version and type of the spare board must
be the same as those of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing
information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l ESD wrist strap
l Screwdriver
l U2000
l Fiber remover
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
Step 2 Remove the board.
Step 3 Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version and
type of the board to be replaced.
Step 4 Insert the spare board.
Step 5 After the board starts to work, check the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator should be
on and green.
Step 6 Query the current alarms of the board.
There should be no new alarms on the auxiliary board.
----End
6.12 Replacing the Fan Board
The IDU cannot perform air cooling in the process of replacing the fan board. Therefore, you
need to replace the fan board quickly.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
Prerequisites
l You must be aware of the impact of board replacement.
l You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced.
l The spare board must be made available, and the version and type of the spare board must
be the same as those of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing
information to learn about the version of the board to be replaced.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l ESD wrist strap
l U2000
Precautions
CAUTION
Do not touch the blades until the fan has stopped rotating.
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
Step 2 Move the cables away from the front panel of the fan board assembly.
Step 3 Remove the fan board.
1
2
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199
Step 4 Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version and
type of the board to be replaced.
Step 5 Insert the standby fan board.
1
2
Step 6 After the board starts to work, observe the indicators on the board. The FAN indicator should
be on and green.
Step 7 Query the current alarms of the board.
There should be no new alarms.
----End
6.13 Replacing the Power Board
If another power board works normally during the replacement period, the services at the IDU
are not affected.
Prerequisites
l You must be aware of the impact of board replacement.
l You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced.
l The spare board must be made available, and the version and type of the spare board must
be the same as those of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing
information to learn about the version of the board to be replaced.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l ESD wrist strap
l Screwdriver
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
200
l U2000
Precautions
CAUTION
Do not remove or insert the power plug when the power is on. Turn off the power switch before
removing the power cable from the PIU.
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
Step 2 Turn off the output power switch for the IDU on the power supply equipment.
Step 3 Remove the cables connected to the board.
NOTE
When removing the power cable, press the former section of the red button and pull the red button.
Press the front of the red latch.
Properly move the red latch outwards. 2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
Press
Step 4 Remove the power board gently and horizontally along the guide rail.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
201
Step 5 Ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version and type of the
board to be replaced.
Step 6 Insert the spare board steadily along the guide rail.
Step 7 Reconnect the cables between the board and the power supply equipment.
Step 8 Turn on the output power switch for the IDU.
Step 9 After the board starts to work, observe the indicators on the board. The PWR indicator should
be on and green.
Step 10 Query the current alarms of the board.
There should be no new alarms on the board.
----End
6.14 Replacing the SFP
When the small form pluggable (SFP) is replaced, the unprotected services on the optical/
electrical port are interrupted.
Prerequisites
l You must know the impact of SFP replacement.
l You must know the specific position of the SFP to be replaced.
l You must know the service protection and protection channels of the SFP to be replaced.
l The spare SFP must be available, and the version and type of the spare SFP must be the
same as the version and type of the SFP to be replaced. You can query the board
manufacturing information to obtain the version of the SFP to be replaced.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l ESD wrist strap
l Tweezer fiber remover
l U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
Step 2 Optional: If SNCP is configured for services at the optical interface, ensure that the services
are already switched to the protection channel.
1. Query the status of the SNCP group.
2. If the port on the local board functions as the working channel, the protection channel does
not involve the local board, and the protection channel is in the normal or SD state, perform
forced switching.
Step 3 Optional: If linear MSP is configured for services at the optical interface, ensure that the services
are already switched to the protection channel.
1. Query the status of the linear MSP group.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
202
2. If the port on the local board functions as the working channel, the protection channel does
not involve the local board, and the protection channel is in the normal or SD state, perform
forced switching.
Step 4 Record the cable connections of the SFP, and then disconnect cables.
Step 5 Check the types of the spare SFP and the SFP to be replaced, and remove the SFP module.
NOTE
l Hold the extraction lever to remove the optical module.
l Press the release button before removing the STM-1 electrical module.
2
1
Press the release button.
Remove the STM-1 electical module.
1
2
Step 6 Insert the standby SFP module and reconnect cables based on the record.
Step 7 Query the current alarms of the board.
There should be no new alarms on the board.
Step 8 Optional: If the forced switching has been performed on the board, release the forced switching.
Step 9 Optional: If the linear MSP switching has been performed for the services, release the forced
switching.
----End
6.15 Replacing the ODU
When the ODU is replaced, the unprotected services on the ODU are interrupted.
Prerequisites
l You must know the impact of ODU replacement.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
203
l You must know the specific positions of the ODU to be replaced and the IF board connected
to the ODU.
l The spare ODU must be at hand, whose type must be the same as the type of the ODU to
be replaced.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l Ejector lever (torque spanner)
l U2000
l Silicon
l Waterproof adhesive tape
Precautions
Before you replace an ODU that is installed on the coupler, power off the ODU to be replaced,
but do not power off or mute the other ODU. Otherwise, the services may be affected. The
interface of the coupler ejects little RF radiation, thus meeting the safety standards for microwave
radiation.
Do not damage the coating when you replace an ODU. In the case of any coating damage, repair
the coating timely.
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms on the ODU and then record the results.
Step 2 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board.
Step 3 Remove the IF cable and the PGND cable from the ODU.
Step 4 Remove the ODU.
Option Description
If... Then...
You need to remove the RTN 600 ODU
with a waveguide interface
Loosen the four latches of the ODU and
disconnect the ODU from the antenna, the
hybrid coupler, or ODU adapter.
You need to remove the RTN 600 ODU
with a coaxial interface
Remove the ODU from the post.
You need to remove the RTN XMC ODU Loosen the captive screws on the ODU and
disconnect the ODU from the antenna, the
hybrid coupler, or ODU adapter.
Step 5 Ensure the type of the spare ODU is the same as the type of the ODU to be replaced.
Step 6 Install the ODU.
Option Description
If... Then...
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
204
Option Description
You need to install a new RTN 600 ODU
with a waveguide interface
See the RTN 600 ODU Quick Installation
Guide.
You need to install a new RTN 600 ODU
with a coaxial interface
See the RTN 600 ODU Quick Installation
Guide.
You need to install a new RTN XMC ODU See the RTN XMC ODU Installation Guide.
Step 7 Connect the PGND cable and the IF cable to the ODU.
Step 8 Waterproof the IF interface on the ODU.
Step 9 Turn on the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board.
Step 10 After the ODU starts to work, check the LINK indicator and ODU indicator on the IF board.
The ODU indicator and LINK indicator should be on and green.
Step 11 Query the current alarms of the ODU. There should be no new alarms on the ODU.
----End
6.16 Replacing the IF Cable
When the IF cable is replaced, the unprotected services on the IF cable are interrupted.
Prerequisites
l You must know the impact of IF cable replacement.
l You must know the specific positions of the IF cable to be replaced and the IF board
connected to the IF jumper.
l In the case of the RG-8U IF cable or the 1/2-inch IF cable, an IF jumper is required to
connect the IF cable to the IDU and both ends of the IF cable should be terminated with
type-N connectors. In the case of the 5D IF cable, the IF cable is connected directly to the
IDU and the cable end connecting to the IDU should be terminated with the TNC connector
and the cable end connecting to the ODU should be terminated with the type-N connector.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l Multimeter
l Ejector lever
l Electro-technical knife
l File
l Installation parts and accessories of the connector
l IF cable
l Waterproof adhesive tape
Procedure
Step 1 Query and record the current alarm of the IDU.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
205
Step 2 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board.
Step 3 Disconnect the IF cable from the IF jumper and from the ODU.
Step 4 Use a multimeter to test the connectivity of the IF cable to determine whether you need to make
new connectors for the IF cable or replace the IF cable with a new one.
If... Then...
You need to make new connectors for the
IF cable
See the Installation Reference and make new
connectors for the IF cable.
You need to replace the IF cable with a new
one
Replace the IF cable with a new one.
Step 5 Connect the IF cable to the IF jumper and to the ODU.
Step 6 Waterproof the connectors at the two ends of the IF cable with the waterproof adhesive tape.
Step 7 Turn on the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board.
Step 8 After the ODU starts to work, check the LINK and ODU indicators on the IF board.
The ODU indicator and LINK indicator should be on and green.
Step 9 Query the current alarms of the IDU.
There should be no new alarms on the IDU.
----End
6.17 Erasing Data in the Repair Parts
The storage media on the system control board stores NE configuration data. If necessary, erase
data on the board before repair.
6.17.1 Board Storage Media
The storage media on the system control board has the flash memory and CF card.
Overview
OptiX RTN 950 has two types of storage media: CF card and flash memory. Both the CF card
and flash memory may contain configuration data. As shown in Table 6-2, the types of storage
media supported by the system control boards for the OptiX RTN 950 are listed.
Table 6-2 Types of storage media on the system control boards
Board Storage Media
CST/CSH l Flash memory (integrated on the system
control board)
l CF card (pluggable)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
206
Positions of the Storage Media
DIP switches on the system control board are used for some special maintenance-related
operations, including formatting the flash memory.
For the positions of the CF card and the DIP switches for formatting the flash memory, see "DIP
Switches and CF Card" of the system control board in the IDU Hardware Description.
6.17.2 Removing the CF Card
If necessary, remove the CF card from the repaired system control board to ensure data security.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l ESD wrist strap or ESD glove
l ESD bag for storing the removed CF card
NOTICE
Slowly and carefully remove the CF card, to prevent damages to the CF card or its card slot.
Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves during operations.
1. Put your hand through the ESD wrist strap, as shown inFigure 6-11.
Figure 6-11 Wearing an ESD wrist strap
2. Fasten the wrist strap to ensure good contact between the ESD wrist strap and your skin.
3. Connect the ground end of the ESD wrist strap to the ESD jack in the cabinet or chassis.
Step 2 Remove the CF card.
Step 3 Place the removed CF card to an ESD bag.
----End
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
207
6.17.3 Formatting the Flash Memory
If necessary, erase data in the flash memory by setting the DIP switches.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l ESD wrist strap or ESD glove
Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves during operations.
1. Put your hand through the ESD wrist strap, as shown inFigure 6-12.
Figure 6-12 Wearing an ESD wrist strap
2. Fasten the wrist strap to ensure good contact between the ESD wrist strap and your skin.
3. Connect the ground end of the ESD wrist strap to the ESD jack in the cabinet or chassis.
Step 2 Format the flash memory.
1. Remove the system control board from the chassis.
2. Set the BIOS DIP switches to binary values "1111".
When the DIP switches are set to "1111", the software will erase all data (except for board
manufacturing information), including data in the file system and the system parameter
area.
NOTE
For the positions of the DIP switches of system control boards, see "DIP Switches and CF Card" of
the system control board in the IDU Hardware Description.
3. Insert the system control board to the backup chassis, and power on the board. Observe the
RUN indicator. If the RUN indicator on the system control board blinks every 1s, the data
on the flash memory has been cleared.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
208
NOTE
If the system control board cannot be powered on or the software fails to start, the preceding method
of clearing data from the flash memory by changing DIP switch settings is inapplicable. In this case,
contact Huawei technical support engineers.
----End
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 6 Part Replacement
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
209
7 Database Backup and Restoration
About This Chapter
The OptiX RTN 950 supports database backup and restoration through the NMS.
7.1 NE Database
An NE database stores communication data, security data, alarm data, performance data, and
configuration data of an NE in a certain structure, to facilitate data query and modification and
to ensure that the data can be restored after the NE is reset.
7.2 Backing Up the Database Manually
The NE configuration data is stored in the database of an NE. To prevent the database from
being damaged due to certain risky operations such as replacing a faulty system control, cross-
connect, and timing board or upgrading the software, you need to manually back up the database
on a regular basis and before performing any risk operation.
7.3 Setting the Database Backup Policy
You can set the policy of backing up a database to realize the function of periodically backing
up the database.
7.4 Restoring the Database by NMS
If the database is damaged, you can restore the NE database by using the database files that are
saved previously.
7.5 Recovering Databases from a USB Flash Drive
When NE data is lost or abnormal and DCN communication fails on an NE that houses a CSHU/
CSHUA board, you can recover NE databases from a USB flash drive.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 7 Database Backup and Restoration
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
210
7.1 NE Database
An NE database stores communication data, security data, alarm data, performance data, and
configuration data of an NE in a certain structure, to facilitate data query and modification and
to ensure that the data can be restored after the NE is reset.
Three types of NE databases are available:
l Memory database (MDB)
The data in the MDB varies according to the configuration and is lost when the system
control unit is reset or when the NE is powered off.
l Dynamic random database (DRDB)
The DRDB automatically stores the data that is checked successfully. The DRDB is resident
in the reserved memory. Hence, the data in the DRDB is not lost when a warm reset is
performed on the system control unit. The data, however, is lost when a cold reset is
performed on the system control unit or when the NE is powered off.
l Flash database (FDB)
The FDB includes FDB0 and FDB1. The FDB is resident in the flash memory on the board.
Hence, the data in the FDB is permanently stored.
NE Database Backup
NE configuration data, after being delivered to the system control unit, is stored in the MDB.
Upon successful verification of the configuration data, the system control unit copies the data
from the MDB to DRDB and delivers the data to boards.
Two modes are available to back up DRDB data to the FDB:
l An NE backs up DRDB data to the FDB within five minutes after NE configuration data
is modified.
l An NE backs up DRDB data to the FDB every 24 hours.
The following modes are available to back up FDB data:
l Upon a scheduled backup of DRDB data to the FDB, the NE backs up FDB data to a
dedicated partition of the flash memory (other than FDB0 and FDB1).
l On the NMS, FDB data can be backed up to an NMS server manually or at specified
intervals.
l For a CSHU/CSHUA board: If a USB flash drive is inserted in the USB port and the FDB
data in the flash memory is newer than that in the USB flash drive, the NE backs up the
FDB data from the flash memory to the USB flash drive.
l For a CSH/CST board: A CF card stores NE databases, system parameters (including NE-
IPs, NE-IDs, subnet masks, and LSR IDs), software packages, and NE logs.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 7 Database Backup and Restoration
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
211
NOTE
The software packages on a CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and
timing board only during package diffusion. Automatic or manual backup is not needed for software
package synchronization.
Ensure that the software version of the system control, switching, and timing board is the same as that in
a CF card. If the software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board are inconsistent
with those in a CF card, the SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH alarm is reported.
NOTE
For a CSH/CST board, when you use the NMS to back up FDB data, system parameters such as NE-IPs,
NE-IDs, or subnet masks are not backed up, but LSR IDs are backed up.
For a CSHU/CSHUA board, when you use the NMS to back up FDB data, system parameters such as NE-
IPs, NE-IDs, or subnet masks are backed up as well as LSR IDs.
NE Database Restoration
l When an NE is warm reset, the system control unit checks whether configuration data is
available in the DRDB. If configuration data is available in the DRDB, the system control
unit restores data from the DRDB. If the configuration data in the DRDB is damaged, the
system control unit restores data from FDB0 and FDB1.
l When the NE is cold reset, the system control unit restores data from FDB0 and FDB1.
l When the data in both FDB0 and FDB1 is damaged, data can be restored from the CF
card.
l On the NMS, the FDB data in flash memory can be restored from an NMS server without
interruption of TDM services.
l For a CSHU/CSHUA board: If a USB flash drive is inserted in the USB port and the FDB
data in the USB flash drive is newer than that in the flash memory, the NE backs up the
FDB data from the USB flash drive to the flash drive.
l For a CSH/CST board: After you hold down the CRV button on the system control,
switching, and timing board for 8s, the data stored on the CF card will be synchronized to
the board. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs from the
system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backup
function. The default backup interval is 24 hours.
7.2 Backing Up the Database Manually
The NE configuration data is stored in the database of an NE. To prevent the database from
being damaged due to certain risky operations such as replacing a faulty system control, cross-
connect, and timing board or upgrading the software, you need to manually back up the database
on a regular basis and before performing any risk operation.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
l You must log in to the NE.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 7 Database Backup and Restoration
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
212
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/
Restoration from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In NE View, click Find.
Step 3 In the Find NE dialog box, set the search conditions and search for the NE that requires database
backup.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Click Backup.
NOTE
Press and hold the Ctrl button on the keyboard, you can select multiple NEs to back up the data at one time.
Step 6 Set the data backup path to NMS Server or NMS Client according to the requirements.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 7 Database Backup and Restoration
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
213
Step 7 Click Start to start backing up the NE data. In NE View, Operation Status indicates the progress
of backing up the data. After the data backup is successful, Operation Status displays a message,
indicating that the operation is successful.
----End
7.3 Setting the Database Backup Policy
You can set the policy of backing up a database to realize the function of periodically backing
up the database.
Precautions
NOTE
During the database backup by the NMS, do not recover or backup data by USB flash drive.
7.3.1 Setting the User-Defined Backup Policy
Through this task, you can set the backup policy for a specific NE.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
l You must log in to the NE.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Background Information
Each NE has a default data backup policy.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 7 Database Backup and Restoration
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
214
l Database packages are backed up once at 2:00.
l The default backup policy is disabled by default.
l A maximum of five database packages can be backed up at a time.
l Data changes do not trigger any backup operations.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Backup Policy Management
from the Main Menu.
Then, the NE Backup Policy Management dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 In Auto Backup Policy window, set NE type.
The version, name, and IP address of the selected NE are displayed.
Step 3 Click New Policy.
Step 4 Optional: Click to import the information of the NEs.
Step 5 Optional: Click to export the information of the NEs.
The information of the selected NEs is stored in the specified location.
Step 6 In NE Table, select one or more NEs.
Step 7 Click Next.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 7 Database Backup and Restoration
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
215
Then, the Setting Policy dialog box is displayed.
Step 8 Set Policy Name, Period Backup Policy, and Period Save Policy.
NOTE
l If The Added NE's Policy Status is set to Enable, the NMS performs the backup operation within
the specified period, day, and time.
l If The Added NE's Policy Status is set to Disable, the backup policy is still in the Disable state
although the policy period reaches the specified period, day, and time.
Step 9 Click Advanced Settings, and set Backup Type, Max Backup Num, and Configuration
Change Backup for a certain type of NEs.
Step 10 Click OK.
Step 11 Click OK.
----End
7.3.2 Enable the Backup Policy of the Device
Through this task, you can set the backup policy of a device to the running state.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Backup Policy Management
from the Main Menu.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 7 Database Backup and Restoration
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
216
Then, the NE Backup Policy Management dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 In Auto Backup Policy window, set NE type.
The version, name, and IP address of the selected NE are displayed.
Step 3 Right click the selected NE, Click Enable Backup Policy.
----End
7.3.3 Disable the Backup Policy of the Device
Through this task, you can set the backup policy of a device to the suspended state.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Backup Policy Management
from the Main Menu.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 7 Database Backup and Restoration
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
217
Then, the NE Backup Policy Management dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 In Auto Backup Policy window, set NE type.
The version, name, and IP address of the selected NE are displayed.
Step 3 Right click the selected NE, Click Disable Backup Policy.
----End
7.4 Restoring the Database by NMS
If the database is damaged, you can restore the NE database by using the database files that are
saved previously.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
l The data to be restored must be backed up.
l You must log in to the NE.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 7 Database Backup and Restoration
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
218
Precautions
NOTE
During the database restoring by the NMS, do not recover or backup data by USB flash drive.
Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/
Restoration from the Main Menu.
NOTE
The equivalent operations on the Web LCT are as follows:
In NE List, click .
In Login, click OK.
For the DC, the default user name is szhw and the default password is nesoft. For the license tool, the default
user name is lct and the default password is password. If the user name or password has been changed, use the
latest one.
The NE Data Backup/Restoration window is displayed.
Step 2 In NE View, click Find.
Then, the Find NE dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 In the Find NE dialog box, set the search conditions to search for the NEs that need to restore
databases.
Step 4 Click OK.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 7 Database Backup and Restoration
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
219
Step 5 Select the NE whose data needs to be recovered, and click Recover.
NOTE
You can select multiple NEs to recover the data at one time.
Then, the Recover dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Select Browse in File Name.
Then, the Select File dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 Select files from NMS Server or NMS Client, and then choose the files to be recovered. Click
OK.
Step 8 Set Activate Type to With Service Interruption and select Deliver To Board Activate.
NOTE
l If Activate Type is No Reboot, only database files are overwritten and the NE will not be warm reset. The
database does not take effect until the NE is reset.
l If Activate Type is With Service Interruption, database files will be overwritten, the NE will be warm
reset, and then the database will take effect.
l If Deliver To Board Activate is selected, the EFP8/EMS6 board will be instructed to perform a cold reset
during database activation.
l If Deliver To Board Activate is unselected, the EFP8/EMS6 board will not be cold reset.
Step 9 In the Recover dialog box, click Start.
Step 10 Click Yes in the prompt dialog box.
The system starts recovering the selected data files on the specified NE.
In the NE list of NE View, Operation Status indicates the progress of recovering the data.
After the data is recovered, Operation Status displays a message, indicating that the operation
is successful.
Step 11 In NE View, right-click the NE and choose Active Database from the shortcut menu.
The Active Database dialog box is displayed.
Step 12 Click Start to start activating the database.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 7 Database Backup and Restoration
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
220
NOTE
If the NE transmits data services, select Deliver to Board.
Services are interrupted during the activation of databases.
In NE View, Operation Status indicates the progress of activating the database. After the
database is activated, Operation Status indicates that the operation is successful.
----End
7.5 Recovering Databases from a USB Flash Drive
When NE data is lost or abnormal and DCN communication fails on an NE that houses a CSHU/
CSHUA board, you can recover NE databases from a USB flash drive.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
l The NE database has been backed up.
l You have logged in to the NE on the NMS.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
USB flash drive
Procedure
Step 1 Copy the NE database backup file db_pck.gz from the NMS server to the \db directory in the
USB flash drive.
NOTE
Other directories related to the NE (\pkg, \patch, \sysdata, \script, and \license) must not exist.
Step 2 Copy the RTN.CER file of the NE to the root directory of the USB flash drive.
NOTE
The RTN.CER file, which stores the account and password information at the system administration level (the
password is encrypted), is generated by the system administrator of a network management center using
dedicated tools.
Step 3 Insert the USB flash drive in the USB port on the OptiX RTN 950.
NOTE
During the database recovering process, do not perform operations such as data configuration, NE resets, and
software loading.
Step 4 Check the data loading status based on the indicator on the USB flash drive.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 7 Database Backup and Restoration
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
221
Status of the USB
Indicator
Data Loading Status Operation
The indicator blinks yellow
and then turns steady green.
The loading of
commissioning data is
complete.
NOTE
l When the indicator is
blinking yellow, do not
remove the USB flash
drive. Otherwise, the data
loading may be interrupted.
l After the data loading is
complete, the NE will
automatically reset, which
takes 2 minutes to 3
minutes. After the reset is
complete, the USB
indicator and the system
indicator (SRV) on the NE
are both steady green,
indicating that the data
loading is successful.
Remove the USB flash drive.
The indicator is off. The USB flash drive is faulty
and fails to get online.
NOTE
Another possible cause is that
the USB flash drive is not
properly inserted.
l Copy the commissioning
data to another USB flash
drive.
l Repeat 1 to load the
commissioning data to
the NE.
The indicator blinks red. The type of the USB flash
drive is incorrect or an error
occurs when the NE attempts
to read/write the USB flash
drive.
NOTE
Preparing Documents and
Tools provides the USB flash
drive types that the OptiX RTN
950 supports.
l Copy the commissioning
data to another USB flash
drive.
l Repeat 1 to load the
commissioning data to
the NE.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 7 Database Backup and Restoration
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
222
Status of the USB
Indicator
Data Loading Status Operation
The indicator is steady red. The loaded commissioning
data is abnormal.
Reload the data:
l Save the correct NE
software and
commissioning data
scripts in the correct
directories of the USB
flash drive.
l Repeat 1 to load the
commissioning data to
the NE.
----End
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 7 Database Backup and Restoration
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
223
8 Common Maintenance Operations
About This Chapter
This section introduces common maintenance operations.
8.1 Microwave Link Troubleshooting
This section describes common maintenance operations related to microwave link
troubleshooting.
8.2 Ethernet Service Troubleshooting
This section describes common maintenance operations related to Ethernet service
troubleshooting.
8.3 TDM/CES Service Troubleshooting
This section describes common maintenance operations related to TDM/CES service
troubleshooting.
8.4 Software Loopback
Software loopback refers to the loopback operation that is implemented by using the NMS.
During software loopback, you need not visit the engineering site. Hence, software loopback is
used more widely than hardware loopback.
8.5 Hardware Loopback
Hardware loopback refers to the loopback operation performed by changing the physical
connection.
8.6 Reset
Reset is an important method of troubleshooting software faults. Reset is classified into cold
reset, warm reset.
8.7 Setting the Automatic Release Function
To protect the communication between the NMS and NE against improper operations, an NE
supports the automatic release of the ODU muting, software loopback, and other operations that
require you to exercise caution. The automatic release time is five minutes by default. You can
set whether to enable the automatic release function and the automatic release time through the
NMS.
8.8 Querying Power Consumption of Boards
This section describes how to query power consumption of the ODU and each board.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
224
8.9 Switching the System Control Unit and the Cross-Connect Unit
When the is configured with two system control, cross-connect, and timing boards, you can
manually switch the system control unit and the cross-connect unit as required.
8.10 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters
The optical connectors are easily contaminated in the maintenance process. The minute dust
particles that can be seen only in the microscope can also affect the quality of optical signals. In
this case, the system performance deteriorates. Hence, the fiber connectors or adapters that are
terminated need to be cleaned in time.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
225
8.1 Microwave Link Troubleshooting
This section describes common maintenance operations related to microwave link
troubleshooting.
8.1.1 Monitoring Radio Link Indicators
This section describes how to collect high-density samples about the RSL and MSE indicators
of radio links for monitoring. The longest monitoring duration is 48 hours.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 Navigate to the interface for monitoring the RSL and MSE indicators of radio links.
2
1
Step 2 Configure parameters for monitoring the RSL and MSE indicators of radio links.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
226
3
4
Set the monitored
object.
5
Set the monitoring
duration. The
maximum value is
48 hours.
6
Step 3 Query the monitoring result.
8 7 9
Set the query type.
The query result of the MSE
is displayed in green and that
of the RSL is displayed in red.
Set the time range of
the query.
----End
8.1.2 Scanning Interfering Signals
You can learn whether intra-frequency or inter-frequency interference exists by scanning
frequency spectra in microwave channels.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
l Mute the ODU at the opposite end, before scanning the reference signal.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
227
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from Object tree in the NE Explorer.
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Step 2 Choose Diagnosis&Maintenance > ODU Frequency Scan.
NOTE
The equivalent operations on the Web LCT are as follows:
Choose Diagnosis&Maintenance > ODU Frequency Scan.
Set the parameters, colick Start to Scan.
Step 3 Set the parameters, click Start to Scan.
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
----End
8.1.3 Muting/Unmuting an ODU
The state of an ODU transmitter can be mute or unmute. When the ODU transmitter is in the
unmute state, the ODU transmits and receives microwave signals normally. When the ODU
transmitter is in the mute state, the ODU transmitter does not work, but the ODU can receive
microwave signals.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding IF boards and the ODUs connected to the IF boards must be added to
the NE Panel.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
228
Procedure
Step 1 Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Step 3 Set Configure Transmission Status for the ODU.
NOTE
l In normal cases, Configure Transmission Status is set to unmute.
l If Configure Transmission Status is set to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can
normally receive microwave signals.
l If Configure Transmission Status is set to unmute, the ODU can normally transmit and receive
microwave signals.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.1.4 Performing a PRBS Test for the IF Board
If a special test tool is unavailable, you can perform the PRBS test by using the embedded test
system on the IF board.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
229
Precautions
Figure 8-1 PRBS test of the IF board
1
1
PRBS
transmitter
PRBS
ODU
1
ODU
NE at the local end NE at the opposite end
IF port outloop 1
transmitter
IF board IF board

NOTICE
l During the PRBS test, the services in the tested path are interrupted.
l The PRBS test can be performed only in one path and in one direction at one time.
l The standby IF unit does not support the PRBS test. Before you perform the PRBS test for
the standby IF board of a 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection group, you must switch the standby
IF board to the working state.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure an outloop on the peer IF board by referring to instructions in 8.4.7 Setting Loopback
for the IF Board and .
Step 2 Start a PRBS test on the IF board.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
230
3
Select the desired PRBS test type.
Two PRBS test types are available:
a. PRBS frames are transmitted through the
specified E1 timeslot.
b. PRBS frames are transmitted as Ethernet
frames.
2
1
Select the desired IF board.
4
Configure the
test time.
5
Select an E1 path.
This parameter is
mandatory only for
E1 PRBS tests.
6
7
Step 3 View test results.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
231
View test results.
View the test
report.
8
9
10
Green indicates no
exception.
No bit error is found,
indicating that the link
works properly.
----End
8.2 Ethernet Service Troubleshooting
This section describes common maintenance operations related to Ethernet service
troubleshooting.
8.2.1 Querying the Attributes of an Ethernet Port
Through the operation, you can learn about the attributes of an Ethernet port, such as rate.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
232
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Query the attributes of the FE or GE port on the packet plane.
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
1. In NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree.
2. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function
Tree.
3. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
4. Check the parameters such as Port Physical Parameters, Transmitting Rate, and
Receiving Rate.
Step 2 Optional: Querying the attributes of the port.
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
1. In NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree.
2. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the
Function Tree.
3. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
4. Check the parameters such as Transmitting Rate and Receiving Rate.
Step 3 Optional: Query the attributes of the external port on the EFP8 board.
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
1. In NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree.
2. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from
the Function Tree.
3. Select External Port.
4. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
5. Check the parameters such as Transmitting Rate and Receiving Rate.
NOTE
By performing this operation, you can query the attributes of the external ports on the EFP8 board (PORT1 to
PORT8) and the attributes of the bridging port on the EFP8 board (PORT9).
----End
8.2.2 Searching for Service Paths Based on VLANs
For E-Line services, this operation can display the transmission path of the VLAN service flow
on one access port. For E-LAN services, this operation can display the broadcast domain to
which the VLAN belongs.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
End-to-end Ethernet services have been deployed.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
233
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Search for an E-Line service path.
Step 2 Optional: Search for an E-LAN service path.
----End
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
234
8.2.3 Searching for Service Paths Based on MAC Addresses
For E-LAN services, this operation allows the information of a MAC address learned by each
NE on a service path to be displayed, illustrating the entire service path through which packets
with the MAC address being the source address travel.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
End-to-end Ethernet services have been deployed.
Procedure
Step 1 Search for an E-LAN service path.
Step 2 Query the Learning of MAC Addresses.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
235
----End
8.2.4 Checking the Layer 2 Protocols Used by Ethernet Services
This section describes how to check the Layer 2 protocols, including ERPS, MSTP, and STP,
used by E-LAN services based on service paths.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
End-to-end Ethernet services have been created and the related fibers/cables have been created.
Procedure
Step 1 Search for an E-LAN service path.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
236
Step 2 Check the Layer 2 protocols used by the E-LAN services.
----End
8.2.5 Performing Intelligent Service Fault Diagnosis for Ethernet
Services
This section describes how to intelligently diagnose faults of Ethernet services based on service
paths.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
End-to-end Ethernet services have been deployed.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
237
Procedure
Step 1 Search for services.
Step 2 Select a service to be diagnosed by specifying a service port.
Step 3 Diagnose the service and display the result.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
238
----End
8.2.6 Performing E-LAN Service Loopback Detection
This section checks whether a loopback occurs on Ethernet services based on service paths.
Users can quickly rectify a data storm on a loop after finding out the loopback point.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
End-to-end Ethernet services have been created and the related fibers/cables have been created.
Procedure
Step 1 Search for an E-LAN service path.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
239
Step 2 Perform E-LAN service loopback detection.
NOTE
If a service is looped back, can be seen from the icons .
----End
8.2.7 Monitoring Ethernet Service Performance and Traffic Volume
Based on Service Paths
This section describes how to monitor Ethernet service performance based on service paths.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
240
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
End-to-end Ethernet services have been created and the related fibers/cables have been created.
Procedure
Step 1 Search for service paths.
Step 2 Query the real-time and historical performance data of each measured object on each service
path.
The following figure shows how to query the real-time performance data of priority queues on
a port. Querying the real-time and historical performance data of other measured objects is
similar.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
241
----End
8.2.8 Querying Ethernet Service QoS Configurations Based on
Service Paths
This section describes how to query Ethernet service QoS configurations based on service paths.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
End-to-End Ethernet services and associated fibers have been created.
Procedure
Step 1 Search out service paths.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
242
Step 2 Select the service to be diagnosed by specifying service ports.
Step 3 Query QoS configurations.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
243
----End
8.2.9 Monitoring Ethernet Packets Through Port Mirroring
To monitor and analyze the Ethernet packets at a port, you can enable the port mirroring function
so that the received or transmitted packets on the port are duplicated to another Ethernet port to
which the Ethernet tester is connected. Then, you can monitor and analyze the packets. If the
system control, switching, and timing board is CSHU/CSHUA, this function is not supported.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
244
Context
Figure 8-2 Schematic diagram of Ethernet port mirroring
Mirroring
port
NE under port mirroring
Monitoring
port
Ethernet equipment
Ethernet tester
Duplication
Ethernet equipment
Port
Forwarding

The port mirroring can be performed in two directions.
For the physical ports of:
l In the ingress direction
Also in the upstream direction. The equipment duplicates the packets received from the
mirroring port to the observing port, and then transmits the packets from the observing port
to the Ethernet tester.
l In the egress direction
Also in the downstream direction. The equipment duplicates the packets transmitted by the
mirroring port to the observing port, and then transmits the packets from the observing port
to the Ethernet tester.
For the VCTRUNK of EFP8/EMS6:
l In the upstream direction, the ports mirror the data transmitted from the VCTRUNK to the
TDM side.
l In the downstream direction, the ports mirror the data transmitted from the TDM side to
the VCTRUNK.

Procedure
Step 1 Select operations according to the Ethernet board type.
In the case of... Then...
Ethernet boards exclude EFP8/EMS6 Perform Step 2 toStep 5.
EFP8/EMS6 boards Perform Step 6 toStep 9.

Step 2 In NE Explorer, select the NE.
Step 3 Choose Configuration > Port Mirroring from the Function Tree.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
245
Step 4 Click New, and set Mirror Name, Select the Direction of Mirror Source Function Point,
Mirror Source Function Point, and Mirror Observation Point.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 In NE Explorer, select the EFP8 or EMS6 board.
Step 7 Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Port Mirroring from the
Function Tree.
Step 8 Click New, and set Mirrored Port, Mirrored Upstream Port, and Mirrored Downstream
Port.
Step 9 Click OK.
----End
8.2.10 Using the Ethernet Test Frames
By using the Ethernet test frames, you can check the connectivity of VCTRUNKs. Only the
EFP8 board supports this operation.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
l The service traffic is encapsulated or mapped by using the GFP method.
Tools, Instruments, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
246
Background Information
The Ethernet board uses the specific GFP management frame or Ethernet frame as the test frame.
One frame is transmitted to the opposite Ethernet board per second. After receiving the test
frame, the Ethernet board returns the response frame. Upon receiving the response frame, the
Ethernet service processing board at the local end can judge the connectivity of the VCTRUNK
in between.
Figure 8-3 Ethernet test frames between Ethernet boards
Local
Ethernet
board
Remote
Ethernet
board
Test frame
Response frame

Precautions
NOTICE
Do not use the test frames when the network traffic is heavy.
Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Test from the Function Tree.
Then, the Ethernet Test dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Select the test port and click Clear Counters. Select Clear All Counters.
Step 4 Set Send Mode and Frames to Send.
NOTE
It is recommended that you choose "Burst mode", and a maximum of 10 frames can be transmitted each
time.
Step 5 Click Apply.
The system starts transmitting and receiving test frames.
Step 6 After Status displays Finished Sending, click Query.
Step 7 Check Counter of Frames Sent and Counter of Received Response of Test Frame.
Test frames are used to check the network connectivity. If some of the test frames are lost but
no alarm is reported on the SDH side, you can infer that the network is normal. If all the test
frames are lost, you can infer that the network is faulty.
----End
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
247
Related Information
If you choose the continue mode, the local port transmits test frames continuously until the test
is disabled.
8.2.11 Checking L3VPN Service Performance Using NQA
OptiX RTN 950 can function as the server of NQA UDP jitter. Performance of L3VPN services
between an OptiX RTN 950 and CX600 can be verified by enabling the NQA UDP jitter test on
the CX600.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
l L3VPN services have been correctly deployed.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Context
NQA UDP jitter indicates the difference between the receiving interval and transmission interval
of two neighboring packets between a server and a client. Figure 8-4 shows the process for
testing the NQA UPD jitter:
1. The client sends test packets to the server at a certain interval.
2. After the server receives a test packet, it adds a time stamp and returns the packet to the
client.
3. After the client receives a returned test packet, it calculates the time difference between the
sending and receiving of the packet to get the jitter time.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
248
Figure 8-4 NQA UDP jitter test process
Optix RTN 950
(Server)
CX 600
(client)
Adding time
stamp
Calculating
delay variation
t
n
t
n
'
t
1

t
1
'
t
n
t
1

Packet transmission interval on the client


t
n
' t
1
'
Packet receive interval on the server
UDP jitter test case packet
The packets received by the client can be used to calculate the maximum jitter time, minimum
jitter time, average jitter time, and delay between the client and the server, which can clearly
demonstrate the network performance.
NOTE
When NQA UDP jitter is used to calculate unidirectional delay, time on the client and the server must be
synchronous.
OptiX RTN 950 can only be used as the server of NQA UDP jitter.
Precautions
None
Sample Connection
The following steps are based on the test for services between the UNI (Vlanif 100) of RSG5
and the UNI (the VLAN sub-interface 1-EG4-1.1 on 1-EG4-1) of CSG1 in Figure 8-5.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
249
Figure 8-5 Networking diagram
NodeB
S-GW/MME
Last Mile Access Aggregation MBB core
RNC
eNodeB
1
-
E
G
4
-
2
RSG5
RSG6
ASG4
ASG3
CSG1
CSG2
P11
P12


RR7
RR8
1-EG4-1
20.20.0.8/27
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Performance -> Performance Monitoring Management on the main menu of the
NMS to navigate to the performance monitoring and management interface.
Step 2 On the function tree of the interface, choose Test Path -> Network Path -> UDP Jitter Path
to navigate to the interface for configuring UDP jitter.
Step 3 On the lower right corner of the interface, click Create to navigate to the interface for creating
a monitoring instance.
Step 4 Set parameters for filtering NEs on the interface for setting the filtering criteria and click OK.
NOTE
When there are many NEs, set the filtering criteria to facilitate the selection of the server and client for a UDP
jitter test. When there are only a few NEs, click OK to skip the setting of filtering criteria.
Step 5 Select the server and client for the UDP jitter test from the resource list.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
250
NOTE
By default, OptiX RTN 950 is used as the server of the test and a CX600 is the client.
Step 6 Click Next and Generate Test to generate a path.
Step 7 Click Next to configure the monitoring template. You can select a created template or create a
new template.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
251
Figure 8-6 Selecting a monitoring template
Figure 8-7 Creating a monitoring template
Step 8 Click Next to set the default SLA parameters.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
252
NOTE
Select a UDP jitter path, and configure parameters for the path. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set the destination address of the path to the IP address of the interface for the server to bind the VRF
instance.
l Set the VRF name to the name of the L3VPN instance on the sever.
l Retain the default value for the source address.
Step 9 Click Next to configure the monitoring time range.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
253
NOTE
If the monitoring time range is not set, the UDP jitter test instance will keep on monitoring L3VPN services.
Step 10 (Optional) Click Create Scheduled Policy to set the timing policy for monitoring.
Step 11 Click Next to display the progress of the creation.
Step 12 Click Close to return to the performance monitoring and management interface. On the
performance monitoring list, the created UDP jitter monitoring instance is in the running status.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
254
Step 13 Double-click the monitoring instance to view the monitoring status of L3VPN services in
graphical format.
----End
8.3 TDM/CES Service Troubleshooting
This section describes common maintenance operations related to TDM/CES service
troubleshooting.
8.3.1 Setting the On/Off State of the Laser
When performing operations such as testing a fiber cut, you can set the on/off state of the laser
rather than removing and re-inserting the optical fiber on site.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the desired SDH optical interface board or the channelized STM-1 processing board from
the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
255
Operation object Operation Steps
SDH optical interface board 1. Choose Configuration > SDH
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Choose By Function.
3. Select Laser Switchfrom the drop-down
list.
4. Select a port, and then set Laser Switch.
channelized STM-1 processing board 1. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > SDH Interface from the
Function Tree.
2. Select Basic Attributes.
3. Select a port, and then set Laser Interface
Status.

Step 2 Click Apply.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click OK.
A prompt is displayed.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End
8.3.2 Setting the ALS Function
The SDH optical interface board supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. This
function enables the board to turn off a laser when the board does not transmit services, the
optical fiber is faulty, or the received optical signals are lost.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the desired SDH optical interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select a port, and then set Automatic Shutdown to Enabled.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
256
Step 4 Click Apply to save the settings.
Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.3.3 Performing a PRBS Test for the Smart E1 Processing Board
If a special test tool is unavailable, you can perform the PRBS test by using the embedded test
system on the Smart E1 processing board.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context
The OptiX RTN 950 supports the PRBS test in the UNI direction and in the NNI direction.
The PRBS test in the UNI direction can be performed to check the cable connect to the Smart
E1 processing board, as shown in Figure 8-8.
Figure 8-8 PRBS test in the tributary direction
PRBS
Transmitter
PRBS
Recevicer
Smart E1
processing unit
1
1 Loopback at the port

The PRBS test in the NNI direction can be performed to check the connection between the Smart
E1 processing board and the remote NE, as shown in Figure 8-9.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
257
Figure 8-9 PRBS test in the NNI direction
Cross-connect
Unit
PRBS
transmitter
PRBS
receiver
Smart E1
processing unit
ETH service
processing unit
NE at the local end NE at the opposite end
IN
OUT
ETH port inloop ETH port outloop 1
2
3
2 3
1
ETH service
processing unit
ETH port inloop

Precautions
NOTICE
l During the PRBS test, the services in the tested path are interrupted.
l The PRBS test can be performed only in one path and in one direction at one time.
l A PRBS test can be performed for a CES service that is encapsulated in CESoPSN mode and
is carried by timeslots 1 to 31 on either UNI or NNI side.
l In a PRBS test in the NNI direction for an SATOP CES service, the LOOP_ALM alarm will
be reported on the E1 service where this service is deployed.
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure a loopback as required by referring to Figure 8-8 and Figure 8-9.
Step 2 Start a PRBS test for the smart E1 processing board
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
258
2
1
3
4
5
6
Select the desired
smart E1 board in
the NE Explorer.
Specify the port type, frame
format, test period, and test
duration (1 to 255)
Step 3 View test results.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
259
7
View test results, Green
indicates no exception.
8
9
The number of bit errors
and BER is 0, indicating
no exception.
----End
8.3.4 Performing a PRBS Test for the Tributary Board
If a special test tool is unavailable, you can perform the PRBS test by using the embedded test
system on the tributary board.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
Context
The OptiX RTN 950 supports the PRBS test in the tributary direction and in the cross-connect
direction.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
260
The PRBS test in the tributary direction can be performed to check the connection between the
tributary board and the DDF, as shown in Figure 8-10.
Figure 8-10 PRBS test in the tributary direction
PRBS
Transmitter
PRBS
Recevicer
PDH unit DDF frame
1
1
Loopback at the DDF frame

The PRBS test in the cross-connect direction can be performed to check the connection between
the tributary board and the remote NE, as shown in Figure 8-11.
Figure 8-11 PRBS test in the cross-connect direction
Cross-connect
board
PRBS
transmitter
PRBS
receiver
PDH interface
board
IF board
NE at the local end NE at the opposite end
IN
OUT
VC-4 inloop or
composite port inloop
IF port inloop IF port outloop 1
2
3
2 3
IF board
1
a) IF board working as the line board
Cross-connect board
PRBS
transmitter
PRBS
receiver
PDH interface board
NE at the local end
NE at the opposite end
IN
OUT
VC-4 inloop Port inloop Port outloop 1
2
3
2 3
SDH optical
interface board
1
b) Line board working as the SDH optical interface board

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
261
Precautions
NOTICE
l During the PRBS test, the services in the tested path are interrupted.
l The PRBS test can be performed only in one path and in one direction at one time.
l If you perform a PRBS test in the tributary direction of a port on the SP3S/SP3D board, the
services carried on the other ports may be interrupted transiently.
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure a loopback as required by referring to Figure 8-10 and Figure 8-11.
Step 2 Start a PRBS test for the tributary board.
2
1
Select an E1
interface board in the
NE Explorer.
3
Configure the port type, test
period, and test duration (1
to 255).
4
5
6
Step 3 View test results.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
262
7
View test results. Green
indicates no exception.
8
9
The number of bit errors
and the BER are 0,
indicating no exception.
----End
8.3.5 Querying the Impedance of an E1 Channel
The impedance of an E1 channel is 75 ohms or 120 ohms.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 Select a PDH tributary board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
263
Step 2 Choose Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select By Board/Port(Channel).
Step 4 Select Port in the list.
Step 5 Select a port, and check Port Impedance.
----End
8.4 Software Loopback
Software loopback refers to the loopback operation that is implemented by using the NMS.
During software loopback, you need not visit the engineering site. Hence, software loopback is
used more widely than hardware loopback.
8.4.1 Setting Loopback for the SDH Optical Interface Board
The SDH optical interface board supports the optical/electrical interface inloop/outloop and the
VC-4 path inloop/outloop.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Context
The optical/electrical interface inloop is a process wherein the signals over an SDH port are
looped back at the overhead processing unit towards the backplane.
Figure 8-12 Optical/electrical interface inloop
SDH optical
interface board
Backplane
SDH

The optical/electrical interface outloop is a process wherein the signals over an SDH port are
looped back at the overhead processing unit towards the remote equipment.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
264
Figure 8-13 Optical/electrical interface outloop
SDH optical
interface board
Backplane
SDH

The VC-4 path outloop is a process wherein the signals on a VC-4 path are looped back at the
logic processing unit towards the remote equipment.
Figure 8-14 VC-4 path outloop
SDH optical
interface board
Backplane
VC-4

The VC-4 path inloop is a process wherein the signals on a VC-4 path are looped back at the
logic processing unit towards the backplane.
Figure 8-15 VC-4 path inloop
SDH optical
board
Backplane
VC-4

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
265
Precautions
NOTICE
l The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed.
l A software loopback may be released automatically after a certain period (five minutes, by
defaults). For details, see 8.7 Setting the Automatic Release Function.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the SDH optical interface board from the NE Explorer.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select By Function, and select the loopback mode from the drop-down list.
To Perform... Choose...
Optical/electrical interface loopback Optical(Electrical) Interface Loopback
VC-4 path loopback VC4 Loopback
Step 4 Set the loopback status of the port or path based on the requirements.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.4.2 Setting Loopback for the Channelized STM-1 Processing
Board
The channelized STM-1 processing board supports the optical/electrical interface inloop/
outloop.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
266
Context
The optical/electrical interface inloop is a process wherein the signals over an STM-1 port are
looped back at the overhead processing unit towards the backplane.
Figure 8-16 Optical/electrical interface inloop
Channelized STM-1
Processing Board
backplane
VC-12

The optical/electrical interface outloop is a process wherein the signals over an STM-1 port are
looped back at the overhead processing unit towards the remote equipment.
Figure 8-17 Optical/electrical interface outloop
Channelized STM-1
Processing Board backplane
VC-12

Precautions
NOTICE
l The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed.
l A software loopback may be released automatically after a certain period (five minutes, by
defaults). For details, see 8.7 Setting the Automatic Release Function.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the channelized STM-1 processing board from the Object Tree.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select Advanced Attributes tab.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
267
Step 4 Set the loopback status of the port or path based on the requirements.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.4.3 Setting Loopback for the Tributary Board
The tributary board supports the tributary inloop and outloop.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context
The tributary inloop is a process wherein the signals over a PDH port are looped back at the
coding/decoding unit towards the backplane.
Figure 8-18 Tributary inloop
PDH interface board
Backplane
PDH

The tributary outloop is a process wherein the signals on a tributary path are looped back at the
PDH interface board of the local IDU towards the remote equipment.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
268
Figure 8-19 Tributary outloop
PDH
PDH interface board Backplane

Precautions
NOTICE
The services may be interrupted on the port or on the path where the loopback is performed.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the PDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select By Function, and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down list.
Step 4 Set the loopback status of the path based on the requirements.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.4.4 Setting a Loopback for the Smart E1 Processing Board
A Smart E1 processing board supports inloops and outloops on E1 ports.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
269
Tools, Instruments, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Context
The E1 inloop is a process wherein the signals over an E1 port are looped back from the coding/
decoding unit to the backplane.
Figure 8-20 E1 inloop
Smart E1
Processing Board Backplane
E1

The E1 outloop is a process wherein the signals over an E1 port are looped back from the Smart
E1 processing board of the local IDU to the remote equipment.
Figure 8-21 E1 outloop
E1
Smart E1
Processing Boards
Backplane

Precautions
NOTICE
l The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed.
l A software loopback may be released automatically within a period (5 minutes, by default).
For details, see 8.7 Setting the Automatic Release Function.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
270
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Smart E1 processing board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Smart E1
Processing Board Backplane
E1
Step 3 In the Advanced Attributes tab, select the required port.
Step 4 Set the loopback status of the port as required.
Step 5 Click Apply.
The system displays a prompt dialog box for confirmation.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Close the dialog box.
----End
8.4.5 Setting a Loopback for the Packet-plane Ethernet Interface
Board
The Packet-plane Ethernet interface board supports the Ethernet port inloop (at the MAC layer
and PHY layer).
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Context
The Ethernet port MAC inloop is a process wherein the Ethernet physical signals are looped
back at the service processing module of the board at the MAC layer towards the backplane.
The Ethernet port PHY inloop is a process wherein the Ethernet frame signals are looped back
at the interface module of the board at the PHY layer towards the backplane.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
271
Figure 8-22 Ethernet port inloop
Ethernet service
processing board
Backplane
PHY MAC

Precautions
NOTE
PORT 10 on the EFP8 board can not be configured with loops.
PORT 8 on the EMS6 board can not be configured with loops.
NOTICE
l A loopback operation results in service interruption.
l A software loopback may be released automatically after a certain period (five minutes, by
defaults). For details, see 8.7 Setting the Automatic Release Function.
NOTICE
When Port Mode of an Ethernet port is set to Layer 3, do not perform any loopback on the port.
In this case, LSP Traceroute is recommended for locating faults.
Procedure
Step 1 Select an Ethernet processing board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.
Step 2 Select the corresponding function options from the Function Tree based on the loopback type.
To Perform... Choose...
PHY loopback
1. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
MAC loopback
1. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
272
Step 3 Set the loopback status of the port based on the requirements.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.4.6 Setting Loopbacks for the EOS/EoPDH-Plane Ethernet
Interface Board
EPF8 board supports the inloop at Ethernet ports (at the MAC layer and PHY layer) and the
inloop in VC-12 paths. EMS6 board supports the inloop at Ethernet ports (at the MAC layer and
PHY layer) and the inloop in VC-3 paths.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Context
A MAC layer inloop is an inloop where the service processing module loops back the Ethernet
physical signals towards the backplane through the MAC layer. A PHY layer inloop is an inloop
where the interface module loops back the Ethernet frame signals towards the backplane through
the PHY layer.
NOTE
PORT 9 in the EFP8 board only supports inloop at the MAC layer.
PORT 7 in the EMS6 board only supports inloop at the MAC layer.
Figure 8-23 Ethernet port inloop
Ethernet service
processing board
Backplane
PHY MAC

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
273
An inloop in a VC-12 path is an inloop where the logic processing unit of a board loops back
the signals in a specific VC-12 path towards the backplane.
Figure 8-24 VC-12 path inloop
EOPDH
Backplane EFP8

An inloop in a VC-3 path is an inloop where the logic processing unit of a board loops back the
signals in a specific VC-3 path towards the backplane.
Figure 8-25 VC-3 path inloop
EOS
Backplane EMS6

Precautions
NOTICE
l A loopback operation may interrupt the services on the port where the loopback is performed.
l A software loopback may be automatically released within a period (five minutes by default).
For details, see 8.7 Setting the Automatic Release Function.
NOTE
A VC-3 loopback can be performed only after the EMS6 is configured with services.
Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, select the required board from the Object Tree.
Step 2 Select the corresponding function options from the Function Tree according to the loopback
type.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
274
To Perform... Choose...
PHY loopback
1. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management >
Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Select External Port.
3. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
MAC loopback
1. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management >
Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Select External Port.
3. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
VC-12 path inloop
1. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Select By Function.
3. Select the required VC-12 path.
VC-3 path inloop
1. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Select By Board/Port(Channel).
3. Select the required VC-3 path.
Step 3 Set the loopback status of the port as required.
Step 4 Click Apply.
The confirmation dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Click OK.
The prompt dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Close the prompt dialog box.
----End
8.4.7 Setting Loopback for the IF Board
Loopbacks on the IF board are classified into IF port loopback, composite port loopback, and
port MAC loopback. The IF1 board supports the IF port inloop, IF port outloop, composite port
inloop, and composite port outloop. The IFU2/IFX2 board supports the IF port inloop, IF port
outloop, composite port inloop, composite port outloop, and port MAC inloop. The ISU2/ISX2/
ISV3 board supports the IF port inloop, IF port outloop, composite port inloop, and composite
port outloop.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
275
Context
The IF port inloop is a process wherein the IF signals are looped back at the modem unit towards
the backplane.
Figure 8-26 IF port inloop
IF board Backplane
IF signal

The IF port outloop is a process wherein the IF signals are looped back at the modem unit of the
board towards the remote equipment.
Figure 8-27 IF port outloop
IF board Backplane
IF signal

The composite port inloop is a process wherein the microwave baseband signal is looped back
at the MUX/DEMUX unit of the board towards the backplane.
Figure 8-28 Composite port inloop
IF board Backplane
Microwave
baseband signal

The composite outloop is a process wherein the microwave baseband signal is looped back at
the MUX/DEMUX unit of the board towards the remote equipment.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
276
Figure 8-29 Composite port outloop
IF board Backplane
Microwave
baseband
signal

Precautions
NOTICE
l The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed.
l A software loopback may be released automatically after a certain period (five minutes, by
defaults). For details, see 8.7 Setting the Automatic Release Function.
l To perform the software loopback on the standby IF board of the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection
group, switch the standby IF board to the working state forcedly. Otherwise, the operation
may fail.
l Before performing the loopback operation for the IFU2/IFX2 board, disable the AM function
at both ends of the radio link.
NOTICE
When Port Mode of an port is set to Layer 3, do not perform any loopback on the port. In this
case, LSP Traceroute is recommended for locating faults.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding IF board from the Object Tree in the NE explorer.
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function
Tree.
NOTE
The equivalent operations on the Web LCT are as follows:
Select the corresponding function options from the Function Tree based on the loopback type.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
277
To Perform... Choose...
IF port loopback
1. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function
Tree.
2. Select IF Attributes tab.
3. Select the port where the loopback needs to be performed and
set IF Port Loopback.
Composite port loopback
1. Choose Configuration > Digital Interface from the Function
Tree.
2. Select By Function.
3. Choose Optical(Electrical) Interface Loopback from the
drop-down list.
4. Select the port where the loopback needs to be performed and
set Optical (Electrical) Interface Loopback.
MAC loopback
1. Choose Configuration > Interface Management >
Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Select Advanced Attributes.
3. Select the port where the loopback needs to be performed and
set MAC Loopback.
Step 3 Select Loopback Attributes.
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Step 4 Select the port where the loopback needs to be performed and set loopback type.
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Step 5 Click Apply.
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Click OK to close the dialog box.
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Then, a dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
----End
8.4.8 Setting Software Loopback for the NE
This task sets the loopback for the object on an NE.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
278
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Precautions
NOTICE
l The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed.
l A software loopback may be released automatically after a certain period (five minutes, by
defaults). For details, see 8.7 Setting the Automatic Release Function.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE in the NE Explorer.
Step 2 Choose Diagnoses&Maintenance > NE Lookback from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select the desired loopback status for the desired port in the table.
NOTE
Composite loopback displays as Optical(Electrical) Interface Loopback.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
279
8.4.9 Setting Software Loopback for the Microwave Link
This task sets the loopback for the object on a single-hop radio link.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Precautions
NOTICE
The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE in the NE Explorer.
Step 2 ChooseDiagnoses&Maintenance > Radio Link Lookback from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select the local IF board.
Step 4 Select the desired loopback status for the desired object.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Then, the dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Click OK.
----End
8.4.10 Locating a Fault by Performing Loopback Operations
Loopback is a common method of locating the fault.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
280
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
Service Trail
Figure 8-30 shows how to locate a fault by performing a loopback operation.
Figure 8-30 Service trail
IF
board
Cross-connect
board
SDH
tributary
board
ODU
NE2
IF
board
Cross-connect
board
SDH
tributary
board
ODU
NE3
Optical cable
IF
board
Cross-connect
board
ODU
NE4
PDH
tributary
board
IF
board
Cross-connect
board
ODU
NE1
PDH
tributary
board

Precautions
The LSP Traceroute method, instead of sectional loopbacks, is recommended for locating the
faults of PWE3 services.
Procedure
Step 1 If the services are available on the radio links, perform the inter-station loopbacks to narrow
down the fault to a specific hop.
1. Set the outloops for the SDH optical interface boards on NE2 and NE3, and then perform
the inter-station loopbacks to locate the fault.
Step 2 After the fault is located on the specific radio link, perform the intra-station loopbacks to narrow
down the fault to a specific NE or board.
1. Set inloop for the IF board on the NEs at both ends of the radio link where the fault occurs,
to check whether the service receiver or the radio link is faulty.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
281
2. If the fault is located in the service receiver, set outloop for the PDH tributary board to
check whether the interface board or switch unit is faulty.
3. If the radio link is faulty, replace the IF board and ODU to check whether the IF board or
ODU is faulty.
----End
8.5 Hardware Loopback
Hardware loopback refers to the loopback operation performed by changing the physical
connection.
Background Information
Hardware loopback is classified into optical cable loopback, PDH cable loopback, and Ethernet
electrical port loopback.
l Optical cable loopback indicates that the receive and transmit optical fibers are connected
through a fiber jumper on the ODF. In certain occasions, an optical attenuator is added
based on the actual situation, to prevent the optical SFP from being damaged by the
excessive receive optical power.
l PDH cable loopback indicates that the receive and transmit PDH cables are connected
through a short-circuiting cable or connector on the DDF.
l Ethernet electrical port loopback indicates that the receive and transmit service signals on
one Ethernet port are looped back through a special loopback Ethernet cable.
8.6 Reset
Reset is an important method of troubleshooting software faults. Reset is classified into cold
reset, warm reset.
8.6.1 Cold Reset
Cold reset is a process wherein the board software is reset and the board is re-initiated. During
the board initialization, the FPGA, if any, is re-loaded.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
282
Precautions
NOTICE
Cold reset causes service interruption because it is similar to the procedure of removing and
inserting a board.
Procedure
Step 1 In Running Status of the U2000, right-click the board where the cold reset needs to be
performed.
Step 2 Choose Cold Reset from the shortcut menu.
Then, the dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click OK.
Step 4 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.6.2 Warm Reset
Warm reset is a process wherein the board software is reset but the board is not re-initiated.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Precautions
During warm reset, the board software is reset but the services are not interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 In Running Status of the U2000, right-click the board where the warm reset needs to be
performed.
Step 2 Choose Warm Reset from the shortcut menu.
Then, the dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click OK.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
283
Step 4 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.7 Setting the Automatic Release Function
To protect the communication between the NMS and NE against improper operations, an NE
supports the automatic release of the ODU muting, software loopback, and other operations that
require you to exercise caution. The automatic release time is five minutes by default. You can
set whether to enable the automatic release function and the automatic release time through the
NMS.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Function
from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Select the desired NE from the Object Tree. Click .
Step 3 In Automatic Disabling of NE Function, set Auto Disabling and Auto Disabling Time
(min).
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings for the automatic release function.
----End
8.8 Querying Power Consumption of Boards
This section describes how to query power consumption of the ODU and each board.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
284
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Power Management from the Main
Menu.
Step 2 In the NE Power dialog box, select the Board Power tab.
Step 3 Select the required NE or board from the object tree, and then click .
Step 4 Click Query.
The Query progress bar is displayed.
Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
Step 6 On the Board Power tab page, browse Nominal Power Consumption and Current Power
Consumption of the selected board.
----End
8.9 Switching the System Control Unit and the Cross-
Connect Unit
When the is configured with two system control, cross-connect, and timing boards, you can
manually switch the system control unit and the cross-connect unit as required.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the desired NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Step 3 In 1+1 Protection List, select Cross-Connect Protection Pair.
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
285
Step 4 Perform the 1+1 protection switching on the board.
If... Then...
Active Board is set to Working Board Click Working/Protection Switching.
Active Board is set to Protection Board Click Restore Working/Protection.
Step 5 In the prompt that is displayed, click OK.
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
----End
8.10 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters
The optical connectors are easily contaminated in the maintenance process. The minute dust
particles that can be seen only in the microscope can also affect the quality of optical signals. In
this case, the system performance deteriorates. Hence, the fiber connectors or adapters that are
terminated need to be cleaned in time.
8.10.1 Cleaning Fiber Connectors by Using Cartridge Cleaners
When there are special cartridge cleaners (such as the CLETOP cassette cleaner), use them for
cleaning the fiber connectors.
Prerequisites
l Disconnect both ends of the fiber. Ensure that there is no laser light on the fiber connectors.
l Inspect the fiber connector with a fiber microscope to ensure that the fiber connectors are
contaminated.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
Cartridge cleaner
Procedure
Step 1 Press down and hold the lever. Then, the shutter slides back and exposes a new cleaning area.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
286
Figure 8-31 Using the CLETOP cassette cleaner

Step 2 Position the fiber tip slightly against the cleaning area and drag the fiber tip slightly in the
downward direction.
Figure 8-32 Dragging the fiber tip slightly on one cleaning area

Step 3 Repeat the same in the other cleaning area in the same direction as Step 2.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
287
Figure 8-33 Dragging the fiber tip slightly on the other cleaning area

Step 4 Release the lever to close the cleaning area.
----End
8.10.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors by Using Lens Tissue
When there is no cartridge cleaners, use the lens tissue for cleaning fiber connectors.
Prerequisites
l Disconnect both ends of the fiber. ensure that there is no laser light on the fiber connectors.
l Inspect the fiber connector with a fiber microscope to ensure that the fiber connectors are
contaminated.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l Clean solvent
l Non-woven lens tissue
l Special compressed gas
NOTE
l The isoamylol is preferred as the clean solvent, and the propyl can also be used as the clean solvent.
Do not use alcohol or formalin.
l The fiber cleaning tissue or lint-free wipes can substitute the non-woven lens tissue.
l The special cleaning roll can substitute the special compressed gas.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
288
Procedure
Step 1 Place a small amount of cleaning solvent on the lens tissue.
Step 2 Drag the fiber tip slightly on the lens tissue.
Figure 8-34 Cleaning the fiber with the lens tissue

Step 3 Repeat Step 2 several times on the areas of the lens tissue that have not been used.
Step 4 Use the compressed gas to blow the fiber tip.
When using compressed gas, note the following points:
l First spray it into the air because the initial spray of condensation may contain certain
sediment.
l Ensure that the injector nozzle is as close as possible to (but does not touch) the connector
surface.
----End
8.10.3 Cleaning Fiber Adapters by Using Optical Cleaning Sticks
The fiber adapters need to be cleaned with optical cleaning sticks. This section describes the
method of cleaning fiber adapters on the optical interface board. The same method can be used
to clean fiber adapters on the optical attenuators and flanges.
Prerequisites
l Before you clean the fiber adapter, remove the optical fiber and shut down the laser. For
details about how to shut down a laser, see 8.3.1 Setting the On/Off State of the Laser.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
289
l Inspect the fiber adapter with a fiber microscope to ensure that the fiber adapter is
contaminated.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l Optical cleaning sticks
l Clean solvent
l Special compressed gas
NOTE
l In the case of the SC and FC optical interface, use the cleaning stick with a diameter of 2.5 mm. In the
case of the LC optical interface, use the cleaning stick with a diameter of 1.25 mm.
l The medical cotton or long fiber cotton can substitute the optical cleaning stick.
l The isoamylol is preferred as the clean solvent, and the propyl can also be used as the clean solvent.
Do not use alcohol or formalin.
l The special cleaning roll can substitute the special compressed gas.
Procedure
Step 1 Apply a small amount of cleaning solvent on the optical cleaning stick.
Step 2 Touch the adapter gently with the optical cleaning stick and turn the stick clockwise four to five
times.
Ensure that there is direct contact between the stick tip and fiber tip so that the solvent can clean
the adapter tip.
Step 3 Use the compressed gas to blow the fiber adapter.
When using compressed gas, note the following points:
l First spray the compressed gas into the air because the initial spray of condensation gas may
contain some sediment.
l Ensure that the injector nozzle is as close as possible to (but does not touch) the inner surface
of the connector.
----End
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide 8 Common Maintenance Operations
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
290
A Alarm Reference
Alarms are important indicators when abnormalities occur on the equipment. This chapter
describes all the possible alarms on the OptiX RTN 950 and how to handle these alarms.
A.1 Alarm List (in Alphabetical Order)
The following table lists all the possible alarms generated by the OptiX RTN 950 in alphabetical
order.
A.2 Alarm List (Classified by Logical Boards)
This part lists the alarms that are reported by each board.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
291
A.1 Alarm List (in Alphabetical Order)
The following table lists all the possible alarms generated by the OptiX RTN 950 in alphabetical
order.
Table A-1 Alarm list
Alarm Name Description Alarm
Severity
A_LOC Loss of clock in the upstream bus Major
ACR_LOCK_FAIL 1588 ACR locking fails Major
ALM_E1RAI E1 link remote alarm indication Minor
ALM_GFP_dCSF Loss of GFP client signals Critical
ALM_GFP_dLFD Out of frame state of generic framing procedure
(GFP) frames
Major
ALM_IMA_LIF Frame delimitation is out-of-frame at the local end
of the IMA link.
Major
ALM_IMA_LODS Differential delay of the IMA link crosses the
threshold.
Major
ALM_IMA_RE_RX_
UNUSABLE
The IMA link on the opposite NE fails in the
receive direction.
Minor
ALM_IMA_RE_TX_
UNUSABLE
The IMA link on the opposite NE fails in the
transmit direction.
Minor
ALM_IMA_RFI Frame delimitation is out-of-frame at the remote
end of the IMA link.
Major
AM_DOWNSHIFT Downshift of AM modes Major
APS_FAIL Failure indication of MS protection switching Major
APS_INDI Indication of the APS protection switching Major
APS_MANUAL_ST
OP
MS protocol stopped manually Minor
ATMPW_UNKNOW
NCELL_EXC
The number of unknown ATM cells exceeds the
specified threshold in a time unit.
Major
AU_AIS AU alarm indication Major
AU_LOP Loss of AU pointers Major
B1_EXC Excessive regenerator section errors (B1) Minor
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
292
Alarm Name Description Alarm
Severity
B1_SD Signal degradation due to excessive regenerator
section errors (B1)
Minor
B2_EXC Excessive multiplex section errors (B2) Major
B2_SD Signal degradation due to excessive multiplex
section errors (B2)
Minor
B3_EXC Excessive higher order path bit errors (B3) Major
B3_EXC_VC3 Excessive B3 bit errors in a VC-3 path Major
B3_SD Signal degradation due to excessive higher order
path bit errors (B3)
Minor
B3_SD_VC3 Signal degradation due to excessive VC-3 path
(B3) bit errors
Minor
BAT1TEMP_SENSO
R_FAIL
The temperature sensor of battery group 1 fails. Major
BAT2TEMP_SENSO
R_FAIL
The temperature sensor of battery group 2 fails. Major
BD_NOT_INSTALL
ED
The logical board is not added on the NMS. Minor
BD_STATUS The board is out-of-position. Major
BDTEMP_SENSOR_
FAIL
The board temperature sensor of the cabinet fails. Major
BGPBACKTRANSI-
TION
A BGP session is interrupted. Major
BIOS_STATUS The board is in BIOS state. Major
BIP_EXC Excessive BIP errors Minor
BIP_SD Signal degradation due to excessive BIP errors Minor
BOOTROM_BAD BOOTROM data check fails. Major
BUS_ERR Bus errors Critical
CES_ACR_LOCK_A
BN
The locking function of CES ACR service clock
is abnormal.
Minor
CES_APS_INDI Packet MSP protocol state indication Major
CES_APS_MANUA
L_STOP
The MSP protocol is disabled manually. Minor
CES_JTROVR_EXC The amount of jitter buffer overflow crosses the
specified threshold.
Major
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
293
Alarm Name Description Alarm
Severity
CES_JTRUDR_EXC The amount of jitter buffer underflow crosses the
specified threshold.
Major
CES_K1_K2_M K1 and K2 mismatch Minor
CES_K2_M K2 mismatch Minor
CES_LOSPKT_EXC The number of lost packets crosses the specified
threshold in a time unit.
Major
CES_MALPKT_EX
C
The number of deformed packets crosses the
specified threshold in a time unit.
Major
CES_MISORDERP
KT_EXC
The number of lost disordered packets crosses the
specified threshold in a time unit.
Major
CES_RDI Remote defect indication Minor
CES_STRAYPKT_E
XC
The number of error packets crosses the specified
threshold in a time unit.
Major
CESPW_OPPOSITE
_ACFAULT
The AC circuit on the opposite NE is faulty. Major
CESPW_OPPOSITE
_RAI
Remote alarm indication Major
CFCARD_FAILED The operation on the CF card fails. Major
CFCARD_OFFLINE The CF card is offline. Major
CHCS Correctable cell errors Minor
CLK_LOCK_FAIL Clock locking fails Major
CLK_NO_TRACE_
MODE
The clock source is not in locked mode. Minor
COMMUN_FAIL Inter-board communication fails. Major
COM_EXTECC_FU
LL
Excessive TCP connections between
automatically extended ECC NEs
Major
CONFIG_NOSUPPO
RT
Configuration is not supported. Major
DBMS_DELETE The status of databases is delete. Major
DBMS_ERROR Errors in the processing of system databases Major
DBMS_PROTECT_
MODE
System databases in protection mode Critical
DCNSIZE_OVER Oversized DCN network Major
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
294
Alarm Name Description Alarm
Severity
DDN_LFA The frame alignment signal of framed E1 services
is lost.
Major
DOWN_E1_AIS Alarm indication of 2 Mbit/s downstream signals Minor
DROPRATIO_OVE
R
The number of lost packets due to port congestion
crosses the threshold.
Minor
E1_LOC Loss of 2 Mbit/s clock in upstream signals Major
E1_LOS Loss of 2 Mbit/s line signals Minor
ELAN_SMAC_FLA
PPING
The source MAC address learned by an E-LAN
service flaps.
Major
ENVHUM_SENSOR
_FAIL
The ambient humidity sensor of the cabinet fails. Major
ENVTEMP_SENSO
R_FAIL
The ambient temperature sensor of the cabinet
fails.
Major
ENVTEMP1_SENSO
R_FAIL
The ambient temperature sensor 1 of the cabinet
fails.
Major
ENVTEMP2_SENSO
R_FAIL
The ambient temperature sensor 2 of the cabinet
fails.
Major
ERPS_IN_PROTEC-
TION
Indicates that a node on the EPRS ring is faulty. Minor
ETH_APS_LOST Loss of APS frames Minor
ETH_APS_PATH_M
ISMATCH
The working and protection paths of the APS
protection group differ between the two ends.
Major
ETH_APS_SWITCH
_FAIL
Protection switching failure Minor
ETH_APS_TYPE_M
ISMATCH
Protection scheme mismatch Major
ETH_AUTO_LINK_
DOWN
Automatic link down of Ethernet port Minor
ETH_CFM_AIS A local MEP_AIS occurs. Major
ETH_CFM_LOC Loss of connectivity Major
ETH_CFM_MISME
RGE
Misconnection Major
ETH_CFM_RDI The maintenance association end point (MEP)
fails to receive CCM packets.
Minor
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
295
Alarm Name Description Alarm
Severity
ETH_CFM_UNEXP
ERI
Error frames Minor
ETH_EFM_DF Discovery failure Major
ETH_EFM_EVENT Performance events at the opposite end Major
ETH_EFM_LOOPB
ACK
A loopback occurs. Major
ETH_EFM_REMFA
ULT
Faults occur at the opposite end. Critical
ETH_LOS Loss of Ethernet port connection Critical
ETH_NO_FLOW No flow on the Ethernet port Major
ETH_PWR_SUPPL
Y_FAIL
Power output failure of an Ethernet port Critical
ETHOAM_DISCOV
ER_FAIL
Discovery failure is detected by point-to-point
Ethernet OAM.
Minor
ETHOAM_RMT_C
RIT_FAULT
Severe faults are detected by point-to-point
Ethernet OAM at the remote end.
Minor
ETHOAM_RMT_L
OOP
A remote loopback is detected by point-to-point
Ethernet OAM.
Minor
ETHOAM_RMT_SD Remote Ethernet performance degradation is
detected by point-to-point Ethernet OAM.
Minor
ETHOAM_SELF_L
OOP
An MAC port loopback is detected by point-to-
point Ethernet OAM.
Major
ETHOAM_VCG_SE
LF_LOOP
A VCTRUNK port loopback is detected by point-
to-point Ethernet OAM.
Major
EX_ETHOAM_CC_
LOS
Loss of periodical continuity check packets Critical
EX_ETHOAM_MPI
D_CNFLCT
Conflict of maintenance point IDs Major
EXT_SYNC_LOS Loss of external clock sources Critical
EXT_TIME_LOC Loss of external time sources Major
FAN_AGING Aged fans Minor
FAN_FAIL Failure of fan boards Major
FCS_ERR Frame check sequence (FCS) errors Critical
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
296
Alarm Name Description Alarm
Severity
FDBSIZEALM_ELA
N
items listed in an E-LAN forwarding table are all
used
Minor
FLOW_OVER Excessive data traffic received by Ethernet ports Minor
GSP_RSVP_NB_AU
TH_ERR
An RSVP neighbor authentication error occurs. Major
GSP_RSVP_NB_DO
WN
An RSVP neighbor becomes unreachable. Major
GSP_TNNL_DOWN A tunnel is interrupted. Major
HARD_BAD Hardware faults Critical
HARD_NONSUPPO
RT
Board hardware does not support a certain
function.
Major
HP_CROSSTR Threshold-crossing performance event of the
higher order path
Minor
HP_LOM Loss of multiframes in the higher order path Major
HP_RDI Higher order path remote defect indication Minor
HP_REI Higher order path remote error indication Warning
HP_SLM Higher order path signal label mismatch Minor
HP_TIM High order path trace identifier mismatch Minor
HP_UNEQ Unequipped higher order path Minor
HPAD_CROSSTR Adaptation performance threshold-crossing of the
higher order path
Minor
IF_CABLE_OPEN IF cables are disconnected. Major
IF_INPWR_ABN The power supplied by an IF board to an ODU is
abnormal.
Major
IF_MODE_UNSUP-
PORTED
Preset IF working mode is not supported. Major
IMA_GROUP_LE_D
OWN
The IMA group at the local end fails. Major
IMA_GROUP_RE_D
OWN
The IMA group at the remote end fails. Major
IMA_TXCLK_MIS-
MATCH
The transmit clock modes at the two ends of the
IMA group are different.
Minor
IN_PWR_ABN Abnormal input optical power Major
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
297
Alarm Name Description Alarm
Severity
IN_PWR_HIGH Over high input optical power Critical
IN_PWR_LOW Over low input optical power Critical
INTEMP_SENSOR_
FAIL
The air intake vent temperature sensor of the
cabinet fails.
Major
IPFPM_INST_TLP_
ERR
Binding an IP FPM instance to the TLP fails. Minor
ISISADJACENCY-
CHANGE
The status of an IS-IS neighbor changes. Major
J0_MM Trace identifier mismatch Minor
K1_K2_M K1 and K2 mismatch Minor
K2_M K2 mismatch Minor
L3V_TRAP_THRE_
EXCEED
The number of private network route prefixes
exceeds the threshold.
Major
L3V_TRAP_VRF_D
OWN
All ports on a private network are down. Major
LAG_BWMM Bandwidth inconsistency in the LAG group Major
LAG_DOWN The LAG is unavailable. Major
LAG_MEMBER_DO
WN
A member port of a link aggregation group (LAG)
is unavailable.
Minor
LAG_PORT_FAIL A member port of a LAG fails. Minor
LAG_VC_PORT_FA
IL
A VCG port of an LAG fails. Minor
LAN_LOC Ethernet communication failure Major
LASER_CLOSED The laser is shut down. Major
LASER_MOD_ERR The type of the pluggable optical module on the
board does not match the type of the optical
interface.
Major
LASER_MOD_ERR
_EX
The type of the pluggable optical module on the
board does not match the type of the optical
interface.
Major
LASER_SHUT The laser is shut down. Major
LCAS_FOPR LCAS protocol fails in the receive direction. Major
LCAS_FOPT LCAS protocol fails in the transmit direction. Major
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
298
Alarm Name Description Alarm
Severity
LCAS_PLCR Loss of partial bandwidth in the LCAS receive
direction
Minor
LCAS_PLCT Loss of partial bandwidth in the LCAS transmit
direction
Minor
LCAS_TLCR Loss of total bandwidth in the LCAS receive
direction
Major
LCAS_TLCT Loss of total bandwidth in the LCAS transmit
direction
Major
LCD Loss of cell delimitation Major
LCS_LIMITED The capacity of the configured services exceeds
the range permitted by the license file.
Major
LDP_PEER_DOWN LDP peer interruption Major
LFA Out of frame state of E1 frames Major
LICENSE_LOST The NE fails to detect any license file. Major
LINK_ERR Faults occur in a data link. Critical
LMFA Out of frame state of E1 multiframes Major
LOOP_ALM A loopback occurs. Minor
LP_CROSSTR Performance threshold-crossing of the lower
order path
Minor
LP_R_FIFO FIFO overflow on the receive side of the lower
order path
Minor
LP_RDI Lower order path remote defect indication Minor
LP_RDI_VC12 VC-12 path remote defect indication Minor
LP_RDI_VC3 VC-3 path remote defect indication Minor
LP_REI Lower order path remote error indication Minor
LP_REI_VC12 VC-12 path remote error indication Minor
LP_REI_VC3 VC-3 path remote bit error indication Minor
LP_RFI Lower order path remote failure indication Minor
LP_SLM Lower order path signal label mismatch Minor
LP_SLM_VC12 VC-12 path signal label mismatch Minor
LP_SLM_VC3 VC-3 path signal label mismatch Minor
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
299
Alarm Name Description Alarm
Severity
LP_T_FIFO FIFO overflow on the transmit side of the lower
order path
Minor
LP_TIM Lower order path trace identifier mismatch Minor
LP_TIM_VC12 VC-12 path trace identifier mismatch Minor
LP_TIM_VC3 VC-3 path tracking identification mismatch Minor
LP_UNEQ Unequipped lower order paths Minor
LP_UNEQ_VC12 Unequipped VC-12 paths Minor
LP_UNEQ_VC3 VC-3 path unequipped Minor
LPS_UNI_BI_M The switching mode is single-ended at one end
and dual-ended at the other end.
Minor
LPT_CFG_CLOSE-
PORT
The LPT closes the access port of the local NE. Major
LPT_INEFFECT LPT function failed Major
LPT_RFI Link state pass-through function fails at the
remote end.
Critical
LSR_BCM_ALM Laser bias current crossing the threshold Major
LSR_NO_FITED Laser not installed Critical
LSR_WILL_DIE Laser going to expire Critical
LTI Loss of clock synchronization source Major
MAC_EXT_EXC The number of bit errors at the MAC layer crosses
the threshold.
Major
MAC_FCS_EXC The software detects that the number of bit errors
at the MAC layer crosses the threshold.
Major
MAC_FCS_SD Signal degrade bit errors at the MAC layer cross
the threshold.
Major
MOD_COM_FAIL Module communication failure Critical
MOD_TYPE_MIS-
MATCH
Port module type mismatch Critical
MP_DELAY The group member delay Major
MP_DOWN MP group failure Major
MPLS_PW_AIS PW forward defect indication Major
MPLS_PW_BDI PW backward defect indication Minor
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
300
Alarm Name Description Alarm
Severity
MPLS_PW_CSF MPLS PW Client Signal Fail
MPLS_PW_Excess Excessive trail termination source identifiers
(TTSIs) are received on the PW.
Warning
MPLS_PW_LCK The server layer (tunnel) of MPLS PW locked
indication
Major
MPLS_PW_LOCK Administration locking of PW layer Major
MPLS_PW_LOCV Loss of PW connectivity Major
MPLS_PW_MISMA
TCH
The trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) on
the PW do not match with the specified one.
Major
MPLS_PW_MISME
RGE
The trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs)
are mismerged on the PW.
Major
MPLS_PW_OAMFA
IL
OAM protocol negotiation failure Minor
MPLS_PW_RDI PW backward defect indication Minor
MPLS_PW_SD Signal degradation on the PW Major
MPLS_PW_SF Signal failure on the PW Major
MPLS_PW_UNEXP
MEG
The MEP receives a packet with correct MEG
level but incorrect MEG ID.
Critical
MPLS_PW_UNEXP
MEP
The CCM information of a PW OAM packet is
incorrect.
Major
MPLS_PW_UNEXP
PER
The PW does not receive a CCM packet in the
expected period.
Major
MPLS_PW_UNKNO
WN
Unknown defects on the PW Major
MPLS_TUNNEL_AI
S
Tunnel forward defect indication Major
MPLS_TUNNEL_B
DI
Tunnel backward defect indication Minor
MPLS_TUNNEL_Ex
cess
Excessive trail termination source identifiers
(TTSIs) are received on the tunnel.
Warning
MPLS_TUNNEL_FD
I
Tunnel forward defect indication Minor
MPLS_TUNNEL_L
OCK
Administration locking of tunnel layer Major
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
301
Alarm Name Description Alarm
Severity
MPLS_TUNNEL_L
OCV
Loss of tunnel connectivity Major
MPLS_TUNNEL_MI
SMATCH
The trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) on
the tunnel do not match with the specified one.
Major
MPLS_TUNNEL_MI
SMERGE
The trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs)
are mismerged on the tunnel.
Major
MPLS_TUNNEL_O
AMFAIL
The OAM protocol negotiation between the two
ends of the tunnel fails.
Minor
MPLS_TUNNEL_R
DI
Tunnel backward defect indication Minor
MPLS_TUNNEL_SD Signal degradation on the tunnel Major
MPLS_TUNNEL_SF Signal failure on the tunnel Major
MPLS_TUNNEL_U
NEXPMEG
Unexpected MEG ID in the CCM packet Critical
MPLS_TUNNEL_U
NEXPMEP
Unexpected MEP ID in the CCM packet Major
MPLS_TUNNEL_U
NEXPPER
Unexpected period of the CCM packet Major
MPLS_TUNNEL_U
NKNOWN
Unknown defects on the tunnel Major
MS_AIS Multiplex section alarm indication Major
MS_CROSSTR Multiplex section performance threshold-
crossing
Minor
MS_RDI Multiplex section remote defect indication Minor
MS_REI Multiplex section remote error indication Warning
MSAD_CROSSTR Multiplex section adaptation performance
threshold-crossing
Minor
MULTI_RPL_OWN
ER
The ring network has multiple RPL_OWNER
nodes.
Minor
MW_AM_TEST The IF port is in the AM testing state. Minor
MW_BER_EXC Excessive errors on radio links Minor
MW_BER_SD Signal degradation due to excessive errors on
radio links
Minor
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
302
Alarm Name Description Alarm
Severity
MW_CFG_MISMAT
CH
Configuration mismatch on radio links Critical
MW_CONT_WAVE Continuous wave Minor
MW_E1_LOST Loss of E1 signals Major
MW_FEC_UNCOR Microwave frames have the errors that cannot be
corrected by using the forward error correction
(FEC) technology.
Minor
MW_LIM Label mismatch on radio links Major
MW_LOF Loss of microwave frames Critical
MW_RDI Remote defect indication on radio links Minor
NEIP_CONFUSION IP address is conflict Major
NESF_LOST The NE software is lost. Critical
NESOFT_MM The software in the main area is different from that
in the standby area.
Major
NO_BD_SOFT The board software is lost. Critical
NP1_MANUAL_ST
OP
The N+1 protection protocol is stopped manually. Minor
NP1_SW_FAIL The N+1 protection switching fails. Major
NP1_SW_INDI N+1 protection switching indication Major
NTP_SYNC_FAIL Synchronization with the NTP time fails. Minor
OCD Out of cell delimitation Major
ODC_BATTERY_C
URRENT_ABN
Abnormal current of the storage battery Major
ODC_BATTERY_P
WRDOWN
The storage battery fails to supply power for the
equipment.
Major
ODC_DOOR_OPEN The door of an outdoor cabinet is open. Critical
ODC_FAN_FAILED Fan failure Major
ODC_HUMI_ABN The relative humidity in the cabinet environment
crosses the specified threshold.
Minor
ODC_LOAD_PWRD
OWN
The secondary load is powered off. Major
ODC_MDL_ABN The power module is abnormal. Major
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
303
Alarm Name Description Alarm
Severity
ODC_POWER_FAI
L
Exceptions occur in the AC input power voltage. Major
ODC_SMOKE_OVE
R
Smoke occurs in an outdoor cabinet. Critical
ODC_SURGE_PRO
TECTION_FAIL
The surge protection function of the outdoor
cabinet fails.
Critical
ODC_TEC_ALM The TEC air conditioning module in the cabinet
fails.
Major
ODC_TEMP_ABN The ambient temperature of the cabinet or the
temperature of the storage battery is
inappropriate.
Minor
ODC_WATER_AL
M
Water in the outdoor cabinet Critical
OSPFNBRSTATE-
CHANGE
The OSPF neighbor state changes. Major
OUT_PWR_ABN Abnormal output optical power Critical
OUT1TEMP_SENS
OR_FAIL
The air outlet temperature sensor of the cabinet
fails.
Major
OUT2TEMP_SENS
OR_FAIL
The external recycling outlet temperature sensor
of the cabinet fails.
Major
PASSWORD_NEED
_CHANGE
Password of the user who logs in is unchanged. Major
PATCH_BD_EXCL
UDE
Patch isolation Major
PATCH_BD_MATC
H_FAIL
Patch matching failure Major
PATCH_CHGSCC_
NOTMATCH
Patch package mismatch due to system control
board replacement
Major
PATCH_PKGERR Abnormal patch package Minor
PG_LINK_FAIL Links of the 1+1 protection group fail. Critical
PG_PRT_DEGRAD
ED
The working link or protection link of the 1+1
protection group is faulty.
Major
PLA_CFG_MISMA
TCH
Inconsistent PLA configurations Critical
PLA_DOWN PLA group is faulty Major
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
304
Alarm Name Description Alarm
Severity
PLA_MEMBER_DO
WN
Member link of a PLA group is faulty Major
PORTMODE_MIS-
MATCH
The working mode of the remote FE port does not
match that of the local FE port.
Minor
PORT_EXC_TRAFF
IC
The traffic is higher than the port bandwidth
threshold.
Warning
PORT_MODULE_O
FFLINE
Port not in position Major
POWER_ABNORM
AL
Power input alarm Major
POWER_ALM Power module alarm Major
PPP_LCP_FAIL LCP negotiation failure Major
PPP_NCP_FAIL NCP negotiation failure Major
PTP_SOURCE_SWI
TCH
PTP time source switching Minor
PTP_TIMESTAMP_
ABN
PTP time stamp abnormality Major
PW_DROPPKT_EX
C
The number of lost packets in a PW crosses the
threshold.
Warning
PW_NO_TRAFFIC The PW has no traffic. Critical
PWAPS_LOST Loss of APS frames Minor
PWAPS_PATH_MIS
MATCH
The working and protection paths of the APS
protection group differ between the two ends.
Major
PWAPS_SWITCH_F
AIL
Protection switching failure Minor
PWAPS_TYPE_MIS
MATCH
Protection scheme mismatch Major
PW_APS_DEGRAD
ED
The PW APS protection group is degraded. Major
PW_APS_OUTAGE The PW APS protection group is unavailable. Major
PW_DOWN A PW is disconnected. Critical
R_LOC Loss of clock on the receive line side Critical
R_LOF Loss of frame on the receive line side Critical
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
305
Alarm Name Description Alarm
Severity
R_LOS Loss of signal or loss of microwave frame on the
receive line side
Critical
R_OOF The out-of-frame fault occurs on the receive line
side.
Critical
RADIO_FADING_M
ARGIN_INSUFF
Radio fading margin is insufficient. Minor
RADIO_MUTE The radio transmitter is muted. Warning
RADIO_RSL_BE-
YONDTH
Antennas are not aligned. Minor
RADIO_RSL_HIGH Over high radio receive signal level Critical
RADIO_RSL_LOW Over low radio receive signal level Critical
RADIO_TSL_HIGH Over high radio transmit signal level Critical
RADIO_TSL_LOW Over low radio transmit signal level Critical
RELAY_ALARM_C
RITICAL
There are critical alarm inputs. Critical
RELAY_ALARM_I
GNORE
There are warning inputs. Warning
RELAY_ALARM_M
AJOR
There are major alarm inputs. Major
RELAY_ALARM_M
INOR
There are minor alarm inputs. Minor
RMFA Loss of multiframe alignment at the remote end Minor
RPS_INDI Radio protection switching indication Major
RS_CROSSTR Regenerator section performance threshold-
crossing
Minor
RT_TBL_LACK Routing table resources are insufficient. Minor
RTC_FAIL The real-time clock (RTC) of the system control
board fails.
Major
S1_SYN_CHANGE Clock source switching in S1 mode Major
SCCDATA_BACKU
P_FAIL
Batch backup of SCC boards fails. Minor
SEC_RADIUS_FAIL RADIUS authentication fails. Major
SECU_ALM Security alarm Major
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
306
Alarm Name Description Alarm
Severity
SRV_SHUTDOWN_
LD
Ethernet services are interrupted. Warning
SSL_CERT_NOENC Certificate file of SSL is not encrypted Major
SUBNET_RT_CON-
FLICT
Subnetwork route conflict Major
SWDL_ACTIVATE
D_TIMEOUT
The commit operation is not performed during
software package loading.
Critical
SWDL_AUTOMAT
CH_INH
The automatic match function is disabled. Minor
SWDL_CHGMNG_
NOMATCH
The board software version and the version of the
running software are inconsistent.
Critical
SWDL_COMMIT_F
AIL
The submit operation fails. Minor
SWDL_INPROCESS The package diffusion is being performed on the
NE.
Warning
SWDL_NEPKGCHE
CK
Certain files in the package stored in flash
memory are lost.
Critical
SWDL_PKG_NOBD
SOFT
The software package does not contain any board
software.
Minor
SWDL_PKGVER_M
M
Software package version consistency check fails. Minor
SWDL_ROLLBACK
_FAIL
The version rollback on an NE fails. Minor
SYN_BAD Synchronous source degradation Minor
SYNC_C_LOS Loss of synchronization clock sources Warning
SYSLOG_COMM_F
AIL
The communication between the NE and the
syslog server fails.
Major
T_ALOS Loss of analog signals at 2 Mbit/s interfaces Major
T_LOC Loss of clock on the transmit line side Major
TEM_HA Too high laser temperature Major
TEM_LA Too low laser temperature Major
TEMP_ALARM Excessive board temperature Minor
TEMP_OVER Excessive board temperature Major
TF Laser transmission fails. Critical
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
307
Alarm Name Description Alarm
Severity
THUNDERALM Surge protection fails. Minor
TIME_LOCK_FAIL Time locking fails. Major
TIME_NO_TRACE_
MODE
The high precision time of the NE is in the non-
traced status.
Minor
TR_LOC Clock failure Major
TU_AIS TU alarm indication Major
TU_AIS_VC12 VC-12 path TU alarm indication Major
TU_AIS_VC3 TU of VC-3 level alarm indication Major
TU_LOP Loss of TU pointers Major
TU_LOP_VC12 Loss of TU pointers in VC-12 paths Major
TU_LOP_VC3 TU of VC-3 level loss of pointer Major
TUNNEL_APS_DE-
GRADED
The tunnel protection group degrades. Major
TUNNEL_APS_OUT
AGE
The tunnel protection group is unavailable Major
UHCS Uncorrectable cell errors Minor
UP_E1_AIS Alarm indication of 2 Mbit/s upstream signals Minor
USB_PROCESS_FAI
L
Data restoration from a USB flash drive fails Minor
V5_VCAIS Bits 5-7 in the V5 byte of a VC-12 path are set to
"1"s.
Major
VC_AIS Alarm indication signal of the VC connection Critical
VC_LOC Loss of VC continuity check Major
VC_RDI Remote defect indication of the VC connection Major
VCAT_LOA Excessive virtual concatenation delay Critical
VCAT_LOM_VC12 Loss of multiframe of VC-12 path virtual
concatenation
Major
VCAT_LOM_VC3 The virtually concatenated multiframes in a VC-3
path are lost.
Major
VCAT_SQM_VC12 SQ mismatch of VC-12 path virtual concatenation Major
VCAT_SQM_VC3 SQ mismatch of VC-3 path virtual concatenation Major
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
308
Alarm Name Description Alarm
Severity
VERSION_NOTSUP
PORT
The current version does not support the
configured function or data.
Critical
VOLT_LOS Loss of voltage Major
VP_AIS Alarm indication signal of the VP connection Critical
VP_LOC Loss of VP continuity check Major
VP_RDI Remote defect indication of the VP connection Major
W_R_FAIL Failure in reading and writing chip registers Major
WRG_BD_TYPE Error board types Major
XPIC_LOS Loss of XPIC compensation signals Critical

A.2 Alarm List (Classified by Logical Boards)
This part lists the alarms that are reported by each board.
NOTE
The NE software consider a physical board as one or more logical boards when managing the physical board.
The NMS also considers a physical board as one or more logical boards when managing the physical board.
Table A-2 shows the logical boards corresponding to all physical boards
Table A-2 Mappings between the physical boards and logical boards
Physical
Board
Logical Board
CST CST in the same slot
CSH CSH in the same slot
CSHU CSHU in the same slot
CSHUA CSHUA in the same slot
AUX AUX in the same slot
IF1 IF1 in the same slot
IFU2 IFU2 in the same slot
IFX2 IFX2 in the same slot
ISU2 ISU2 in the same slot
ISX2 ISX2 in the same slot
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
309
Physical
Board
Logical Board
ISV3 ISV3 in the same slot
SL1D SL1D in the same slot
SL1DA SL1DA in the same slot
EM6T EM6T in the same slot
EM6TA EM6TA in the same slot
EM6F EM6F in the same slot
EM6FA EM6FA in the same slot
EG4 EG4 in the same slot
EG4P EG4P in the same slot
EFP8 EFP8 in the same slot
EMS6 EMS6 in the same slot
SP3S SP3S in the same slot
SP3D SP3D in the same slot
ML1 ML1 in the same slot
MD1 MD1 in the same slot
CQ1 CQ1 in the same slot
PIU PIU in the same slot
FAN FAN in the same slot
ODU ODU in the slot whose number is 20 plus the slot number for the IF board
that is connected to the ODU

A.2.1 AUX
l BD_STATUS
l HARD_BAD
l RELAY_ALARM_CRITICAL
l RELAY_ALARM_IGNORE
l RELAY_ALARM_MAJOR
l RELAY_ALARM_MINOR
l WRG_BD_TYPE

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
310
A.2.2 CQ1
l ALM_E1RAI
l AU_AIS
l AU_LOP
l B1_EXC
l B1_SD
l B2_EXC
l B2_SD
l B3_EXC
l B3_SD
l BD_STATUS
l BIP_EXC
l BIP_SD
l BUS_ERR
l CES_JTROVR_EXC
l CES_JTRUDR_EXC
l CES_LOSPKT_EXC
l CES_MALPKT_EXC
l CES_MISORDERPK
T_EXC
l CES_RDI
l CES_STRAYPKT_E
XC
l CESPW_OPPOSITE_
ACFAULT
l CESPW_OPPOSITE_
RAI
l HARD_BAD
l HP_RDI
l HP_REI
l HP_SLM
l HP_TIM
l HP_UNEQ
l IN_PWR_ABN
l IN_PWR_HIGH
l IN_PWR_LOW
l J0_MM
l LASER_MOD_ERR
l LASER_SHUT
l LFA
l LMFA
l LOOP_ALM
l LP_RDI_VC12
l LP_REI_VC12
l LP_RFI
l LP_SLM_VC12
l LP_TIM_VC12
l LP_UNEQ_VC12
l LSR_BCM_ALM
l LSR_NO_FITED
l LSR_WILL_DIE
l MP_DELAY
l MP_DOWN
l MS_AIS
l MS_RDI
l MS_REI
l OUT_PWR_ABN
l POWER_ABNORM
AL
l PPP_LCP_FAIL
l PPP_NCP_FAIL
l R_LOC
l R_LOF
l R_LOS
l R_OOF
l TEM_HA
l TEM_LA
l TEMP_OVER
l TF
l TR_LOC
l TU_AIS_VC12
l TU_LOP_VC12
l UP_E1_AIS
l V5_VCAIS
l WRG_BD_TYPE

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
311
A.2.3 CSH
l ACR_LOCK_FAIL
l APS_FAIL
l APS_INDI
l APS_MANUAL_ST
OP
l BD_NOT_INSTALL
ED
l BD_STATUS
l BIOS_STATUS
l BOOTROM_BAD
l CES_APS_INDI
l CES_APS_MANUAL
_STOP
l CES_K1_K2_M
l CES_K2_M
l CFCARD_FAILED
l CFCARD_OFFLINE
l CLK_LOCK_FAIL
l CLK_NO_TRACE_
MODE
l COM_EXTECC_FUL
L
l COMMUN_FAIL
l DBMS_DELETE
l DBMS_ERROR
l DBMS_PROTECT_
MODE
l DCNSIZE_OVER
l ELAN_SMAC_FLAP
PING
l ETH_APS_LOST
l ETH_APS_PATH_M
ISMATCH
l ETH_APS_SWITCH
_FAIL
l ETH_APS_TYPE_MI
SMATCH
l ETH_NO_FLOW
l EXT_SYNC_LOS
l HARD_NONSUPPO
RT
l K1_K2_M
l K2_M
l LAG_BWMM
l LAN_LOC
l LCS_LIMITED
l LICENSE_LOST
l LPS_UNI_BI_M
l LPT_CFG_CLOSE-
PORT
l LTI
l MOD_COM_FAIL
l MPLS_PW_AIS
l MPLS_PW_BDI
l MPLS_PW_CSF
l MPLS_PW_Excess
l MPLS_PW_LCK
l MPLS_PW_LOCK
l MPLS_PW_LOCV
l MPLS_PW_MISMA
TCH
l MPLS_PW_MISMER
GE
l MPLS_PW_OAMFAI
L
l MPLS_PW_RDI
l MPLS_PW_SD
l MPLS_PW_SF
l MPLS_PW_UNEXP
MEG
l MPLS_PW_UNEXP
MEP
l MPLS_PW_UNEXPP
ER
l MPLS_PW_UNKNO
WN
l MPLS_TUNNEL_AI
S
l MPLS_TUNNEL_LO
CV
l MPLS_TUNNEL_MI
SMATCH
l MPLS_TUNNEL_MI
SMERGE
l MPLS_TUNNEL_OA
MFAIL
l MPLS_TUNNEL_RD
I
l MPLS_TUNNEL_SD
l MPLS_TUNNEL_SF
l MPLS_TUNNEL_UN
EXPMEG
l MPLS_TUNNEL_UN
EXPMEP
l MPLS_TUNNEL_UN
EXPPER
l MPLS_TUNNEL_UN
KNOWN
l NEIP_CONFUSION
l NESF_LOST
l NESOFT_MM
l NP1_MANUAL_STO
P
l NP1_SW_FAIL
l NP1_SW_INDI
l NTP_SYNC_FAIL
l PASSWORD_NEED
_CHANGE
l PATCH_ACT_TIME-
OUT
l PATCH_DEACT_TI
MEOUT
l PATCH_PKGERR
l PG_LINK_FAIL
l PG_PRT_DEGRADE
D
l PLA_CFG_MISMAT
CH
l PWAPS_SWITCH_F
AIL
l PWAPS_TYPE_MIS-
MATCH
l PW_APS_DEGRAD
ED
l PW_APS_OUTAGE
l RPS_INDI
l RTC_FAIL
l S1_SYN_CHANGE
l SCCDATA_BACKU
P_FAIL
l SEC_RADIUS_FAIL
l SECU_ALM
l SRV_SHUTDOWN_
LD
l SSL_CERT_NOENC
l STORM_CUR_QUE
NUM_OVER
l SUBNET_RT_CON-
FLICT
l SWDL_ACTIVATED
_TIMEOUT
l SWDL_AUTOMATC
H_INH
l SWDL_CHGMNG_N
OMATCH
l SWDL_COMMIT_F
AIL
l SWDL_INPROCESS
l SWDL_NEPKGCHE
CK
l SWDL_PKG_NOBD-
SOFT
l SWDL_PKGVER_M
M
l SWDL_ROLLBACK
_FAIL
l SYN_BAD
l SYNC_C_LOS
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
312
l EXT_TIME_LOC
l FDBSIZEALM_ELA
N
l FLOW_OVER
l HARD_BAD
l MPLS_TUNNEL_BD
I
l MPLS_TUNNEL_Ex-
cess
l MPLS_TUNNEL_FD
I
l MPLS_TUNNEL_LO
CK
l PORT_EXC_TRAFFI
C
l POWER_ALM
l PTP_SOURCE_SWI
TCH
l PTP_TIMESTAMP_
ABN
l PW_DROPPKT_EXC
l PW_NO_TRAFFIC
l PWAPS_LOST
l PWAPS_PATH_MIS-
MATCH
l SYSLOG_COMM_F
AIL
l TEMP_ALARM
l TIME_LOCK_FAIL
l TIME_NO_TRACE_
MODE
l TUNNEL_APS_DE-
GRADED
l TUNNEL_APS_OUT
AGE
l WRG_BD_TYPE

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
313
A.2.4 CSHU/CSHUA
l ACR_LOCK_FAIL
l APS_FAIL
l APS_INDI
l APS_MANUAL_ST
OP
l BD_NOT_INSTALL
ED
l BD_STATUS
l BGPBACKTRANSI-
TION
l BIOS_STATUS
l BOOTROM_BAD
l CES_APS_INDI
l CES_APS_MANUAL
_STOP
l CES_K1_K2_M
l CES_K2_M
l CLK_LOCK_FAIL
l CLK_NO_TRACE_
MODE
l COM_EXTECC_FUL
L
l COMMUN_FAIL
l DBMS_DELETE
l DBMS_ERROR
l DBMS_PROTECT_
MODE
l DCNSIZE_OVER
l ELAN_SMAC_FLAP
PING
l ETH_APS_LOST
l ETH_APS_PATH_M
ISMATCH
l ETH_APS_SWITCH
_FAIL
l ETH_APS_TYPE_MI
SMATCH
l ETH_NO_FLOW
l EXT_SYNC_LOS
l EXT_TIME_LOC
l LICENSE_LOST
l LPS_UNI_BI_M
l LPT_CFG_CLOSE-
PORT
l LTI
l MAC_EXT_EXC
l MAC_FCS_EXC
l MPLS_PW_AIS
l MPLS_PW_BDI
l MPLS_PW_CSF
l MPLS_PW_Excess
l MPLS_PW_LCK
l MPLS_PW_LOCK
l MPLS_PW_LOCV
l MPLS_PW_MISMA
TCH
l MPLS_PW_MISMER
GE
l MPLS_PW_OAMFAI
L
l MPLS_PW_RDI
l MPLS_PW_SD
l MPLS_PW_SF
l MPLS_PW_UNEXP
MEG
l MPLS_PW_UNEXP
MEP
l MPLS_PW_UNEXPP
ER
l MPLS_PW_UNKNO
WN
l MPLS_TUNNEL_AI
S
l MPLS_TUNNEL_BD
I
l MPLS_TUNNEL_Ex-
cess
l MPLS_TUNNEL_FD
I
l MPLS_TUNNEL_LO
CK
l OSPFNBRSTATE-
CHANGE
l PASSWORD_NEED
_CHANGE
l PATCH_BD_EXCLU
DE
l PATCH_BD_MATC
H_FAIL
l PATCH_CHGSCC_N
OTMATCH
l PATCH_PKGERR
l PG_LINK_FAIL
l PG_PRT_DEGRADE
D
l PLA_CFG_MISMAT
CH
l PLA_DOWN
l PLA_MEMBER_DO
WN
l PORT_EXC_TRAFFI
C
l POWER_ALM
l PTP_SOURCE_SWI
TCH
l PTP_TIMESTAMP_
ABN
l PW_APS_DEGRAD
ED
l PW_APS_OUTAGE
l PW_DOWN
l PW_DROPPKT_EXC
l PW_NO_TRAFFIC
l PWAPS_LOST
l PWAPS_PATH_MIS-
MATCH
l PWAPS_SWITCH_F
AIL
l PWAPS_TYPE_MIS-
MATCH
l RPS_INDI
l RT_TBL_LACK
l TEMP_ALARM
l TIME_LOCK_FAIL
l TIME_NO_TRACE_
MODE
l TUNNEL_APS_DE-
GRADED
l TUNNEL_APS_OUT
AGE
l USB_PROCESS_FAI
L
l VERSION_NOTSUP-
PORT
l WRG_BD_TYPE
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
314
l FDBSIZEALM_ELA
N
l FLOW_OVER
l GSP_RSVP_NB_AU
TH_ERR
l GSP_RSVP_NB_DO
WN
l GSP_TNNL_DOWN
l HARD_BAD
l HARD_NONSUPPO
RT
l IPFPM_INST_TLP_E
RR
l ISISADJACENCY-
CHANGE
l K1_K2_M
l K2_M
l L3V_TRAP_THRE_
EXCEED
l L3V_TRAP_VRF_D
OWN
l LAG_BWMM
l LAN_LOC
l LCS_LIMITED
l LDP_PEER_DOWN
l MPLS_TUNNEL_LO
CV
l MPLS_TUNNEL_MI
SMATCH
l MPLS_TUNNEL_MI
SMERGE
l MPLS_TUNNEL_OA
MFAIL
l MPLS_TUNNEL_RD
I
l MPLS_TUNNEL_SD
l MPLS_TUNNEL_SF
l MPLS_TUNNEL_UN
EXPMEG
l MPLS_TUNNEL_UN
EXPMEP
l MPLS_TUNNEL_UN
EXPPER
l MPLS_TUNNEL_UN
KNOWN
l NEIP_CONFUSION
l NESF_LOST
l NESOFT_MM
l NP1_MANUAL_STO
P
l NP1_SW_FAIL
l NP1_SW_INDI
l NTP_SYNC_FAIL
l RTC_FAIL
l S1_SYN_CHANGE
l SCCDATA_BACKU
P_FAIL
l SEC_RADIUS_FAIL
l SECU_ALM
l SRV_SHUTDOWN_
LD
l SSL_CERT_NOENC
l SWDL_ACTIVATED
_TIMEOUT
l SWDL_AUTOMATC
H_INH
l SWDL_CHGMNG_N
OMATCH
l SWDL_COMMIT_F
AIL
l SWDL_INPROCESS
l SWDL_NEPKGCHE
CK
l SWDL_PKG_NOBD-
SOFT
l SWDL_PKGVER_M
M
l SWDL_ROLLBACK
_FAIL
l SYN_BAD
l SYNC_C_LOS
l SYSLOG_COMM_F
AIL

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
315
A.2.5 CST
l APS_FAIL
l APS_INDI
l APS_MANUAL_ST
OP
l BD_NOT_INSTALL
ED
l BD_STATUS
l BIOS_STATUS
l BOOTROM_BAD
l CFCARD_FAILED
l CFCARD_OFFLINE
l CLK_LOCK_FAIL
l CLK_NO_TRACE_
MODE
l COM_EXTECC_FUL
L
l COMMUN_FAIL
l DBMS_DELETE
l DBMS_ERROR
l DBMS_PROTECT_
MODE
l DCNSIZE_OVER
l EXT_SYNC_LOS
l HARD_BAD
l K1_K2_M
l K2_M
l LAN_LOC
l LCS_LIMITED
l LICENSE_LOST
l LPS_UNI_BI_M
l LTI
l NEIP_CONFUSION
l NESF_LOST
l NESOFT_MM
l NP1_MANUAL_STO
P
l NP1_SW_FAIL
l NP1_SW_INDI
l NTP_SYNC_FAIL
l PASSWORD_NEED
_CHANGE
l PATCH_BD_EXCLU
DE
l PATCH_BD_MATC
H_FAIL
l PATCH_CHGSCC_N
OTMATCH
l PATCH_PKGERR
l PG_LINK_FAIL
l PG_PRT_DEGRADE
D
l PLA_CFG_MISMAT
CH
l POWER_ALM
l RPS_INDI
l RTC_FAIL
l S1_SYN_CHANGE
l SCCDATA_BACKU
P_FAIL
l SEC_RADIUS_FAIL
l SECU_ALM
l SSL_CERT_NOENC
l STORM_CUR_QUE
NUM_OVER
l SUBNET_RT_CON-
FLICT
l SWDL_ACTIVATED
_TIMEOUT
l SWDL_AUTOMATC
H_INH
l SWDL_CHGMNG_N
OMATCH
l SWDL_COMMIT_F
AIL
l SWDL_INPROCESS
l SWDL_NEPKGCHE
CK
l SWDL_PKG_NOBD-
SOFT
l SWDL_PKGVER_M
M
l SWDL_ROLLBACK
_FAIL
l SYN_BAD
l SYNC_C_LOS
l SYSLOG_COMM_F
AIL
l TEMP_ALARM
l WRG_BD_TYPE

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
316
A.2.6 EFP8
l ALM_GFP_dCSF
l ALM_GFP_dLFD
l BD_STATUS
l BIP_EXC
l BIP_SD
l COMMUN_FAIL
l DOWN_E1_AIS
l ETH_CFM_AIS
l ETH_CFM_LOC
l ETH_CFM_MISMER
GE
l ETH_CFM_RDI
l ETH_CFM_UNEXPE
RI
l ETH_LOS
l ETHOAM_DISCOV
ER_FAIL
l ETHOAM_RMT_CR
IT_FAULT
l ETHOAM_RMT_LO
OP
l ETHOAM_RMT_SD
l ETHOAM_SELF_LO
OP
l ETHOAM_VCG_SE
LF_LOOP
l EX_ETHOAM_CC_L
OS
l EX_ETHOAM_MPI
D_CNFLCT
l FCS_ERR
l FLOW_OVER
l HARD_BAD
l LAG_PORT_FAIL
l LAG_VC_PORT_FA
IL
l LCAS_FOPR
l LCAS_FOPT
l LCAS_PLCR
l LCAS_PLCT
l LCAS_TLCR
l LCAS_TLCT
l LFA
l LMFA
l LOOP_ALM
l LP_RDI_VC12
l LP_REI_VC12
l LP_SLM_VC12
l LP_TIM_VC12
l LP_UNEQ_VC12
l LPT_RFI
l NO_BD_SOFT
l RMFA
l TEMP_ALARM
l TU_AIS_VC12
l TU_LOP_VC12
l VCAT_LOA
l VCAT_LOM_VC12
l VCAT_SQM_VC12
l W_R_FAIL
l WRG_BD_TYPE

A.2.7 EG4
l BD_STATUS
l BUS_ERR
l DROPRATIO_OVER
l ERPS_IN_PROTEC-
TION
l ETH_AUTO_LINK_
DOWN
l ETH_CFM_AIS
l ETH_CFM_LOC
l ETH_CFM_MISMER
GE
l ETH_CFM_RDI
l ETH_CFM_UNEXPE
RI
l ETH_EFM_DF
l ETH_EFM_EVENT
l ETH_EFM_LOOPBA
CK
l ETH_EFM_REMFA
ULT
l ETH_LOS
l ETH_NO_FLOW
l ETHOAM_SELF_LO
OP
l FLOW_OVER
l HARD_BAD
l IN_PWR_ABN
l LAG_DOWN
l LAG_MEMBER_DO
WN
l LASER_MOD_ERR
l LASER_SHUT
l LOOP_ALM
l LPT_CFG_CLOSE-
PORT
l LSR_NO_FITED
l LSR_WILL_DIE
l MAC_EXT_EXC
l MAC_FCS_EXC
l MAC_FCS_SD
l MULTI_RPL_OWNE
R
l OUT_PWR_ABN
l PORT_EXC_TRAFFI
C
l PORTMODE_MIS-
MATCH
l TEMP_ALARM
l TF
l WRG_BD_TYPE

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
317
A.2.8 EG4P
l BD_STATUS
l BUS_ERR
l DROPRATIO_OVER
l ERPS_IN_PROTEC-
TION
l ETH_AUTO_LINK_
DOWN
l ETH_CFM_AIS
l ETH_CFM_LOC
l ETH_CFM_MISMER
GE
l ETH_CFM_RDI
l ETH_CFM_UNEXPE
RI
l ETH_EFM_DF
l ETH_EFM_EVENT
l ETH_EFM_LOOPBA
CK
l ETH_EFM_REMFA
ULT
l ETH_LOS
l ETH_NO_FLOW
l ETH_PWR_SUPPLY
_FAIL
l ETHOAM_SELF_LO
OP
l FLOW_OVER
l HARD_BAD
l IN_PWR_ABN
l LAG_DOWN
l LAG_MEMBER_DO
WN
l LASER_MOD_ERR
l LASER_SHUT
l LOOP_ALM
l LPT_CFG_CLOSE-
PORT
l LSR_NO_FITED
l LSR_WILL_DIE
l MAC_EXT_EXC
l MAC_FCS_EXC
l MAC_FCS_SD
l MULTI_RPL_OWNE
R
l OUT_PWR_ABN
l PORT_EXC_TRAFFI
C
l PORTMODE_MIS-
MATCH
l TEMP_ALARM
l TF
l WRG_BD_TYPE

A.2.9 EM6T
l BD_STATUS
l BUS_ERR
l COMMUN_FAIL
l DROPRATIO_OVER
l ERPS_IN_PROTEC-
TION
l ETH_AUTO_LINK_
DOWN
l ETH_CFM_AIS
l ETH_CFM_LOC
l ETH_CFM_MISMER
GE
l ETH_CFM_RDI
l ETH_CFM_UNEXPE
RI
l ETH_EFM_DF
l ETH_EFM_EVENT
l ETH_EFM_LOOPBA
CK
l ETH_EFM_REMFA
ULT
l ETH_LOS
l ETH_NO_FLOW
l ETHOAM_SELF_LO
OP
l FLOW_OVER
l HARD_BAD
l LAG_DOWN
l LAG_MEMBER_DO
WN
l LOOP_ALM
l LPT_CFG_CLOSE-
PORT
l MAC_EXT_EXC
l MAC_FCS_EXC
l MAC_FCS_SD
l MULTI_RPL_OWNE
R
l PORT_EXC_TRAFFI
C
l PORTMODE_MIS-
MATCH
l TEMP_ALARM
l WRG_BD_TYPE

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
318
A.2.10 EM6TA
l BD_STATUS
l BUS_ERR
l COMMUN_FAIL
l DROPRATIO_OVER
l ERPS_IN_PROTEC-
TION
l ETH_AUTO_LINK_
DOWN
l ETH_CFM_AIS
l ETH_CFM_LOC
l ETH_CFM_MISMER
GE
l ETH_CFM_RDI
l ETH_CFM_UNEXPE
RI
l ETH_EFM_DF
l ETH_EFM_EVENT
l ETH_EFM_LOOPBA
CK
l ETH_EFM_REMFA
ULT
l ETH_LOS
l ETH_NO_FLOW
l ETHOAM_SELF_LO
OP
l FLOW_OVER
l HARD_BAD
l LAG_DOWN
l LAG_MEMBER_DO
WN
l LOOP_ALM
l LPT_CFG_CLOSE-
PORT
l MAC_EXT_EXC
l MAC_FCS_EXC
l MAC_FCS_SD
l MULTI_RPL_OWNE
R
l PORT_EXC_TRAFFI
C
l PORTMODE_MIS-
MATCH
l TEMP_ALARM
l WRG_BD_TYPE

A.2.11 EM6F
l BD_STATUS
l BUS_ERR
l COMMUN_FAIL
l DROPRATIO_OVER
l ERPS_IN_PROTEC-
TION
l ETH_AUTO_LINK_
DOWN
l ETH_CFM_AIS
l ETH_CFM_LOC
l ETH_CFM_MISMER
GE
l ETH_CFM_RDI
l ETH_CFM_UNEXPE
RI
l ETH_EFM_DF
l ETH_EFM_EVENT
l ETH_EFM_LOOPBA
CK
l ETH_EFM_REMFA
ULT
l ETH_LOS
l ETH_NO_FLOW
l ETHOAM_SELF_LO
OP
l FLOW_OVER
l HARD_BAD
l IN_PWR_ABN
l LAG_DOWN
l LAG_MEMBER_DO
WN
l LASER_MOD_ERR
l LASER_SHUT
l LOOP_ALM
l LPT_CFG_CLOSE-
PORT
l LSR_NO_FITED
l LSR_WILL_DIE
l MAC_EXT_EXC
l MAC_FCS_EXC
l MAC_FCS_SD
l MULTI_RPL_OWNE
R
l OUT_PWR_ABN
l PORT_EXC_TRAFFI
C
l PORTMODE_MIS-
MATCH
l TEMP_ALARM
l TF
l WRG_BD_TYPE

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
319
A.2.12 EM6FA
l BD_STATUS
l BUS_ERR
l COMMUN_FAIL
l DROPRATIO_OVER
l ERPS_IN_PROTEC-
TION
l ETH_AUTO_LINK_
DOWN
l ETH_CFM_AIS
l ETH_CFM_LOC
l ETH_CFM_MISMER
GE
l ETH_CFM_RDI
l ETH_CFM_UNEXPE
RI
l ETH_EFM_DF
l ETH_EFM_EVENT
l ETH_EFM_LOOPBA
CK
l ETH_EFM_REMFA
ULT
l ETH_LOS
l ETH_NO_FLOW
l ETHOAM_SELF_LO
OP
l FLOW_OVER
l HARD_BAD
l IN_PWR_ABN
l LAG_DOWN
l LAG_MEMBER_DO
WN
l LASER_MOD_ERR
l LASER_SHUT
l LOOP_ALM
l LPT_CFG_CLOSE-
PORT
l LSR_NO_FITED
l LSR_WILL_DIE
l MAC_EXT_EXC
l MAC_FCS_EXC
l MAC_FCS_SD
l MULTI_RPL_OWNE
R
l OUT_PWR_ABN
l PORT_EXC_TRAFFI
C
l PORTMODE_MIS-
MATCH
l TEMP_ALARM
l TF
l WRG_BD_TYPE

A.2.13 EMS6
l ALM_GFP_dCSF
l ALM_GFP_dLFD
l B3_EXC_VC3
l B3_SD_VC3
l BD_STATUS
l BIP_EXC
l BIP_SD
l BUS_ERR
l COMMUN_FAIL
l ETH_CFM_LOC
l ETH_CFM_MISMER
GE
l ETH_CFM_RDI
l ETH_CFM_UNEXPE
RI
l ETH_LOS
l ETHOAM_DISCOV
ER_FAIL
l ETHOAM_RMT_CR
IT_FAULT
l ETHOAM_RMT_LO
OP
l ETHOAM_RMT_SD
l ETHOAM_SELF_LO
OP
l EX_ETHOAM_CC_L
OS
l EX_ETHOAM_MPI
D_CNFLCT
l FCS_ERR
l FLOW_OVER
l HARD_BAD
l IN_PWR_ABN
l LAG_PORT_FAIL
l LAG_VC_PORT_FA
IL
l LCAS_FOPR
l LCAS_FOPT
l LCAS_PLCR
l LCAS_PLCT
l LCAS_TLCR
l LCAS_TLCT
l LINK_ERR
l LOOP_ALM
l LP_RDI_VC12
l LP_RDI_VC3
l LP_REI_VC12
l LP_REI_VC3
l LP_SLM_VC12
l LP_SLM_VC3
l LP_TIM_VC12
l LP_TIM_VC3
l LP_UNEQ_VC12
l LP_UNEQ_VC3
l LPT_INEFFECT
l LPT_RFI
l MOD_TYPE_MIS-
MATCH
l MULTI_RPL_OWNE
R
l NO_BD_SOFT
l OUT_PWR_ABN
l PORT_MODULE_O
FFLINE
l TEMP_ALARM
l TU_AIS_VC12
l TU_AIS_VC3
l TU_LOP_VC12
l TU_LOP_VC3
l VCAT_LOA
l VCAT_LOM_VC12
l VCAT_LOM_VC3
l VCAT_SQM_VC12
l VCAT_SQM_VC3
l WRG_BD_TYPE

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
320
A.2.14 FAN
l BD_STATUS
l FAN_AGING
l FAN_FAIL
l POWER_ALM
l WRG_BD_TYPE

A.2.15 IF1
l AU_AIS
l AU_LOP
l B1_EXC
l B1_SD
l B2_EXC
l B2_SD
l B3_EXC
l B3_SD
l BD_STATUS
l HARD_BAD
l HP_CROSSTR
l HP_LOM
l HP_RDI
l HP_REI
l HP_SLM
l HP_TIM
l HP_UNEQ
l IF_CABLE_OPEN
l IF_MODE_UNSUP-
PORTED
l LCS_LIMITED
l LICENSE_LOST
l LOOP_ALM
l MS_AIS
l MS_CROSSTR
l MS_RDI
l MS_REI
l MSAD_CROSSTR
l MW_CONT_WAVE
l MW_FEC_UNCOR
l MW_LIM
l MW_LOF
l MW_RDI
l R_LOC
l R_LOF
l R_LOS
l RS_CROSSTR
l T_LOC
l TEMP_ALARM
l VOLT_LOS
l WRG_BD_TYPE

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
321
A.2.16 IFU2
l AM_DOWNSHIFT
l BD_STATUS
l BIP_EXC
l BIP_SD
l DROPRATIO_OVER
l ERPS_IN_PROTEC-
TION
l ETH_CFM_AIS
l ETH_CFM_LOC
l ETH_CFM_MISMER
GE
l ETH_CFM_RDI
l ETH_CFM_UNEXPE
RI
l ETH_EFM_DF
l ETH_EFM_EVENT
l ETH_EFM_LOOPBA
CK
l ETH_EFM_REMFA
ULT
l ETHOAM_SELF_LO
OP
l FLOW_OVER
l HARD_BAD
l IF_CABLE_OPEN
l LAG_BWMM
l LAG_DOWN
l LAG_MEMBER_DO
WN
l LCS_LIMITED
l LICENSE_LOST
l LOOP_ALM
l LP_RDI
l LP_REI
l LP_UNEQ
l MAC_EXT_EXC
l MAC_FCS_EXC
l MULTI_RPL_OWNE
R
l MW_BER_EXC
l MW_BER_SD
l MW_CFG_MISMAT
CH
l MW_CONT_WAVE
l MW_E1_LOST
l MW_FEC_UNCOR
l MW_LIM
l MW_LOF
l MW_RDI
l PORT_EXC_TRAFFI
C
l R_LOC
l R_LOF
l TEMP_ALARM
l TU_AIS
l TU_LOP
l VOLT_LOS
l WRG_BD_TYPE

A.2.17 IFX2
l AM_DOWNSHIFT
l BD_STATUS
l BIP_EXC
l BIP_SD
l DROPRATIO_OVER
l ERPS_IN_PROTEC-
TION
l ETH_CFM_AIS
l ETH_CFM_LOC
l ETH_CFM_MISMER
GE
l ETH_CFM_RDI
l ETH_CFM_UNEXPE
RI
l ETH_EFM_DF
l ETH_EFM_EVENT
l ETH_EFM_LOOPBA
CK
l ETH_EFM_REMFA
ULT
l ETHOAM_SELF_LO
OP
l FLOW_OVER
l HARD_BAD
l IF_CABLE_OPEN
l LAG_BWMM
l LAG_DOWN
l LAG_MEMBER_DO
WN
l LCS_LIMITED
l LICENSE_LOST
l LOOP_ALM
l LP_RDI
l LP_REI
l LP_UNEQ
l MAC_EXT_EXC
l MAC_FCS_EXC
l MULTI_RPL_OWNE
R
l MW_BER_EXC
l MW_BER_SD
l MW_CFG_MISMAT
CH
l MW_CONT_WAVE
l MW_E1_LOST
l MW_FEC_UNCOR
l MW_LIM
l MW_LOF
l MW_RDI
l PORT_EXC_TRAFFI
C
l R_LOC
l R_LOF
l TEMP_ALARM
l TU_AIS
l TU_LOP
l VOLT_LOS
l WRG_BD_TYPE
l XPIC_LOS

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
322
A.2.18 ISU2
l AM_DOWNSHIFT
l AU_AIS
l AU_LOP
l B1_EXC
l B1_SD
l B2_EXC
l B2_SD
l B3_EXC
l B3_SD
l BD_STATUS
l BIP_EXC
l BIP_SD
l DROPRATIO_OVER
l ERPS_IN_PROTEC-
TION
l ETH_CFM_AIS
l ETH_CFM_LOC
l ETH_CFM_MISMER
GE
l ETH_CFM_RDI
l ETH_CFM_UNEXPE
RI
l ETH_EFM_DF
l ETH_EFM_EVENT
l ETH_EFM_LOOPBA
CK
l ETH_EFM_REMFA
ULT
l ETHOAM_SELF_LO
OP
l FLOW_OVER
l HARD_BAD
l HP_CROSSTR
l HP_LOM
l HP_RDI
l HP_REI
l HP_SLM
l HP_TIM
l HP_UNEQ
l IF_CABLE_OPEN
l LAG_BWMM
l LAG_DOWN
l LAG_MEMBER_DO
WN
l LCS_LIMITED
l LICENSE_LOST
l LOOP_ALM
l LP_RDI
l LP_REI
l LP_UNEQ
l MAC_EXT_EXC
l MAC_FCS_EXC
l MS_AIS
l MS_CROSSTR
l MS_RDI
l MS_REI
l MSAD_CROSSTR
l MULTI_RPL_OWNE
R
l MW_AM_TEST
l MW_BER_EXC
l MW_BER_SD
l MW_CFG_MISMAT
CH
l MW_CONT_WAVE
l MW_E1_LOST
l MW_FEC_UNCOR
l MW_LIM
l MW_LOF
l MW_RDI
l PORT_EXC_TRAFFI
C
l R_LOC
l R_LOF
l RS_CROSSTR
l T_LOC
l TEMP_ALARM
l TU_AIS
l TU_LOP
l VOLT_LOS
l WRG_BD_TYPE

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
323
A.2.19 ISV3
l AM_DOWNSHIFT
l AU_AIS
l AU_LOP
l B1_EXC
l B1_SD
l B2_EXC
l B2_SD
l B3_EXC
l B3_SD
l BD_STATUS
l BIP_EXC
l BIP_SD
l DROPRATIO_OVER
l ERPS_IN_PROTEC-
TION
l ETH_CFM_AIS
l ETH_CFM_LOC
l ETH_CFM_MISMER
GE
l ETH_CFM_RDI
l ETH_CFM_UNEXPE
RI
l ETH_EFM_DF
l ETH_EFM_EVENT
l ETH_EFM_LOOPBA
CK
l ETH_EFM_REMFA
ULT
l ETHOAM_SELF_LO
OP
l FLOW_OVER
l HARD_BAD
l HP_CROSSTR
l HP_LOM
l HP_RDI
l HP_REI
l HP_SLM
l HP_TIM
l HP_UNEQ
l IF_CABLE_OPEN
l LAG_BWMM
l LAG_DOWN
l LAG_MEMBER_DO
WN
l LCS_LIMITED
l LICENSE_LOST
l LOOP_ALM
l LP_RDI
l LP_REI
l LP_UNEQ
l MAC_EXT_EXC
l MAC_FCS_EXC
l MS_AIS
l MS_CROSSTR
l MS_RDI
l MS_REI
l MSAD_CROSSTR
l MULTI_RPL_OWNE
R
l MW_AM_TEST
l MW_BER_EXC
l MW_BER_SD
l MW_CFG_MISMAT
CH
l MW_CONT_WAVE
l MW_E1_LOST
l MW_FEC_UNCOR
l MW_LIM
l MW_LOF
l MW_RDI
l PORT_EXC_TRAFFI
C
l R_LOC
l R_LOF
l RS_CROSSTR
l T_LOC
l TEMP_ALARM
l TU_AIS
l TU_LOP
l VOLT_LOS
l WRG_BD_TYPE
l XPIC_LOS

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
324
A.2.20 ISX2
l AM_DOWNSHIFT
l AU_AIS
l AU_LOP
l B1_EXC
l B1_SD
l B2_EXC
l B2_SD
l B3_EXC
l B3_SD
l BD_STATUS
l BIP_EXC
l BIP_SD
l DROPRATIO_OVER
l ERPS_IN_PROTEC-
TION
l ETH_CFM_AIS
l ETH_CFM_LOC
l ETH_CFM_MISMER
GE
l ETH_CFM_RDI
l ETH_CFM_UNEXPE
RI
l ETH_EFM_DF
l ETH_EFM_EVENT
l ETH_EFM_LOOPBA
CK
l ETH_EFM_REMFA
ULT
l ETHOAM_SELF_LO
OP
l FLOW_OVER
l HARD_BAD
l HP_CROSSTR
l HP_LOM
l HP_RDI
l HP_REI
l HP_SLM
l HP_TIM
l HP_UNEQ
l IF_CABLE_OPEN
l LAG_BWMM
l LAG_DOWN
l LAG_MEMBER_DO
WN
l LCS_LIMITED
l LICENSE_LOST
l LOOP_ALM
l LP_RDI
l LP_REI
l LP_UNEQ
l MAC_EXT_EXC
l MAC_FCS_EXC
l MS_AIS
l MS_CROSSTR
l MS_RDI
l MS_REI
l MSAD_CROSSTR
l MULTI_RPL_OWNE
R
l MW_AM_TEST
l MW_BER_EXC
l MW_BER_SD
l MW_CFG_MISMAT
CH
l MW_CONT_WAVE
l MW_E1_LOST
l MW_FEC_UNCOR
l MW_LIM
l MW_LOF
l MW_RDI
l PORT_EXC_TRAFFI
C
l R_LOC
l R_LOF
l RS_CROSSTR
l T_LOC
l TEMP_ALARM
l TU_AIS
l TU_LOP
l VOLT_LOS
l WRG_BD_TYPE
l XPIC_LOS

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
325
A.2.21 ML1/MD1
l ALM_E1RAI
l ALM_IMA_LIF
l ALM_IMA_LODS
l ALM_IMA_RE_RX_
UNUSABLE
l ALM_IMA_RE_TX_
UNUSABLE
l ALM_IMA_RFI
l ATMPW_UNKNOW
NCELL_EXC
l BD_STATUS
l BUS_ERR
l CES_ACR_LOCK_A
BN
l CES_JTROVR_EXC
l CES_JTRUDR_EXC
l CES_LOSPKT_EXC
l CES_MALPKT_EXC
l CES_MISORDERPK
T_EXC
l CES_RDI
l CES_STRAYPKT_E
XC
l CESPW_OPPOSITE_
ACFAULT
l CESPW_OPPOSITE_
RAI
l CHCS
l HARD_BAD
l IMA_GROUP_LE_D
OWN
l IMA_GROUP_RE_D
OWN
l IMA_TXCLK_MIS-
MATCH
l LCD
l LFA
l LMFA
l LOOP_ALM
l MP_DELAY
l MP_DOWN
l OCD
l POWER_ABNORM
AL
l PPP_LCP_FAIL
l PPP_NCP_FAIL
l T_ALOS
l TEMP_ALARM
l TR_LOC
l UHCS
l UP_E1_AIS
l VC_AIS
l VC_LOC
l VC_RDI
l VP_AIS
l VP_LOC
l VP_RDI
l WRG_BD_TYPE

A.2.22 ODU
l BD_STATUS
l CONFIG_NOSUPPO
RT
l HARD_BAD
l IF_INPWR_ABN
l LOOP_ALM
l POWER_ALM
l RADIO_FADING_M
ARGIN_INSUFF
l RADIO_MUTE
l RADIO_RSL_BE-
YONDTH
l RADIO_RSL_HIGH
l RADIO_RSL_LOW
l RADIO_TSL_HIGH
l RADIO_TSL_LOW
l TEMP_ALARM
l WRG_BD_TYPE

A.2.23 PIU
l BD_STATUS
l HARD_BAD
l POWER_ABNORMAL
l THUNDERALM
l WRG_BD_TYPE

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
326
A.2.24 PMU
l BAT1TEMP_SENSO
R_FAIL
l BAT2TEMP_SENSO
R_FAIL
l BD_STATUS
l ENVHUM_SENSOR
_FAIL
l ENVTEMP1_SENSO
R_FAIL
l ENVTEMP2_SENSO
R_FAIL
l HARD_BAD
l ODC_BATTERY_C
URRENT_ABN
l ODC_BATTERY_P
WRDOWN
l ODC_DOOR_OPEN
l ODC_HUMI_ABN
l ODC_LOAD_PWRD
OWN
l ODC_MDL_ABN
l ODC_POWER_FAIL
l ODC_SMOKE_OVE
R
l ODC_SURGE_PROT
ECTION_FAIL
l ODC_TEMP_ABN
l ODC_WATER_ALM
l WRG_BD_TYPE

A.2.25 SL1D/SL1DA
l AU_AIS
l AU_LOP
l B1_EXC
l B1_SD
l B2_EXC
l B2_SD
l B3_EXC
l B3_SD
l BD_STATUS
l HARD_BAD
l HP_CROSSTR
l HP_LOM
l HP_RDI
l HP_REI
l HP_SLM
l HP_TIM
l HP_UNEQ
l IN_PWR_HIGH
l IN_PWR_LOW
l J0_MM
l LASER_CLOSE
D
l LASER_MOD_
ERR_EX
l LOOP_ALM
l LSR_BCM_AL
M
l LSR_NO_FITE
D
l LSR_WILL_DIE
l MS_AIS
l MS_CROSSTR
l MS_RDI
l MS_REI
l MSAD_CROSS
TR
l OUT_PWR_AB
N
l R_LOC
l R_LOF
l R_LOS
l RS_CROSSTR
l T_LOC
l TF
l WRG_BD_TYP
E

A.2.26 SP3S/SP3D
l A_LOC
l BD_STATUS
l BIP_EXC
l BIP_SD
l DDN_LFA
l DOWN_E1_AIS
l E1_LOC
l E1_LOS
l HARD_BAD
l HPAD_CROSSTR
l LOOP_ALM
l LP_CROSSTR
l LP_R_FIFO
l LP_RDI
l LP_REI
l LP_RFI
l LP_SLM
l LP_T_FIFO
l LP_TIM
l LP_UNEQ
l T_ALOS
l TU_AIS
l TU_LOP
l UP_E1_AIS
l WRG_BD_TYPE

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
327
A.2.27 TCU
l BD_STATUS
l BDTEMP_SENSOR_
FAIL
l ENVTEMP_SENSOR
_FAIL
l HARD_BAD
l INTEMP_SENSOR_
FAIL
l ODC_DOOR_OPEN
l ODC_FAN_FAILED
l ODC_SMOKE_OVE
R
l ODC_SURGE_PROT
ECTION_FAIL
l ODC_TEC_ALM
l ODC_TEMP_ABN
l ODC_WATER_ALM
l OUT1TEMP_SENSO
R_FAIL
l OUT2TEMP_SENSO
R_FAIL
l WRG_BD_TYPE

A.3 Alarms and Handling Procedures
This chapter describes all the alarms on the OptiX RTN 950 in alphabetical order and how to
handle these alarms.
A.3.1 A_LOC
Description
The A_LOC is an alarm indicating that a clock signal is lost in the uplink bus.
packet capturing/Call History Record/Security redline/inteface
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the A_LOC alarm occurs, the services carried by the board are interrupted.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: A certain board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A certain board is faulty.
1. Replace the board where the alarmed tributary unit is located.
----End
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
328
Related Information
None.
A.3.2 ACR_LOCK_FAIL
Description
The ACR_LOCK_FAIL is an alarm indicating an IEEE 1588 ACR locking failure. This alarm
is reported when the NE works in 1588 ACR mode and the clock fails to be locked.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1
l 0x01: indicates that the phase-locked loop (PLL) is in holdover or free-run
mode.
l 0x02: indicates that the Sync timestamp remains unchanged when the
Precision Time Protocol (PTP) clock is synchronized.
l 0x03: indicates that the PDV on the transport network exceeds the upper
threshold.
l 0x04: indicates that the ACR algorithm is in the quick lockout phase.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, the clock of the downstream NE is abnormal.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The frequency deviation of the clock source or the delay of the intermediate
network exceeds the upper threshold.
l Cause 2: The physical link where the traced clock source resides is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Handle the alarm according to the alarm parameters.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
329
If... Then...
Parameter 1 = 0x01
Go to steps 3 and 4.
Parameter 1 = 0x02
Go to step 4.
Parameter 1 = 0x03
Go to step 3.
Parameter 1 = 0x04 No further action is required. Wait for a while (about 15 minutes). Then,
check whether the alarm is cleared.
Step 2 Check whether a hardware alarm such as HARD_BAD occurs on the SCC board or interface
board that accesses clocks. If yes, clear the alarm immediately.
Step 3 Query the PDV performance of the NE to determine whether the third-party network is running
properly. If not, ask the customer to optimize the PDV. For details about how to query PDV
performance of the local NE, see B.3.5 CURPOSITIVEPDV and CURNEGATIVEPDV.
Step 4 Check the status of the master NE. If the master NE is abnormal, troubleshoot the abnormality
first.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.3 ALM_E1RAI
Description
The ALM_E1RAI is an alarm indicating that the E1 link on the opposite NE reports alarms. This
alarm is reported on the local NE when the T_ALOS, UP_E1_AIS, DOWN_E1_AIS, LFA, or
LMFA alarm is reported on the opposite NE.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, the services on the local NE in the downstream direction are interrupted.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
330
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The E1 link on the opposite NE reports the T_ALOS, LFA, LMFA, UP_E1_AIS,
or DOWN_E1_AIS alarm.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The E1 link on the opposite NE reports the T_ALOS, LFA, LMFA, UP_E1_AIS, or
DOWN_E1_AIS alarm.
Step 2 Handle these alarms first.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.4 ALM_GFP_dCSF
Description
The ALM_GFP_dCSF is an alarm indicating that the generic framing procedure (GFP) customer
signal is lost. When the source end fails to receive the GFP customer signal, it sends the
management frame to the sink end. The ALM_GFP_dCSF alarm is reported when the sink end
receives the management frame.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01
indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, services are interrupted.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
331
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: Timeslot binding is different at the source and sink VCTRUNKs.
l Cause 2: The radio link performance degrades.
l Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Timeslot binding is different at the source and sink VCTRUNKs.
1. Reconfigure the timeslot binding at the source and sink VCTRUNKs.
Step 2 Cause 2: The radio link performance degrades.
1. Troubleshoot the radio link.
Step 3 Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty.
1. Replace the faulty board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.5 ALM_GFP_dLFD
Description
The ALM_GFP_dLFD is an alarm indicating that the GFP frame is out of frame. This alarm
occurs when a board detects that the GFP frame is out of frame.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the logical port, and the value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01
indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
332
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, services are interrupted.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: Bit errors occur on certain links or certain links are faulty.
l Cause 2: When the LCAS is disabled, the source and the sink VCTRUNKs are configured
with different timeslots or different numbers of paths.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Bit errors occur on certain links or certain links are faulty.
1. Check whether the links where the service travels have errors or become faulty.
If... Then...
The links are faulty Rectify the fault.
The links are normal Replace the alarmed board.
Step 2 Cause 2: When the LCAS is disabled, the source and the sink VCTRUNKs are configured with
different timeslots or different numbers of paths.
1. Correct the configuration data. For details, see Configuring VCTRUNKs on an Ethernet
Board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.6 ALM_IMA_LIF
Description
The ALM_IMA_LIF is an alarm indicating that the IMA link is out of frame in the receive
direction. This alarm occurs when the frame alignment is lost on the IMA link in the receive
direction.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
333
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicate the ATM Trunk ID.
Impact on the System
l When this alarm occurs, the alarmed IMA link is unavailable. Therefore, the number of
available links in the IMA group decreases. If the bandwidth of the services configured for
the IMA group exceeds the total bandwidth of available IMA links, congestion occurs on
the IMA port, causing loss of cells.
l After this alarm is cleared, the affected IMA link becomes available.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS,
R_LOF, and MS_AIS.
l Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends.
l Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS,
R_LOF, and MS_AIS.
If... Then...
The path reports any SDH alarm Handle the relevant alarms first.
The path does not report any SDH alarm Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends.
1. Disable the IMA protocol at the two ends.
2. Check the IMA group configuration at the two ends and ensure that the configuration is
consistent.
3. Enable the IMA protocol at the two ends.
4. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.
1. Replace the board. For details, see 6.6 Replacing the Smart E1 Interface Board.
----End
Related Information
Loss of frame alignment
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
334
A frame alignment word, provided at the physical layer, occupies the initial position of a frame
and defines the start of information field. An Out Of Frame (OOF) defect is declared when the
position of frame alignment word cannot be determined in the input bit stream.
A.3.7 ALM_IMA_LODS
Description
The ALM_IMA_LODS is an alarm indicating the differential delay on the IMA link crosses the
threshold. This alarm occurs when the maximum differential delay on the IMA link exceeds the
preset value.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicate the ATM Trunk ID.
Impact on the System
The IMA links are unavailable.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The maximum differential delay is configured incorrectly.
l Cause 2: Within one IMA group, the transmission distances of member links have too large
gaps.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The maximum differential delay is configured incorrectly.
1. Change the maximum differential delay to a greater value. For details, see Modifying CES
Service Parameters.
Step 2 Cause 2: Within one IMA group, the transmission distances of member links have too large
gaps.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
335
1. Use the meter to measure the transmission time on E1 links. If the transmission time on
different links has a gap larger than 25 ms (default value), adjust the IMA links or delete
the member link with over long transmission time from the IMA group.
----End
Related Information
Differential delay
Differential delay refers to the service delay difference between E1 links.
A.3.8 ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE
Description
The ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE is an alarm indicating that the IMA link on the opposite
NE fails in the receive direction.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicate the ATM Trunk ID.
Impact on the System
l When this alarm occurs, the alarmed IMA link is unavailable. Therefore, the number of
available links in the IMA group decreases. If the bandwidth of the services configured for
the IMA group exceeds the total bandwidth of available IMA links, congestion occurs on
the IMA port, causing loss of cells.
l After this alarm is cleared, the affected IMA link becomes available.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS,
R_LOF, and MS_AIS.
l Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends.
l Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
336
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS,
R_LOF, and MS_AIS.
If... Then...
The path reports any SDH alarm Handle the relevant alarms first.
The path does not report any SDH alarm Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends.
1. Disable the IMA protocol at the two ends.
2. Check the IMA group configuration at the two ends and ensure that the configuration is
consistent.
3. Enable the IMA protocol at the two ends.
4. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.
1. Replace the board. For details, see 6.6 Replacing the Smart E1 Interface Board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.9 ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE
Description
The ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE is an alarm indicating that the IMA link on the opposite
NE fails in the transmit direction.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
337
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicate the ATM Trunk ID.
Impact on the System
l When this alarm occurs, the alarmed IMA link is unavailable. Therefore, the number of
available links in the IMA group decreases. If the bandwidth of the services configured for
the IMA group exceeds the total bandwidth of available IMA links, congestion occurs on
the IMA port, causing loss of cells.
l After this alarm is cleared, the affected IMA link becomes available.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS,
R_LOF, and MS_AIS.
l Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends.
l Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS,
R_LOF, and MS_AIS.
If... Then...
The path reports any SDH alarm Handle the relevant alarms first.
The path does not report any SDH alarm Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends.
1. Disable the IMA protocol at the two ends.
2. Check the IMA group configuration at the two ends and ensure that the configuration is
consistent.
3. Enable the IMA protocol at the two ends.
4. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.
1. Replace the board. For details, see 6.6 Replacing the Smart E1 Interface Board.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
338
A.3.10 ALM_IMA_RFI
Description
The ALM_IMA_RFI is an alarm indicating that the IMA link on the opposite NE is out of frame
(OOF) in the receive direction. This alarm occurs when the frame alignment is lost on the IMA
link of the opposite NE and the opposite NE notifies the local NE of its OOF state.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicate the ATM Trunk ID.
Impact on the System
l When this alarm occurs, the alarmed IMA link is unavailable. Therefore, the number of
available links in the IMA group decreases. If the bandwidth of the services configured for
the IMA group exceeds the total bandwidth of available IMA links, congestion occurs on
the IMA port, causing loss of cells.
l After this alarm is cleared, the affected IMA link becomes available.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS,
R_LOF, and MS_AIS.
l Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends.
l Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS,
R_LOF, and MS_AIS.
If... Then...
The path reports any SDH alarm Handle the relevant alarms first.
The path does not report any SDH alarm Go to Cause 2.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
339
Step 2 Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends.
1. Disable the IMA protocol at the two ends.
2. Check the IMA group configuration at the two ends and ensure that the configuration is
consistent.
3. Enable the IMA protocol at the two ends.
4. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.
1. Replace the board. For details, see 6.6 Replacing the Smart E1 Interface Board.
----End
Related Information
Frame alignment loss
A frame alignment word, provided at the physical layer, occupies the initial position of a frame
and defines the start of information field. An Out Of Frame (OOF) defect is declared when the
position of frame alignment word cannot be determined in the input bit stream.
A.3.11 AM_DOWNSHIFT
Description
The AM_DOWNSHIFT alarm indicates the downshift of the AM scheme. This alarm occurs
after the AM mode is downshifted from the highest-order modulation scheme to the lower-order
modulation scheme. After the AM mode is upshifted from the lower-order modulation scheme
to the highest-order modulation scheme, this alarm is cleared.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the AM_DOWNSHIFT alarm occurs, the transmission capacity is reduced.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
340
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The external factors (for example, the climate) cause the degradation of the
working channels.
l Cause 2: There are interferences around the working channels.
l Cause 3: The ODU at the transmit end has abnormal transmit power.
l Cause 4: The ODU at the receive end has abnormal receive power.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The external factors (for example, the climate) cause the degradation of the working
channels.
1. When the external factors (for example, the climate) cause the degradation of the working
channels, the downshift of the AM scheme is normal. Hence, no measures should be taken
to handle the alarm.
Step 2 Cause 2: There are interferences around the working channels.
1. Eliminate the interferences around the working channels.
Step 3 Cause 3: The ODU at the transmit end has abnormal transmit power.
1. Use the NMS to check whether the transmit power of the ODU at the transmit end is normal.
For details on troubleshooting at the transmit end, see Troubleshooting Microwave
Links.
Step 4 Cause 4: The ODU at the receive end has abnormal receive power.
1. Use the NMS to check whether the receive power of the ODU at the receive end is normal.
For details on troubleshooting at the receive end, see Troubleshooting Microwave
Links.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.12 APS_FAIL
Description
The APS_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the MS protection switching fails.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
341
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1
Indicates the type of the protection group.
l 0x01: linear MS protection
Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates
that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.
Impact on the System
When the APS_FAIL alarm occurs, the services cannot be switched. If the current paths are
unavailable, the services are interrupted.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The parameters of the MSP protocol are set incorrectly.
l Cause 2: The parameters of the MSP protocol are lost.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The parameters of the MSP protocol are set incorrectly.
1. Check whether the parameters of the MSP protocol are set correctly.
If... Then...
The parameters are set incorrectly Set the parameters correctly.
The parameters are set correctly Go to the next step.
Step 2 Cause 2: The parameters of the MSP protocol are lost.
1. Check whether the MSP protocol is normal on the network.
2. Check whether the MSP protocol is normal on the network. For details, see Enabling/
Disabling the linear MSP protocol.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the protocol is
restarted
End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists after the protocol is
restarted
Contact Huawei engineers to handle the
alarm.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
342
A.3.13 APS_INDI
Description
The APS_INDI is an alarm indicating that the MS protection switching occurs.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1
Indicates the type of the protection group.
l 0x01: linear MS protection.
Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates
that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.
Impact on the System
During the switching ( 50 ms), the service is interrupted. After the switching is complete, the
services are restored to normal. In the case of 1:N MS protection, after the switching starts and
before the switching is complete, the extra services are interrupted.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The MS protection switching occurs.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The MS protection switching occurs.
1. Query the linear MSP group.
2. Check whether the MSP protocol is in the manual switching state, forced switching state,
or locked switching state. If yes, release the switching and check whether the alarm is
cleared.
3. Check whether the MSP protocol is in the automatic switching state. Do as follows:
a. Handle the R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, B2_EXC, or B2_SD alarm that the equipment
reports. After the alarms are cleared, wait until the MSP protocol is changed from the
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
343
automatic switching state to the normal state. Then, check whether the APS_INDI
alarm is cleared.
b. Check whether the service board configured with the MSP protocol is faulty. If yes,
replace the faulty board and then check whether the APS_INDI alarm is cleared.
c. Check whether the currently working system control and cross-connect board is faulty.
If the currently working system control and cross-connect board is faulty and a
protection system control and cross-connect board is available, switch the service to
the protection system control and cross-connect board and replace the faulty system
control and cross-connect board. Then, check whether the APS_INDI alarm is
cleared.
----End
Related Information
This alarm is also reported upon a packet-based linear MSP switching. For querying the packet-
based Linear MSP group, refer toQuerying the Status of a Packet-based Linear MSP Group.
A.3.14 APS_MANUAL_STOP
Description
The APS_MANUAL_STOP is an alarm indicating that the MSP protocol is stopped manually.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Processing alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1
Indicates the type of the protection group.
l 0x01: linear MS protection.
Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates
that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.
Impact on the System
When the APS_MANUAL_STOP alarm occurs, the MSP protocol may fail and therefore the
protection switching may fail.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
344
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The MSP protocol is stopped manually.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The MSP protocol is stopped manually.
1. Enable/Disable the linear MSP protocol.
----End
Related Information
This alarm is also reported upon a packet linear MSP switching. For enabling/disabling the
packet linear MSP protocol, refer toEnabling/Disabling the Linear MSP Protocol.
A.3.15 ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELL_EXC
Description
The ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELL_EXC is an alarm indicating that the number of unknown
cells exceeds the specified threshold in a time unit. This alarm occurs when the board detects
that, within a period (2.5s), the number of unknown cells crosses the specified threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
An unknown cell is discarded once it is detected. As a result, the packet loss rate increases and
services are affected.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: PW control words mismatch.
l Cause 2: PW types mismatch.
l Cause 3: Fragments are received on the network side.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the configuration at the two ends of the PW is consistent. If not, modify the
configuration.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
345
Step 2 Check whether connections are correct. If not, reconnect fibers or reconfigure connections.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.16 AU_AIS
Description
The AU_AIS is an alarm indicating the administrative unit (AU). This alarm occurs when the
board detects the AU pointer of all 1s for three consecutive frames.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the AU_AIS alarm occurs, the service in the alarmed AU-4 path is interrupted. If the
services are configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The opposite NE inserts the AU_AIS alarm.
l Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty.
l Cause 3: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE inserts the AU_AIS alarm.
If... Then...
The alarm that triggers the AU_AIS insertion occurs Clear the alarm immediately.
No such alarms that trigger the AU_AIS insertion occur Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty.
1. Replace the line board at the opposite end
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
346
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after replacement The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists after replacement Go to the next step.
2. Replace the system control, cross-connect, and timing board at the opposite end.
Step 3 Cause 3: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty.
1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.17 AU_LOP
Description
The AU_LOP is an alarm indicating the loss of the AU pointer. This alarm occurs when a board
detects the AU pointer of invalid values or with the NDF for eight consecutive frames.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the AU_LOP alarm occurs, the service in the alarmed AU-4 path is interrupted. If the
services are configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty.
l Cause 2: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty.
1. Replace the line board at the opposite end.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
347
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after replacement The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists after replacement Go to the next step.
2. Replace the system control, cross-connect, and timing board at the opposite end.
Step 2 Cause 2: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty.
1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.18 B1_EXC
Description
The B1_EXC is an alarm indicating that the B1 errors (in the regenerator section) exceed the
threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the B1 errors exceed the preset B1_EXC
alarm threshold (10
-3
by default).
An IF board that works in PDH mode may also report this alarm. This alarm is detected by using
the self-defined overhead byte B1 in PDH microwave frames.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the B1_EXC alarm occurs, the services on the port are interrupted.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface
board).
l Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
l Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.
l Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).
l Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
348
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface
board).
1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local
end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 4.3.3 Browsing
Current Performance Events.
If... Then...
The transmit power of the opposite NE is over
low
Replace the SFP on the opposite NE.
The transmit power of the opposite NE is
normal, but the receive power of the local NE
is close to the value (for example, within 3
dB) of the receiver sensitivity.
The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a
channel.
If... Then...
The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
The errors do not vary with the change of the
fiber.
Ensure that the board is normal.
3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical
distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed,
and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
1. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR or
RPS_INDI alarm is reported. If yes, clear the alarm.
Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.
1. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE.
If... Then...
The clock source of the local NE is
different from the clock source of the
opposite NE
The clock may become asynchronous and B1
errors may occur. Reconfigure the clock
source, and ensure that the clock is
synchronized on the local NE and opposite
NE.
The clock of the local NE and the clock
of the opposite NE form a timing loop
This may cause errors and even service
interruption. In this case, reconfigure the clock
source and release the timing loop.
Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).
1. The board of the SDH line unit on the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical interfaces
of the NE by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
349
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after the optical
interfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the alarmed
line unit is located on the local NE.
The fault is rectified after the optical
interfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the line unit is
located on the opposite NE.
Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
1. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after the
multiplexing interface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on the
local NE.
The fault is rectified after the multiplexing
interface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on the
opposite NE.
----End
Related Information
The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port.
Handle the errors of TDM services.
A.3.19 B1_SD
Description
The B1_SD is an alarm indicating that the signal degrades due to the excessive B1 errors (in the
regenerator section). This alarm occurs when the board detects that the B1 errors exceed the
preset B1_SD alarm threshold (10
-6
by default) but do not reach the preset B1_EXC alarm
threshold (10
-3
by default).
An IF board that works in PDH mode may also report this alarm. This alarm is detected by using
the self-defined overhead byte B1 in PDH microwave frames.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the B1_SD alarm occurs, the service performance on the port degrades.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
350
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface
board).
l Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
l Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.
l Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).
l Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface
board).
1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local
end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 4.3.3 Browsing
Current Performance Events.
If... Then...
The transmit power of the opposite NE is over
low
Replace the SFP on the opposite NE.
The transmit power of the opposite NE is
normal, but the receive power of the local NE
is close to the value (for example, within 3
dB) of the receiver sensitivity
The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a
channel.
If... Then...
The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
The errors do not vary with the change of the
fiber
Ensure that the board is normal.
3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical
distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed,
and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
1. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is
generated. If yes, clear the alarm.
Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.
1. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
351
If... Then...
The clock source of the local NE is
different from the clock source of the
opposite NE
The clock may become asynchronous and
errors may occur. Reconfigure the clock
source, and ensure that the clock is
synchronized on the local NE and opposite
NE.
The clock of the local NE and the clock
of the opposite NE form a timing loop
This may cause errors and even service
interruption. In this case, reconfigure the clock
source and release the timing loop.
Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).
1. The SDH optical line board of the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical interfaces of
the NE by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after the optical
interfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the alarmed
line unit is located on the local NE.
The fault is rectified after the optical
interfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the line unit is
located on the opposite NE.
Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
1. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after the
multiplexing interface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on the
local NE.
The fault is rectified after the multiplexing
interface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on the
opposite NE.
----End
Related Information
The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port.
Handle the errors of TDM services.
A.3.20 B2_EXC
Description
The B2_EXC is an alarm indicating that the B2 errors (in the multiplex section) exceed the
threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of B2 errors exceeds the
preset B2_EXC alarm threshold (10
-3
by default).
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
352
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Service alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The services on the port are interrupted.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface
board).
l Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
l Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.
l Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).
l Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface
board).
1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local
end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 4.3.3 Browsing
Current Performance Events.
If... Then...
The transmit power of the opposite NE is over
low
Replace the SFP on the opposite NE.
The transmit power of the opposite NE is
normal, but the receive power of the local NE
is close to the value (for example, within 3
dB) of the receiver sensitivity
The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a
channel to locate the fault.
If... Then...
The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
The errors do not vary with the change of the
fiber
Ensure that the board is normal.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
353
3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical
distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed,
and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
1. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR or
RPS_INDI alarm is reported. If yes, clear the alarm.
Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.
1. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE.
If... Then...
The clock source of the local NE is
different from the clock source of the
opposite NE
The clock may become asynchronous and
errors may occur. Reconfigure the clock
source, and ensure that the clock is
synchronized on the local NE and opposite
NE.
The clock of the local NE and the clock
of the opposite NE form a timing loop
This may cause errors and even service
interruption. In this case, reconfigure the clock
source and release the timing loop.
Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).
1. The board of the SDH line unit on the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical interfaces
of the NE by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after the optical
interfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the alarmed
line unit is located on the local NE.
The fault is rectified after the optical
interfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the line unit is
located on the opposite NE.
Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
1. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after the
multiplexing interface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on the
local NE.
The fault is rectified after the multiplexing
interface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on the
opposite NE.
----End
Related Information
The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port.
Handle the errors of TDM services.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
354
A.3.21 B2_SD
Description
The B2_SD is an alarm indicating that the signal degrades due to the excessive B2 errors (in the
multiplex section). This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of B2 errors is
higher than the preset B2_SD alarm threshold (10
-6
by default) and lower than the preset
B2_EXC alarm threshold (10
-3
by default).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The service performance on the port degrades.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface
board).
l Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
l Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.
l Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).
l Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface
board).
1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local
end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 4.3.3 Browsing
Current Performance Events.
If... Then...
The transmit power of the opposite NE is over
low
Replace the SFP on the opposite NE.
The transmit power of the opposite NE is
normal, but the receive power of the local NE
is close to the value (for example, within 3
dB) of the receiver sensitivity
The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
355
2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a
channel to locate the fault.
If... Then...
The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
The errors do not vary with the change of the
fiber
Ensure that the board is normal.
3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical
distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed,
and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
1. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is
generated. If yes, clear the alarm.
Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.
1. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE.
If... Then...
The clock source of the local NE is
different from the clock source of the
opposite NE
The clock may become asynchronous and
errors may occur. Reconfigure the clock
source, and ensure that the clock is
synchronized on the local NE and opposite
NE.
The clock of the local NE and the clock
of the opposite NE form a timing loop
This may cause errors and even service
interruption. In this case, reconfigure the clock
source and release the timing loop.
Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).
1. The SDH optical/electrical line board of the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical
interfaces of the station by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after the optical
interfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the alarmed
line unit is located on the local NE.
The fault is rectified after the optical
interfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the line unit is
located on the opposite NE.
Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
1. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after the
multiplexing interface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on the
local NE.
The fault is rectified after the multiplexing
interface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on the
opposite NE.
----End
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
356
Related Information
The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port.
Handle the errors of TDM services.
A.3.22 B3_EXC
Description
The B3_EXC is an alarm indicating that the B3 errors (in the higher order path) exceed the
threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of B3 errors exceeds the
preset B3_EXC alarm threshold (10
-3
by default).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Service alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the B3_EXC alarm occurs, the service on the alarmed path is interrupted.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface
board).
l Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
l Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.
l Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).
l Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface
board).
1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local
end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 4.3.3 Browsing
Current Performance Events.
If... Then...
The transmit power of the opposite NE is over
low
Replace the SFP on the opposite NE.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
357
If... Then...
The transmit power of the opposite NE is
normal, but the receive power of the local NE
is close to the value (for example, within 3
dB) of the receiver sensitivity
The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a
channel to locate the fault.
If... Then...
The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
The errors do not vary with the change of the
fiber
Ensure that the board is normal.
3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical
distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed,
and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
1. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR or
RPS_INDI alarm is reported. If yes, clear the alarm.
Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.
1. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE.
If... Then...
The clock source of the local NE is
different from the clock source of the
opposite NE
In this case, the clock may become
asynchronous and errors may occur.
Reconfigure the clock source, and ensure that
the clock is synchronized on the local NE and
opposite NE.
The clock of the local NE and the clock
of the opposite NE form a timing loop
This may cause errors and even service
interruption. In this case, reconfigure the clock
source and release the timing loop.
Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).
1. The board of the SDH line unit on the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical interfaces
of the NE by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after the optical
interfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the alarmed
line unit is located on the local NE.
The fault is rectified after the optical
interfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the line unit is
located on the opposite NE.
Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
1. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
358
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after the
multiplexing interface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on the
local NE.
The fault is rectified after the multiplexing
interface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on the
opposite NE.
----End
Related Information
The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port.
Handle the errors of TDM services.
A.3.23 B3_EXC_VC3
Description
The B3_EXC_VC3 alarm indicates that the number of B3 bit errors in a VC-3 path crosses the
threshold. A board reports this alarm when detecting that the number of B3 bit errors crosses
the B3_EXC_VC3 alarm threshold (10
-3
, by default).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Service alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Has a fixed value of 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example,
0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.
Impact on the System
The services in the alarmed path have a large number of bit errors.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: Higher-level bit error alarms occur in the system.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
359
l Cause 2: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet optical
port).
l Cause 3: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet electrical
port).
l Cause 4: A board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Higher-level bit error alarms occur in the system.
1. Check whether the local or upstream site detects B1_EXC, B1_SD, B2_EXC, B2_SD,
B3_EXC, or B3_SD alarms. If yes, clear the higher-level alarms.
2. Check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 2 or Cause 3.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet optical port).
1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite site and the receive power at the local
site meet the specifications of the optical ports. For details, see Browsing Current
Performance Events.
If... Then...
The transmit power at the opposite site is
too low
Replace the optical module at the
opposite site.
The transmit power at the opposite site is
normal, but the receive power at the local
site is close to the receiver sensitivity (for
example, a difference within 3 dB)
A fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
2. Exchange the optical fibers in the receive and transmit directions of an optical path segment.
If... Then...
The number of bit errors changes Go to the next step.
The number of bit errors does not change Go to Cause 4.
3. If a fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical
distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out from the equipment room are pressed,
and whether any fiber connector is dirty or damaged. If yes, clean or replace the fiber
connector, or replace the fiber jumper. Check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 4.
Step 3 Cause 3: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet electrical port).
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
360
1. Check whether the cable grounding, cable connectors, and cables are damaged. If yes,
replace the faulty cables.
2. Check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 4.
Step 4 Cause 4: A board is faulty.
1. Perform an inloop at the Ethernet port that connects to the alarmed VC-3 path.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after the
Ethernet port is looped back
Replace the alarmed Ethernet processing
board at the local site.
The fault is rectified after the Ethernet
port is looped back
Replace the Ethernet processing board at
the opposite site.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.24 B3_SD
Description
The B3_SD is an alarm indicating that the signal degrades due to the excessive B3 errors (in the
higher order path). This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of B3 errors is
higher than the preset B3_SD alarm threshold (10
-6
by default) and lower than the preset
B3_EXC alarm threshold (10
-3
by default).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The service performance on the port degrades.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
361
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface
board).
l Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
l Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.
l Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).
l Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface
board).
1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local
end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 4.3.3 Browsing
Current Performance Events.
If... Then...
The transmit power of the opposite NE is over
low
Replace the SFP on the opposite NE.
The transmit power of the opposite NE is
normal, but the receive power of the local NE
is close to the value (for example, within 3
dB) of the receiver sensitivity
The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a
channel to locate the fault.
If... Then...
The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
The errors do not vary with the change of the
fiber
Ensure that the board is normal.
3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical
distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed,
and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
1. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is
generated. If yes, clear the alarm.
Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.
1. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
362
If... Then...
The clock source of the local NE is
different from the clock source of the
opposite NE
In this case, the clock may become
asynchronous and errors may occur.
Reconfigure the clock source, and ensure that
the clock is synchronized on the local NE and
opposite NE.
The clock of the local NE and the clock
of the opposite NE form a timing loop
This may cause errors and even service
interruption. In this case, reconfigure the clock
source and release the timing loop.
Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).
1. The SDH optical/electrical line board of the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical
interfaces of the station by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after the optical
interfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the alarmed
line unit is located on the local NE.
The fault is rectified after the optical
interfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the line unit is
located on the opposite NE.
Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
1. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after the
multiplexing interface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on the
local NE.
The fault is rectified after the multiplexing
interface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on the
opposite NE.
----End
Related Information
The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port.
Handle the errors of TDM services.
A.3.25 B3_SD_VC3
Description
The B3_SD_VC3 alarm indicates a signal degrade (SD) condition caused by excessive B3 bit
errors in VC-3 paths. A board reports this alarm when detecting that the number of B3 bit errors
crosses the B3_SD_VC3 alarm threshold (10
-6
, by default).
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
363
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Has a fixed value of 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00
0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.
Impact on the System
When the B3_SD_VC3 alarm occurs, the services in the alarmed path deteriorate.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: Higher-level bit error alarms occur in the system.
l Cause 2: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet optical
port).
l Cause 3: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet electrical
port).
l Cause 4: A board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Higher-level bit error alarms occur in the system.
1. Check whether the local or upstream site detects B1_EXC, B1_SD, B2_EXC, B2_SD,
B3_EXC, or B3_SD alarms. If yes, clear the higher-level alarms.
2. Check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 2 or Cause 3.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet optical port).
1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite site and the receive power at the local
site meet the specifications of the optical ports. For details, see Browsing Current
Performance Events.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
364
If... Then...
The transmit power at the opposite site is
too low
Replace the optical module at the
opposite site.
The transmit power at the opposite site is
normal, but the receive power at the local
site is close to the receiver sensitivity (for
example, a difference within 3 dB)
A fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
2. Exchange the optical fibers in the receive and transmit directions of an optical path segment.
If... Then...
The number of bit errors changes Go to the next step.
The number of bit errors does not change Go to Cause 4.
3. If a fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical
distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out from the equipment room are pressed,
and whether any fiber connector is dirty or damaged. If yes, clean or replace the fiber
connector, or replace the fiber jumper. Check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 4.
Step 3 Cause 3: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet electrical port).
1. Check whether the cable grounding, cable connectors, and cables are damaged. If yes,
replace the faulty cables.
2. Check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 4.
Step 4 Cause 4: A board is faulty.
1. Perform an inloop at the Ethernet port that connects to the alarmed VC-3 path.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after the
Ethernet port is looped back
Replace the alarmed Ethernet processing
board at the local site.
The fault is rectified after the Ethernet
port is looped back
Replace the Ethernet processing board at
the opposite site.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
365
A.3.26 BAT1TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL
Description
The BAT1TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the temperature sensor of battery
group 1 fails.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The temperature data of battery group 1 cannot be collected.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The temperature sensor of battery group 1 is faulty.
l Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty.
l Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged.
l Cause 4: The temperature sensor is not installed.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The temperature sensor of battery group 1 is faulty.
1. Replace the temperature sensor of battery group 1.
2. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm clears End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty.
1. Replace the cabinet.
2. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm clears End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
366
1. Replace damaged cables.
2. Connect cables correctly.
Step 4 Cause 4: The temperature sensor is not installed.
1. Install the temperature sensor.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.27 BAT2TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL
Description
The BAT2TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the temperature sensor of battery
group 2 fails.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The temperature data of battery group 2 cannot be collected.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The temperature sensor of battery group 2 is faulty.
l Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty.
l Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged.
l Cause 4: The temperature sensor is not installed.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The temperature sensor of battery group 2 is faulty.
1. Replace the temperature sensor of battery group 2.
2. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm clears End the alarm handling.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
367
If... Then...
The alarm persists Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty.
1. Replace the cabinet.
2. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm clears End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged.
1. Replace damaged cables.
2. Connect cables correctly.
Step 4 Cause 4: The temperature sensor is not installed.
1. Install the board temperature sensor.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.28 BD_NOT_INSTALLED
Description
The BD_NOT_INSTALLED is an alarm indicating that the physical board is installed in a
certain slot, but the logical board is not added.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the slot.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
368
Impact on the System
When the BD_NOT_INSTALLED alarm occurs, the physical board in this slot cannot work.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The logical board is not added in the corresponding logical slot.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The logical board is not added in the corresponding logical slot.
1. Configure the logical board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.29 BD_STATUS
Description
The BD_STATUS is an alarm indicating that the board cannot be detected.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the BD_STATUS alarm occurs, the alarmed board fails to work.
Possible Causes
If the alarm is reported by a board of the IDU, the possible causes are as follows:
l Cause 1 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The board is installed in an incorrect
slot.
l Cause 2 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The board and the backplane are not
connected properly.
l Cause 3 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The slot is faulty.
l Cause 4 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: A certain board is faulty.
If the alarm is reported by the ODU, the possible causes are as follows:
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
369
l Cause 1 of the alarm reported by the ODU: The other alarms are generated.
l Cause 2 of the alarm reported by the ODU: The ODU is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The board is installed in an incorrect slot.
1. Check whether the logical slot and physical slot of the alarmed board are consistent. For
details, see 4.2 Checking the Board Status.
If... Then...
The alarmed board is installed in an
incorrect slot
Install the board in a correct slot.
The alarmed board is installed in a
correct slot
Ensure that the board and the backplane
are connected properly.
Step 2 Cause 2 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The board and the backplane are not
connected properly.
1. Remove and insert the alarmed board.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the board is
removed and inserted
The fault is rectified. End the alarm
handling.
The alarm persists after the board is
removed and inserted
Ensure that the board is normal.
Step 3 Cause 3 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The slot is faulty.
1. Contact Huawei engineers to handle the fault of the slot.
NOTE
Generally, the slot becomes faulty due to the broken pin or bent pin. Remove the board, and use a
torch to observe whether there is any broken pin or bent pin.
2. If a vacant slot is available, insert the board in the vacant slot and add the board again.
Then, the board can work normally.
Step 4 Cause 4 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: A certain board is faulty.
1. Replace the alarmed board.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the board is
replaced
The fault is rectified. End the alarm
handling.
The alarm persists after the board is
replaced
Ensure that the slot is normal.
Step 5 Cause 1 of the alarm reported by the ODU: The other alarms are generated.
1. Query whether the IF board reports the HARD_BAD, BD_STATUS,
IF_CABLE_OPEN, BD_NOT_INSTALLED or VOLT_LOS alarm.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
370
If... Then...
The IF board reports any of the preceding alarms Clear the alarm immediately.
The IF board does not report any of the preceding
alarms
Replace the alarmed ODU.
Step 6 Cause 2 of the alarm reported by the ODU: The ODU is faulty.
1. Replace the alarmed ODU.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.30 BDTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL
Description
The BDTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the board temperature sensor of the
cabinet fails.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The board temperature data of the TCU cannot be collected.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The board temperature sensor is faulty.
l Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty.
l Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged.
l Cause 4: The board temperature sensor is not installed.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The board temperature sensor is faulty.
1. Replace the board temperature sensor.
2. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
371
If... Then...
The alarm clears End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty.
1. Replace the cabinet.
2. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm clears End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged.
1. Replace damaged cables.
2. Connect cables correctly.
Step 4 Cause 4: The board temperature sensor is not installed.
1. Install the board temperature sensor.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.31 BGPBACKTRANSITION
Description
The BGPBACKTRANSITION alarm indicates that a Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)
connection is interrupted because the status of the BGP peer changes.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
372
Name Meaning
Parameters 1-4 Indicate the IPv4 address of the BGP peer.
Parameters 5-7 Indicate the error code contained in the BGP notification returned during
the last BGP connection interruption.
Parameters 8-11 Indicate the status of the BGP peer.
Parameters 12-15 Indicate the instance ID.
Parameters 16-19 Indicate the address family.
Parameters 20-23 Indicate the sub-address family.
Parameters 24-27 Indicate the address type of the BGP peer.
Parameters 28-48 Indicate the IPv6 address of the BGP peer.
Parameters 49-52 Indicate the cause of the BGP connection interruption.
Parameters 53-56 Indicate the local interface index.
Parameters 57-120 Indicate the local interface name.
Impact on the System
The BGP connection is interrupted, routes become unreachable, and services are interrupted.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1. The BGP configurations change.
l Cause 2: There is no reachable IP route to the BGP peer.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1. The BGP configurations change.
1. Ensure that the BGP configurations are consistent at the local end and the BGP peer.
Step 2 Cause 2: There is no reachable IP route to the BGP peer.
1. Ping the public IP address of the BGP peer to check whether there is a reachable IP route
to the BGP peer. If there is no reachable IP route to the BGP peer, go to the next step.
2. Check whether the link to the BGP peer is faulty, for example, whether an ETH_LOS alarm
is reported. If the link is faulty, rectify the fault.
3. Ensure that the IGP configurations between the local end and the BGP peer are correct.
----End
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
373
Related Information
None
A.3.32 BIOS_STATUS
Description
The BIOS_STATUS is an alarm indicating that the board is in BIOS state.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Processing alarm
Parameters
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the slot ID of the board that is in BIOS state.
Impact on the System
The services on the alarmed board are interrupted.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The board software is lost.
l Cause 2: The board software becomes abnormal.
l Cause 3: The board is reset for three consecutive times.
Procedure
Step 1 Perform a cold reset on the alarmed standby system control, switching, and timing board, and
then check whether the alarm is cleared.
Step 2 If the alarm persists, remove the standby system control, switching, and timing board, and
then reseat the board.
Step 3 If the alarm persists, replace the board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.33 BIP_EXC
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
374
Description
The BIP_EXC is an alarm indicating that the BIP errors exceed the threshold. This alarm occurs
when the board detects that the number of BIP-2 errors (in byte V5) exceeds the preset BIP_EXC
alarm threshold (10
-3
by default).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the BIP_EXC alarm occurs, the service on the alarmed path is interrupted.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board).
l Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).
l Cause 3: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board).
l Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board).
1. Check whether the performance degradation alarm occurs on the STM-1 path or radio link
along which the E1 service signal travels. If yes, clear the alarm immediately.
The common line performance degradation alarms are as follows:
B1_EXC, B1_SD, B2_EXC, B2_SD, B3_EXC, B3_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR,
RPS_INDI, MW_BER_EXC, and MW_BER_SD.
If... Then...
There is any of the preceding alarms Clear the alarm immediately.
No such alarms occur Ensure that the board is normal.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).
1. Check whether any alarm occurs on the tributary board or IF board that transmits the service
signal. If yes, clear the alarm immediately.
Step 3 Cause 3: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board).
1. Replace the board where the E1 service unit is located. Then, check whether the alarm
is cleared.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
375
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Replace the system control and cross-connect board.
Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).
1. Replace the Hybrid IF board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Replace the system control and cross-connect board.
----End
Related Information
Handle the errors of TDM services.
The alarm parameters have the meanings listed in Table A-3 when EMS6 board report the alarm.
Table A-3 Alarm Parameters of EMS6
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the
alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that
the alarm is reported in path 1.

A.3.34 BIP_SD
Description
The BIP_SD is an alarm indicating that the signal degrades due to the BIP errors. This alarm
occurs when the board detects that the number of BIP-2 errors (in byte V5) is higher than the
preset BIP_SD alarm threshold (10
-6
by default) and lower than the preset BIP_EXC alarm
threshold (10
-3
by default).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
Parameters
None.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
376
Impact on the System
When the BIP_SD alarm occurs, the service on the alarmed path degrades.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board).
l Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).
l Cause 3: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board).
l Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board).
1. Check whether the performance degradation alarm occurs on the STM-1 path or radio link
along which the E1 service signal travels. If yes, clear the alarm immediately.
The common line performance degradation alarms are as follows:
B1_EXC, B1_SD, B2_EXC, B2_SD, B3_EXC, B3_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR,
RPS_INDI, MW_BER_EXC, and MW_BER_SD.
If... Then...
There is any of the preceding alarms Clear the alarm immediately.
No such alarms occur Ensure that the board is normal.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).
1. Check whether any alarm occurs on the tributary board or IF board that transmits the service
signal.
If... Then...
An alarm occurs Clear the alarm immediately.
No alarm occurs Ensure that the board is normal.
Step 3 Cause 3: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board).
1. Replace the board where the E1 service unit is located. Then, check whether the alarm
is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Replace the system control and cross-connect board.
Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).
1. Replace the Hybrid IF board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
377
If... Then...
The alarm persists Replace the system control and cross-connect board.
----End
Related Information
Handle the errors of TDM services.
The alarm parameters have the meanings listed in Table A-4 when EMS6 board report the alarm.
Table A-4 Alarm Parameters of EMS6
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the
alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that
the alarm is reported in path 1.

A.3.35 BOOTROM_BAD
Description
The BOOTROM_BAD is an alarm indicating that the BOOTROM data consistency check fails.
This alarm occurs when the BOOTROM data is damaged during a periodical check by the
system.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
378
Name Meaning
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicates the type of the BOOTROM damage.
l 0x00, 0x01: damage of the basic BIOS
l 0x00, 0x02: damage of the extended BIOS
Parameter 4, Parameter 5 The values are always 0xff 0xff.
Impact on the System
When the BOOTROM_BAD alarm occurs, it indicates that errors occur in the system database
processing. The system configuration may be lost. As a result, the failure indication is returned
for certain query and setting commands, and certain system functions cannot work.
l When the NE is already started, the BOOTROM_BAD alarm does not affect the system
and services.
l If the BOOTROM_BAD alarm occurs and a hard reset is performed on a board, the
board fails to load the BIOS and cannot be started.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The basic BIOS is damaged.
l Cause 2: The extended BIOS is damaged.
l Cause 3: The BOOTROM database is damaged.
l Cause 4: The system control switch and timing boardis faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.36 BUS_ERR
Description
The BUS_ERR alarm indicates bus errors. This alarm occurs when the bus becomes abnormal.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
379
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the bus error types.
l 0x01: BUS_LOS
l 0x02: BUS_OOF
l 0x03: BUS_LOF
l 0x04: BUS_OOA
l 0x05: BUS_RX_DOWN
l 0x06: BUS_TX_DOWN
l 0x07: BUS_SPI_DOWN
l 0x08: BUS_SCI_ERR
l 0x09: BUS_OPP_CLK_LOC
l 0x0a: BUS_SERDS_ERR
l 0x0b: BUS_MII_ERR
l 0x0c: BUS_HW_ERR
l 0x0d: BUS_FE_ERR
l 0x0e: BUS_EMIF_ERR
l 0x0f: BUS_IIC_ERR
l 0x10: BUS_GE_LINK_ERR
l 0x11: BUS_EMIF
Parameter 2
Indicates the ID of the bus that has errors.
Parameter 3
This parameter is self-defined.
Impact on the System
When the BUS_ERR alarm occurs, the services that travel along the faulty bus are interrupted
or have errors.
Possible Causes
The possible causes of the BUS_ERR alarm are as follows:
l Cause 1: The board is not properly inserted.
l Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
380
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The board is not properly inserted.
1. Remove and insert the board.
Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.
1. Perform a cold reset on the alarmed board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
The alarm parameters have the meanings listed in Table A-5 when EMS6 board report the alarm.
Table A-5 Alarm parameters of EMS6
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the bus error type.
0x10: The Serdes bus of the GE bridge is
faulty.

A.3.37 CES_ACR_LOCK_ABN
Description
The CES_ACR_LOCK_ABN is an alarm indicating that the locking function of CES ACR
service clock is abnormal.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
Parameters
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 to Parameter 4
Indicate the index of PW that carries the services associated with
the ACR clock source.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
381
Name Meaning
Parameter 5 Indicates clock mode.
l 0x01: tracing mode.
l 0x02: holdover mode.
l 0x03: free-run mode.
Parameter 6 Indicates whether the clock is locked.
l 0x00: unlocked.
l 0x01: locked.
Impact on the System
Service quality is affected.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: CES ACR services are unavailable or have alarms.
l Cause 2: The network is unstable.
l Cause 3: NEs on the service path are abnormal.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: CES ACR services are unavailable or have alarms.
1. Query the CES services associated with the ACR clock source. For details, see Configuring
the Primary Clock for an ACR Clock Domain.
2. Check whether these services have alarms. For details, see 4.3.1 Browsing Current
Alarms.
Step 2 Cause 2: The network is unstable.
1. Check for jitters and delays on the network. Query service performance statistics. For
details, see 4.3.3 Browsing Current Performance Events.
2. Analyze service performance statistics. If the network is unstable, rectify the faults on the
network, or switch the affected services to a stable network.
Step 3 Cause 3: NEs on the service path are abnormal.
1. Query alarms reported by the NEs on the service path. For details, see 4.3.1 Browsing
Current Alarms.
2. Handle the alarms. For details, see A.3 Alarms and Handling Procedures.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
382
A.3.38 CES_APS_INDI
Description
The CES_APS_INDI is an alarm indicating the status of the packet linear MSP. This alarm is
reported when the configured packet linear MSP is in the switching state.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the MSP protection group.
Impact on the System
l When this alarm occurs, automatic protection switching or switching triggered by an
external command occurs. As a result, services are switched to the protection channel for
transmission.
l This alarm does not affect the services. If the protection channel fails at this time, the
services are interrupted.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: An external command is issued to trigger switching (such as manual switching,
forced switching, exercise switching, and lockout of switching).
l Cause 2: There is an alarm (such as the R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, B2_EXC, or B2_SD
alarm) or a cold reset that triggers automatic MSP switching.
l Cause 3: The attributes of the MSP protection group are incorrectly configured.
l Cause 4: The interface board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: An external command is issued to trigger switching (such as manual switching, forced
switching, exercise switching, and lockout of switching).
1. Check the switching status of the protection group.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
383
If... Then...
The MSP is in the state of manual
switching, forced switching, or exercise
switching
Clear the switching status. Check whether
the alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists,
go to Step 2.
The MSP is not in any of the preceding
switching state
Go to Step 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: There is an alarm (such as the R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, B2_EXC, or B2_SD alarm)
or a cold reset that triggers automatic MSP switching.
1. Check whether the protection group is in the automatic switching state.
If... Then...
The local NE reports the R_LOS,
R_LOF, MS_AIS, or B2_EXC alarm
The MSP protection group changes to the
switching state, and the CES_APS_INDI alarm
is reported. Clear the alarm immediately. Then
check whether the CES_APS_INDI alarm is
cleared.
If the alarm persists, go to the next step.
The local NE reports the B2_SD alarm Clear the alarm immediately. Then check
whether the CES_APS_INDI alarm is cleared.
If the alarm persists, go to the next step.
The interface board is in the cold
resetting state
After the cold resetting ends, go to step 3 and
identify the cause of the cold resetting.
The MSP is not in any of the preceding
switching state
Go to the next step.
2. Check the method for setting the revertive mode of the protection group.
If... Then...
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive After the working channel recovers, the
services are automatically switched from the
protection channel to the working channel once
the preset wait to restore (WTR) time expires.
The CES_APS_INDI alarm will be cleared
after the switching succeeds.
Wait until the MSP protection group changes
from the switching status to the normal status.
Then check whether the CES_APS_INDI
alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists, go to Step
3.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
384
If... Then...
Revertive Mode is set to Non-
Revertive
The services are not switched from the
protection channel to the working channel after
the working channel recovers, and the
CES_APS_INDI alarm persists.
To clear the CES_APS_INDI alarm, manually
switch the services from the protection channel
to the working channel. Then go to the next
step.
3. After the manual switching succeeds, check whether the alarm is cleared. If the alarm
persists, go to Step 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The attributes of the MSP protection group are incorrectly configured.
1. If the packet linear MSP is configured on a per-NE basis, check whether the MSP
parameters such as the protection type, switching mode, and mapping unit are configured
correctly. If any of the preceding parameter values are incorrect, change the values and
apply correct settings to the NE. For details, see Configuring Linear MSP.
2. Check whether the alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists, go to Step 4.
Step 4 Cause 4: The interface board is faulty.
1. Check whether the interface board that is configured with the packet linear MSP is
functioning properly.
2. If a hardware alarm such as HARD_BAD occurs on the interface board, clear the alarm
immediately.
3. Replace the interface board. For details, see 6 Part Replacement.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.39 CES_APS_MANUAL_STOP
Description
The CES_APS_MANUAL_STOP is an alarm indicating that the packet linear MSP protocol is
stopped manually. This alarm is reported when the packet linear MSP protocol is stopped
manually.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
385
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the MSP protection group.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, the packet linear MSP protocol is stopped and the MSP fails. As a result,
STM-1 services cannot be protected.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The APS protocol for the corresponding protection group is manually stopped.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The APS protocol for the corresponding protection group is manually stopped.
1. Determine the ID of the MSP protection group whose APS protocol is stopped according
to alarm parameters.
2. Restart the MSP protocol for the protection group.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.40 CES_JTROVR_EXC
Description
The CES_JTROVR_EXC is an alarm indicating that the number of jitter buffer overflows
crosses the specified threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that, the number of
jitter buffer overflows per second crosses the specified threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
386
Impact on the System
The buffer area does not have sufficient space for the received frames. As a result, packets are
discarded.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The size of buffer area is set to a low value.
l Cause 2: The PSN network clocks used for the transmission of CES services are not
synchronized.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The size of buffer area is set to a low value.
1. Query the size of buffer area. For details, see Querying CES Service Information.
2. Determine whether the size can be increased according to network planning. If yes, change
the size to a greater value. For details, see Managing CES Services.
Step 2 Cause 2: The PSN network clocks used for the transmission of CES services are not
synchronized.
1. Synchronize the PSN network clock by setting clock synchronization, reducing
transmission nodes, and optimizing transmission routes.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.41 CES_JTRUDR_EXC
Description
The CES_JTRUDR_EXC is an alarm indicating that the number of jitter buffer underflows
crosses the specified threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that, within a period
(10s), the number of jitter buffer underflows per second crosses the specified threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, no packets are available in the buffer area for transmission. As a result,
underflows occur in the buffer area.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
387
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link.
l Cause 2: The PSN network clocks used for the transmission of CES services are not
synchronized.
l Cause 3: The link is looped.
l Cause 4: The link is congested.
l Cause 5: The size of buffer area is set to a low value.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link.
1. Troubleshoot the link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.
Step 2 Cause 2: The PSN network clocks used for the transmission of CES services are not
synchronized.
1. Synchronize the PSN network clock by setting clock synchronization, reducing
transmission nodes, and optimizing transmission routes.
Step 3 Cause 3: The link is looped.
1. Release the loop.
Step 4 Cause 4: The link is congested.
1. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or
eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.
Step 5 Cause 5: The size of buffer area is set to a low value.
1. Query the size of buffer area. For details, see Querying CES Service Information.
2. Determine whether the size can be increased according to network planning. If yes, change
the size to a greater value. For details, see Managing CES Services.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.42 CES_K1_K2_M
Description
The CES_K1_K2_M is an alarm indicating that the K1 byte and K2 byte of the packet MSP
mismatch. This alarm is reported when the channel numbers indicated in the transmitted K1 byte
and the received K2 byte are inconsistent and the inconsistency lasts for a period of time (160
ms by default).
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
388
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, MSP fails. If a fiber cut or another fault occurs at this time, services
may be interrupted.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: MSP is incorrectly configured.
l Cause 2: The interface board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: MSP is incorrectly configured.
1. Check whether the MSP configurations are consistent between the local and opposite NEs.
For example, ensure that the other end is configured as the working unit if one end of a
fiber is configured as the working unit; otherwise, the CES_K1_K2_M alarm is reported.
2. Ensure that MSP is configured correctly. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If the
alarm persists, go to Step 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The interface board is faulty.
1. Check whether the interface boards on which MSP is configured are functioning properly
on the local and opposite NEs.
2. If a hardware alarm such as HARD_BAD occurs on the interface board, clear the alarm
immediately.
3. If the alarm persists, replace the interface board. For details, see 6.10 Replacing the System
Control, Switching and Timing Board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.43 CES_K2_M
Description
The CES_K2_M is an alarm indicating that a mismatched K2 byte of the packet MSP is detected.
This alarm is reported when the protection mode used on the opposite NE, which is indicated
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
389
by bit 5 of the received K2 byte, is different from that used on the local NE for a period of time
(2s by default).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, MSP fails. If a fiber cut or another fault occurs at this time, services
may be interrupted.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: Different protection modes are configured at both ends of a protection group.
l Cause 2: The interface board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Different protection modes are configured at both ends of a protection group.
1. Check whether the same protection mode is configured at both ends of a protection group.
If 1+1 protection is configured at one end and 1:N protection is configured at the other end,
the CES_K2_M alarm is reported. For details, see Creating a Packet-based Linear MSP
Group.
Step 2 Cause 2: The interface board is faulty.
1. Check whether the interface boards on which MSP is configured are functioning properly
on the local and opposite NEs.
2. If a hardware alarm such as HARD_BAD occurs on the interface board, clear the alarm
immediately.
3. If the alarm persists, replace the interface board. For details, see 6.10 Replacing the System
Control, Switching and Timing Board.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
390
A.3.44 CES_LOSPKT_EXC
Description
The CES_LOSPKT_EXC is an alarm indicating that the number of lost packets of CES services
crosses the threshold in a time unit. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number
of lost packets per second crosses the specified threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, all 1s are inserted and services are interrupted.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link.
l Cause 2: The link is looped.
l Cause 3: The link is congested.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link.
1. Troubleshoot the link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.
Step 2 Cause 2: The link is looped.
1. Release the loop.
Step 3 Cause 3: The link is congested.
1. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or
eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.
----End
Related Information
Packets are lost when the sequence numbers of received packets are greater than expected.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
391
A.3.45 CES_MALPKT_EXC
Description
The CES_MALPKT_EXC is an alarm indicating that, in a time unit, the number of deformed
frames in CES services crosses the threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the
number of deformed frames in CES services crosses the specified threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
A deformed frame is discarded once it is detected. As a result, the packet loss rate increases and
services are affected.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The RTP head enabling status is different between the two ends of the PW.
l Cause 2: Bit errors occur on the link.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The RTP head enabling status is different between the two ends of the PW.
1. Set the RTP head enabling status to the same on the two ends of the PW. For details, see
Modifying CES Service Parameters.
Step 2 Cause 2: Bit errors occur on the link.
1. Troubleshoot the link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.
----End
Related Information
If a CESoPSN frame contains valid TDM data and does not contain any error indication, but the
size of the CESoPSN frame is not consistent with the specified size, a deformed CESoPSN frame
is generated.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
392
A.3.46 CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC
Description
The CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC is an alarm indicating that, in a unit time, the number of lost
disordered packets crosses the specified threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects
that the number of lost disordered packets per second crosses the specified threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The packets are disordered. As a result, the packet loss rate increases and services are affected.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link.
l Cause 2: The link is looped.
l Cause 3: The link is congested.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link.
1. See 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.
Step 2 Cause 2: The link is looped.
1. Release the loop.
Step 3 Cause 3: The link is congested.
1. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or
eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.
----End
Related Information
Packets are disordered when the sequence numbers of received packets are smaller than
expected.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
393
A.3.47 CES_RDI
Description
The CES_RDI is an alarm of remote defect indication. When the CES_LOSPKT_EXC alarm is
reported at the remote end, the remote end sets the R bit in control word to 1. Upon receiving a
packet in which the R bit is 1, the local end reports the CES_RDI alarm.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The packet loss rate at the remote end crosses the specified threshold.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link.
l Cause 2: The link is looped.
l Cause 3: The link is congested.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link.
1. See 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.
Step 2 Cause 2: The link is looped.
1. Release the loop.
Step 3 Cause 3: The link is congested.
1. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or
eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
394
A.3.48 CES_STRAYPKT_EXC
Description
The CES_STRAYPKT_EXC is an alarm indicating that, in a time unit, the number of error
packets in CES services crosses the threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the
number of error packets in CES services per second crosses the specified threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
An error packet is discarded once it is detected. As a result, the packet loss rate increases and
services are affected.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: Links are misconnected.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Links are misconnected.
1. Check the link configuration and rectify the fault.
----End
Related Information
Incorrect packets are received when the tracing source field in the RTP head is different from
expected.
A.3.49 CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT
Description
The CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT is an alarm indicating that the AC circuit on the remote
NE is faulty. On detection of an AC circuit fault, the remote NE sets the L bit in the control word
to 1. When receiving a packet in which the L bit is 1, the local NE reports the
CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT alarm.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
395
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, services are interrupted.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The remote NE reports the T_ALOS, UP_E1_AIS, LFA, LMFA, R_LOS, R_LOF, or
MS_AIS alarm.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the remote NE reports the T_ALOS, UP_E1_AIS, LFA, LMFA, R_LOS,
R_LOF, or MS_AIS alarm.
1. If yes, handle these alarms.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.50 CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI
Description
The CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI is a remote alarm indication. On detection of the RAI alarm, the
remote NE sets the L bit of the control word to 0 and the M field of the control word to 10. When
receiving the packet in which the L bit is 0 and the M field is 10, the local NE reports the
CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI alarm.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
396
Impact on the System
The services in the downstream direction of the remote NE are interrupted.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The remote NE detects the RAI alarm.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The remote NE detects the RAI alarm.
1. Clear the ALM_E1RAI alarm on the remote NE.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.51 CFCARD_FAILED
Description
The CFCARD_FAILED is an alarm indicating that the operation on the CF card fails.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the CFCARD_FAILED alarm occurs, the database cannot be backed up to the CF card
or be restored from the CF card. This alarm may cause rollback of the package loading upgrade.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The CF card fails to be initialized.
l Cause 2: The file system of the CF card does not match.
l Cause 3: The system control and communication board is faulty, and the file system of the
CF card fails to be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The CF card fails to be initialized.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
397
Cause 2: The file system of the CF card does not match.
1. Replace the CF card and check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
Yes End the alarm handling.
No Go to Cause 3.
Step 2 Cause 3: The system control and communication board is faulty, and the file system of the CF
card fails to be created.
1. Check whether the HARD_BAD alarm occurs on the system control and communication
board.
2. If yes, perform a cold reset on the system control and communication board. Then, check
whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
Yes End the alarm handling.
No Replace the system control and communication board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.52 CFCARD_OFFLINE
Description
The CFCARD_OFFLINE is an alarm indicating that the CF card is offline.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the CFCARD_OFFLINE alarm occurs, the database cannot be backed up to the CF card
or be restored from the CF card. This alarm may cause rollback of the package loading upgrade.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The CF card is not inserted.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
398
l Cause 2: The CF card is in poor contact with the system control and communication board.
l Cause 3: The CF card is faulty.
l Cause 4: The system control and communication board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The CF card is not inserted.
1. Check whether the CF card is installed on the system control and communication board.
If... Then...
No Install the CF card.
Yes Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The CF card is in poor contact with the system control and communication board.
1. Check whether the CF card is loosened. If yes, re-insert the CF card.
2. Check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
Yes End the alarm handling.
No Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The CF card is faulty.
1. Replace the CF card.
2. Check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
Yes End the alarm handling.
No Go to Cause 4.
Step 4 Cause 4: The system control and communication board is faulty.
1. Check whether the HARD_BAD alarm occurs on the system control and communication
board.
2. If yes, perform a cold reset on the system control and communication board. Then, check
whether the alarm is cleared.
3. If the alarm persists, replace the system control and communication board.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
399
A.3.53 CHCS
Description
The CHCS is an alarm indicating the correctable cell error. When a correctable bit error is
detected in the cell header, the CHCS alarm occurs.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the CHCS alarm occurs, the services are not affected. The alarm only indicates that some
cells with a bit error are detected during cell delimitation at the ATM port.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: A few bit errors occur in the receive tunnel corresponding to the alarmed ATM
port.
l Cause 2: The ATM physical-layer processing chip of the board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A few bit errors occur in the receive tunnel corresponding to the alarmed ATM port.
1. On the NMS, check whether the receive tunnel reports any alarms about excessive bit errors,
such as B1_SD, B2_SD, and B3_SD.
2. On the NMS, check whether the service is looped.
3. If yes, modify the service configuration to release the loop, and then check whether the
alarm is cleared.
Step 2 Cause 2: The ATM physical-layer processing chip of the board is faulty.
1. Perform a cold reset on the board that reports the CHCS alarm and check whether the alarm
is cleared. For details, see 8.6.1 Cold Reset.
2. Optional: If the CHCS alarm persists after the cold reset, replace the alarmed board and
check whether the alarm is cleared. For details, see 6.6 Replacing the Smart E1 Interface
Board.
NOTE
Board replacement is not recommended because the alarm does not affect the services.
----End
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
400
Related Information
None.
A.3.54 CLK_LOCK_FAIL
Description
The CLK_LOCK_FAIL is an alarm indicating a clock locking failure.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1
l 0x01: indicates that the phase-locked loop (PLL) is in holdover or free-run
mode.
l 0x02: indicates that the timestamp in the Sync message remains the same in
Precision Time Protocol (PTP) synchronization mode.
l 0x03: indicates that the phase discrimination value within the given time has
crossed the upper threshold.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, the clock of the slave NE fails to trace that of the master NE, and bit
errors may occur.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: Frequency deviation of the clock source has crossed the upper threshold in physical
synchronization mode.
l Cause 2: The physical link where the clock source resides is faulty in physical
synchronization mode.
l Cause 3: Frequency deviation of the clock source has crossed the upper threshold in IEEE
1588v2 synchronization mode.
l Cause 4: The physical link where the clock source resides is faulty in IEEE 1588v2
synchronization mode.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
401
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Frequency deviation of the clock source has crossed the upper threshold in physical
synchronization mode.
1. Check whether high-level bit error alarms or performance events have been reported on
the NMS. If yes, handle them immediately.
2. If there is an external clock source, check whether its clock signals are normal. If no, replace
the external clock source. For details, see Configuring the Clock Sources.
3. Check whether clock configurations are correct. For example, if the input and output modes
of the external clock source do not match each other, modify the configurations. For details,
see Modifying the Parameters of the Clock Output.
Step 2 Cause 2: The physical link where the clock source resides is faulty in physical synchronization
mode.
1. If there is an external clock source, check whether the NE reports the SYNC_C_LOS alarm.
If yes, clear the alarm immediately.
2. If the CLK_LOCK_FAIL alarm persists, 6.10 Replacing the System Control, Switching
and Timing Board.
Step 3 Cause 3: Frequency deviation of the clock source has crossed the upper threshold in IEEE 1588v2
synchronization mode.
1. Check whether high-level bit error alarms or performance events have been reported on
the NMS. If yes, handle them immediately.
2. If there is an external clock source, check whether its clock signals are normal. If no, replace
the IEEE 1588v2 clock port. For details, see Replacing the IEEE 1588v2 Clock Port.
Step 4 Cause 4: The physical link where the clock source resides is faulty in IEEE 1588v2
synchronization mode.
1. If the SYN_BAD alarm exists, clear the alarm immediately.
2. If the alarm persists, contact Huawei technical support engineers to handle the alarm.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.55 CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE
Description
The CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE alarm indicates that a clock source is not in locked mode. This
alarm is reported when the current clock does not trace any clock sources.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
402
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1
Indicates the clock mode.
l 0x01: holdover
l 0x02: free-run
Impact on the System
When the clock source is not in the locked mode, the system clock is not of high quality. Services
may have bit errors when the clocks of the NEs are not synchronized. Pointer justification may
occur in TDM services. If a base station traces a clock that is carried by an Ethernet service, an
alarm indicating a large clock frequency deviation may occur.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The system clock source priority table is not configured.
l Cause 2: All the clock sources in the clock source priority table fail.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The system clock source priority table is not configured.
1. Configure the system clock source priority table. For details, see Configuring the Clock
Sources.
Step 2 Cause 2: All the clock sources in the clock source priority table fail.
1. Troubleshoot the synchronization sources that are listed in the clock source priority table.
If... Then...
The synchronization source is an
external clock
Handle the EXT_SYNC_LOS alarm.
The synchronization source is a line
clock
Handle the alarm that occurs on the line
board.
The synchronization source is an IF
clock
Handle the alarm that occurs on the IF board.
The synchronization source is a
tributary clock
Handle the alarm that occurs on the tributary
board.
The synchronization source is an
Ethernet clock
Handle the alarm that occurs on the Ethernet
board.
----End
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
403
Related Information
None.
A.3.56 COMMUN_FAIL
Description
The COMMUN_FAIL is an alarm indicating the inter-board communication failure. This alarm
is reported when the communication between a board and the SCC board is interrupted.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1
Indicates the ID of the port. The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3
Indicates the ID of the path on which the alarm is generated.
Parameter 2 is always 0x00. Parameter 3 has the following
meanings:
0x03: inter-board Ethernet communication
Parameter 4, Parameter 5
Parameters 4 and 5 are reserved, and their values are always 0xFF.
Impact on the System
The NE configuration cannot be delivered to the board or the board cannot work. Consequently,
the services cannot be configured or the protection switching function is unavailable.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: A certain board is reset.
l Cause 2: A board and the backplane are connected improperly.
l Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty.
l Cause 4: A slot is faulty.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
404
l Cause 5: When the active and standby system control boards switch over, communication
between them are interrupted transiently.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A certain board is reset.
1. After you reset the board, the alarm is cleared automatically.
Step 2 Cause 2: A board and the backplane are connected improperly.
1. Remove and insert the alarmed board. For details, see 6.1 Removing a Board and 6.2
Inserting a Board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the board is
removed and inserted
The fault is rectified. End the alarm
handling.
The alarm persists after the board is
replaced.
Clear the alarm according to the solution
for the alarm that is generated when a
board is faulty.
Step 3 Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty.
1. Replace the alarmed board, and then check whether the alarm is cleared. For details, see 6
Part Replacement.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the board is
replaced
The fault is rectified. End the alarm
handling.
The alarm persists after the board is
replaced
Clear the alarm according to the solution
for the alarm that is generated when a slot
is faulty.
Step 4 Cause 3: A slot is faulty.
1. Contact Huawei engineers to handle the faulty slot.
NOTE
The slot becomes faulty due to broken pins or bent pins. Remove the board, and use a torch to check
whether any pins are broken or bent.
2. If a vacant slot is available, insert the board in the vacant slot, and then update the data
on the NMS so that the board can work normally.
Step 5 Cause 5: When the active and standby system control boards switch over, communication
between them are interrupted transiently.
1. It is normal that this alarm is reported during the switchover, so this alarm does not need
to be handled.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
405
A.3.57 COM_EXTECC_FULL
Description
The COM_EXTECC_FULL is an alarm indicating an excessive number of TCP connections
between automatically extended ECC NEs.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameters 1 to 5
The value is always 0x00.
Impact on the System
An excessive number of extended ECC NEs impacts NE performance.
Possible Causes
The number of TCP connections between automatically extended ECC NEs is larger than four.
Procedure
Step 1 Set ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode by referring to Configuring Extended ECC
Communication.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.58 CONFIG_NOSUPPORT
Description
The CONFIG_NOSUPPORT is an alarm indicating that the configuration is not supported. This
alarm is reported if the ODU detects that the specified parameters do not meet the requirements
of the ODU.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
406
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates that the configuration data does not meet the requirements.
l 0x01: The frequency is set incorrectly.
l 0x02: The T/R spacing is set incorrectly.
l 0x03: The transmit power is set incorrectly.
l 0x04: The ATPC threshold is set incorrectly.
l 0x05: The bandwidth is set incorrectly.
l 0x06: The modulation mode is set incorrectly.
Impact on the System
When the CONFIG_NOSUPPORT alarm occurs, the ODU fails to work normally. If the
equipment is configured with the 1+1 FD protection, the active ODU generates the
CONFIG_NOSUPPORT alarm. In this case, the IF 1+1 protection switching may be triggered.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The type and configuration parameters of the ODU do not match the requirements.
l Cause 2: The AM parameters are incorrectly changed. (This cause can be verified only
when Parameter 1 is 0x03.)
NOTE
Perform the handling procedure of Cause 2 if the following conditions are met: The AM function is enabled
on the radio link; the transmit power configured for the ODU is lower than the maximum rated power in
AM guaranteed capacity mode.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The type and configuration parameters of the ODU do not match the requirements.
1. Determine the parameter that does not meet the requirement according to the alarm
parameter. Then, handle the fault accordingly.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
407
If... Then...
The alarm parameter takes a value from
0x01 to 0x03
Perform the operation described in Step
1.2.
The alarm parameter takes a value from
0x04 to 0x06
Perform the operation described in Step
1.3.
2. Check whether the parameters of the ODU interface meet the requirements of network
planning. For details, see Configuring a Single-Hop Radio Link.
If... Then...
The parameters meet the requirements of
network planning
Use the ODU of the proper model.
The parameters do not meet the
requirements of network planning
Modify the ODU interface parameters.
3. Check whether the parameters of the IF interface meet the requirements of network
planning. For details, see Configuring a Single-Hop Radio Link.
If... Then...
The parameters meet the requirements of
network planning
Replace the IF board.
The parameters do not meet the
requirements of network planning
Modify the IF interface parameters. For
details, see Configuring a Single-Hop
Radio Link.
Step 2 Cause 2: The AM parameters are incorrectly changed. (This cause can be verified only when
Parameter 1 is 0x03.)
1. Verify that the alarm is caused by incorrect change of AM parameters.
Perform the handling procedure of Cause 2 if the following conditions are met:
l The AM function is enabled on the radio link.
l The transmit power configured for the ODU is lower than the maximum rated power in
AM guaranteed capacity mode
If... Then...
The conditions are met and the transmit
power needs to be changed
Perform a cold reset for the alarmed
ODU.
The conditions are met but the transmit
power does not need to be changed
Change the parameters of ODU interfaces
to recover the original value of transmit
power.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
408
A.3.59 DBMS_DELETE
Description
The DBMS_DELETE alarm indicates that a database is being deleted. This alarm is reported
when a user runs a command to delete the database and the NE is in Deleting Database state.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm
Parameters
None
Impact on the System
All data is lost if an NE is powered off or a system control board is cold reset within 48 hours.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: A database is deleted.
Procedure
Step 1 Follow instructions in 7.4 Restoring the Database by NMS to restore the database.
----End
Related Information
None
A.3.60 DBMS_ERROR
Description
The DBMS_ERROR is an alarm indicating that errors occur in the processing of the system
database.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Processing alarm
Parameters
None.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
409
Impact on the System
When the DBMS_ERROR alarm occurs, it indicates that errors occur in the system database
processing. The system configuration may be lost. As a result, the failure indication is returned
for certain query and setting commands, and certain system functions cannot work.
Possible Causes
Cause: The database processing fails or the database is damaged.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain NE backup data (backed up periodically by the U2000 or backed up manually) or NE
service configuration information.
Step 2 Contact Huawei technical support engineers for handling the alarm.
Step 3 In case of emergency, 6.10 Replacing the System Control, Switching and Timing Board and
restore the database or reconfigure service data.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.61 DBMS_PROTECT_MODE
Description
The DBMS_PROTECT_MODE is an alarm indicating that the system database is in protection
mode.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Processing alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, it indicates that errors occur in the system database processing and the
system configuration may be lost. As a result, the failure indication is returned for some query
and setting commands, and some system functions are unavailable.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The database enters the protection mode due to frequent resets of the NE software.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
410
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The database enters the protection mode due to frequent resets of the NE software.
1. 6.10 Replacing the System Control, Switching and Timing Board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.62 DCNSIZE_OVER
Description
The DCNSIZE_OVER is an alarm indicating an over-sized DCN network.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2 If these parameters are 0xFF 0xFF, the NE works in L2DCN mode.
Otherwise, these parameters indicate the current size of the DCN
subnet.
Impact on the System
l Some NEs become unreachable to the NMS because DCN packets cannot be forwarded
timely due to insufficient CPU resources.
l The DCN network is prone to route flapping and storms.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The number of NEs on an L3 DCN subnet exceeds 400.
Cause 2: The number of NEs equipped with CSH/CST boards on an L2 DCN subnet exceeds
30.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
411
Procedure
Step 1 Replan the DCN network based on actual networking conditions.
----End
A.3.63 DDN_LFA
Description
The DDN_LFA is an alarm indicating loss of basic frame alignment for framed E1 services.
This alarm occurs when DDN (digital data network) side fails to receive the basic frame
alignment signal for framed E1 services.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
E1 services on the alarmed board are unavailable.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The interconnected user equipment is faulty.
l Cause 2: The service frame format is configured incorrectly.
l Cause 3: The alarmed board has hardware faults.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The interconnected user equipment is faulty.
1. Troubleshoot the interconnected user equipment.
Step 2 Cause 2: The service frame format is configured incorrectly.
1. Set the E1 frame format of the local port to the same as that of the opposite port.
Step 3 Cause 3: The alarmed board has hardware faults.
1. Check whether the alarmed board also reports any hardware alarms, such as
HARD_BAD.
2. If yes, perform a cold reset on the alarmed board and check whether the DDN_LFA alarm
is cleared.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
412
NOTICE
If the service on the alarmed board is not protected, a cold reset on the board causes service
interruptions.
3. If the alarm persists, replace the board.
----End
Related Information
Basic frame
As defined in ITU-T G.704, a basic frame is an even frame with frame alignment sequence (FAS)
or an odd frame with non frame alignment sequence (NFAS).
A.3.64 DOWN_E1_AIS
Description
The DOWN_E1_AIS is an alarm of the 2 Mbit/s downlink signal. This alarm occurs when the
tributary board detects the 2 Mbit/s downlink signal of all 1s.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the DOWN_E1_AIS alarm occurs, the E1 signal in the alarmed path is unavailable.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The opposite NE transmits the E1_AIS alarm.
l Cause 2: An upstream alarm triggers this alarm.
l Cause 3: On the local NE, the receive unit of the tributary board or the system control and
cross-connect board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE transmits the E1_AIS alarm.
1. Check whether the opposite NE reports the UP_E1_AIS or T_ALOS alarm.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
413
If... Then...
The opposite NE reports the UP_E1_AIS
or T_ALOS alarm
Clear the alarm immediately.
The opposite NE does not report the
UP_E1_AIS or T_ALOS alarm
Ensure that the board on the local NE is
normal.
Step 2 Cause 2: An upstream alarm triggers this alarm.
1. Clear the following upstream alarms immediately if there are any.
Upstream alarms that may cause a DOWN_E1_AIS alarm include R_LOS, R_LOF,
MS_AIS, AU_AIS, AU_LOP, MW_LOF, MW_LIM, R_LOF, MS_AIS, AU_AIS,
AU_LOP, MW_LOF, MW_LIM, and R_LOF.
Step 3 Cause 3: On the local NE, the receive unit of the tributary board or the system control and cross-
connect board is faulty.
1. Replace the board where the alarmed tributary unit is located. Then, check whether
the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Replace the system control and cross-connect board on the
local NE.
----End
Related Information
If EFP8 reports the alarm, the alarm parameters have the meanings listed in Table A-6.
Table A-6 Alarm Parameters of EFP8
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 0x01, indicates optical interface number.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicates the number of the path.

A.3.65 DROPRATIO_OVER
Description
The DROPRATIO_OVER alarm indicates that the number of lost packets crosses the threshold
when queue congestion occurs at a port. This alarm is reported when the ratio of lost packets on
an object under performance monitoring is higher than the expected ratio.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
414
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
Parameters
Name Meaning
Parameter 1
Indicates the direction in which traffic crosses the threshold.
l 0x00: The ratio of lost packets in the receive direction exceeds the threshold.
l 0x01: The ratio of lost packets in the transmit direction exceeds the threshold.
Impact on the System
Service packet loss occurs.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: Service configuration is incorrect.
l Cause 2: Actual traffic exceeds the configured port bandwidth or committed information
rate (CIR).
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Service configuration is incorrect.
1. Check and reconfigure services according to the network plan.
Step 2 Cause 2: Actual traffic exceeds the configured port bandwidth or CIR.
1. 4.6.2 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization. If traffic is
large, check whether a network storm has occurred, and eliminate the source that illegally
sends a large amount of data.
2. If the port bandwidth is too low, follow instructions in Modifying the Port Policy to increase
port bandwidth or expand the network.
----End
Related Information
If packet loss is indicated in the receive direction, check the method of handling red packets in
the traffic classification configuration. If the method of handling red packets is non-discard,
packets may not be actually lost in the receive direction.
A.3.66 E1_LOC
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
415
Description
The E1_LOC is an alarm indicating that the uplink 2M clock is lost. This alarm occurs when
the tributary board fails to extract the clock from the E1 signal.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the E1_LOC occurs, the service is not affected.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The opposite NE is faulty.
l Cause 2: The wiring sequence of the cable is incorrect.
l Cause 3: The receive unit of the tributary board on the local NE is faulty.
l Cause 4: The input E1 signal has an abnormal waveform.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE is faulty.
1. Rectify the fault on the opposite NE.
Step 2 Cause 2: The wiring sequence of the cable is incorrect.
1. Redo the cable.
Step 3 Cause 3: The receive unit of the tributary board on the local NE is faulty.
1. Replace the board where the line unit is located.
Step 4 Cause 4: The input E1 signal has an abnormal waveform.
1. Check whether any external interference causes the abnormal waveform of the E1 signal.
If... Then...
There is the external interference The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling.
There is no external interference Contact Huawei engineers.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
416
A.3.67 E1_LOS
Description
The E1_LOS is an alarm indicating the loss of the E1 signal. This alarm occurs when the tributary
board detects the uplink E1 signal of all 0s.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the E1_LOS alarm occurs, the E1 service is interrupted.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The cable is not connected or the cable is faulty.
l Cause 2: The opposite NE is faulty.
l Cause 3: The tributary board on the local NE is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The cable is not connected or the cable is faulty.
1. Check whether the cable is connected properly.
If... Then...
The cable is not connected properly Connect the cable properly.
The cable is prepared incorrectly Redo the cable.
Step 2 Cause 2: The opposite NE is faulty.
1. Rectify the fault on the opposite NE.
Step 3 Cause 3: The tributary board on the local NE is faulty.
1. Replace the board where the tributary unit is located.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
417
A.3.68 ELAN_SMAC_FLAPPING
Description
The ELAN_SMAC_FLAPPING alarm indicates that the source MAC address learned by a
bridge-based or PW-carried E-LAN service flaps. This alarm is reported when two ports that
carry a bridge-based or PW-carried E-LAN service learn the same source MAC address.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Service alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameters 1 to 6
Indicate the source MAC address that flaps.
Parameter 7, Parameter 8
Indicate the VLAN ID.
Parameter 9
Indicate the type of the port that learns the source MAC address
before the flapping occurs.
l 0: UNI
l 1: NNI
Parameters 10 to 13
Indicate the ID of the UNI or NNI that learns the source MAC
address before the flapping occurs.
Parameter 14
Indicate the type of the port that learns the source MAC address
after the flapping occurs.
l 0: UNI
l 1: NNI
Parameters 15 to 18
Indicate the ID of the UNI or NNI that learns the source MAC
address after the flapping occurs.
Impact on the System
A network storm may occur.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
418
Possible Causes
Cause: A loop exists on a UNI or NNI that carries the E-LAN service.
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the E-LAN service according to the service ID on the NMS.
Step 2 Check the E-LAN service path by referring to instructions in Detecting an E-LAN Service Loop.
----End
Related Information
None
A.3.69 ENVHUM_SENSOR_FAIL
Description
The ENVHUM_SENSOR_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the ambient humidity sensor of the
cabinet fails.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The ambient humidity data of the PMU cannot be collected.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The ambient humidity sensor is faulty.
l Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty.
l Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged.
l Cause 4: The ambient humidity sensor is not installed.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The ambient humidity sensor is faulty.
1. Replace the ambient humidity sensor.
2. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
419
If... Then...
The alarm clears End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty.
1. Replace the cabinet.
2. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm clears End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged.
1. Replace damaged cables.
2. Connect cables correctly.
Step 4 Cause 4: The ambient humidity sensor is not installed.
1. Install the ambient humidity sensor.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.70 ENVTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL
Description
The ENVTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the ambient temperature sensor of
the cabinet fails.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The ambient temperature data of the TCU cannot be collected.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
420
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The ambient temperature sensor is faulty.
l Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty.
l Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged.
l Cause 4: The ambient temperature sensor is not installed.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The ambient temperature sensor is faulty.
1. Replace the ambient temperature sensor.
2. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm clears End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty.
1. Replace the cabinet.
2. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm clears End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged.
1. Replace damaged cables.
2. Connect cables correctly.
Step 4 Cause 4: The ambient temperature sensor is not installed.
1. Install the ambient temperature sensor.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.71 ENVTEMP1_SENSOR_FAIL
Description
The ENVTEMP1_SENSOR_FAIL is an alarm indicating that ambient temperature sensor 1 of
the cabinet fails.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
421
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
Ambient temperature data 1 of the PMU cannot be collected.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: Ambient temperature sensor 1 is faulty.
l Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty.
l Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged.
l Cause 4: Ambient temperature sensor 1 is not installed.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Ambient temperature sensor 1 is faulty.
1. Replace ambient temperature sensor 1.
2. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm clears End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty.
1. Replace the cabinet.
2. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm clears End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged.
1. Replace damaged cables.
2. Connect cables correctly.
Step 4 Cause 4: Ambient temperature sensor 1 is not installed.
1. Install ambient temperature sensor 1.
----End
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
422
Related Information
None.
A.3.72 ENVTEMP2_SENSOR_FAIL
Description
The ENVTEMP2_SENSOR_FAIL is an alarm indicating that ambient temperature sensor 2 of
the cabinet fails.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
Ambient temperature data 2 of the PMU cannot be collected.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: Ambient temperature sensor 2 is faulty.
l Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty.
l Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged.
l Cause 4: Ambient temperature sensor 2 is not installed.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Ambient temperature sensor 2 is faulty.
1. Replace ambient temperature sensor 2.
2. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm clears End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty.
1. Replace the cabinet.
2. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
423
If... Then...
The alarm clears End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged.
1. Replace damaged cables.
2. Connect cables correctly.
Step 4 Cause 4: Ambient temperature sensor 2 is not installed.
1. Install ambient temperature sensor 2.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.73 ERPS_IN_PROTECTION
Description
ERPS_IN_PROTECTION indicates that EPRS ring is in protection mode.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment Alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 - Parameter 2 ERPS ID.
Parameter 3 DIR, indicating whether the faulty node is in the east or west
direction of the ERPS RPL-OWNER node.
l 0x01: east
l 0x00: west
Parameter 4 - Parameter 9 NODE ID, indicating the MAC address of the faulty node.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
424
Impact on the System
At least one node on the ring is unreachable. Services (if any) on this node may be interrupted.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: This alarm is reported when EPRS switching is triggered by a fault on the ERPS ring.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: This alarm is reported when EPRS switching is triggered by a fault on the ERPS ring.
1. Locate the faulty node on the ERPS ring based on the alarm parameters.
2. Locate the ERPS blocked port on the faulty node.
3. Rectify the fault.
----End
Related Information
This alarm is not reported on an ERPS V2 network where virtual channels are disabled.
A.3.74 ETH_APS_LOST
Description
The ETH_APS_LOST is an alarm indicating that the APS frame is lost. This alarm is reported
when an ingress/egress node of a bidirectional tunnel does not receive any APS frames from the
protection channel.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, the APS protection may fail.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The opposite NE is not configured with the APS protection.
l Cause 2: The APS protection group is deactivated.
l Cause 3: The settings of the APS protection group differ between the two ends.
l Cause 4: The service on the protection channel is interrupted.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
425
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE is not configured with the APS protection.
1. On the NMS, check whether the opposite NE is configured with the APS protection. For
details, see Querying MPLS APS Status.
If... Then...
The opposite NE is not configured with the APS protection Go to the next step.
The opposite NE is configured with the APS protection Go to Cause 2.
2. Create a matching APS protection group on the opposite NE, and activate the APS protocol.
Check whether the alarm clears.
3. If the alarm persists, proceed to cause 4.
Step 2 Cause 2: The APS protection group is deactivated.
1. Check whether the APS protocol is activated at both ends.
If... Then...
The APS protocol is deactivated at one end Activate the APS protocol at the end.
The APS protocol is activated at both ends Go to Cause 3.
2. Check whether the alarm clears. If the alarm persists, go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The settings of the APS protection group differ between the two ends.
1. On the NMS, check whether the settings of the APS protection group are the same at the
two ends. If the settings differ between the two ends, change them to the same. Then,
deactivate and activate the APS protection group at the two ends.
2. Check whether the alarm clears. If the alarm persists, go to Cause 4.
Step 4 Cause 4: The service on the protection channel is interrupted.
1. Check whether the protection channel reports an alarm related to signal loss or signal
degrade, such as ETH_LOS. If yes, clear the alarm immediately.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.75 ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH
Description
The ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the working and protection
paths of the APS protection group differ between the two ends. This alarm is reported when the
working and protection paths of one APS protection group at one end are different from those
at the other end.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
426
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, service protection fails.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The configured working and protection paths differ between the two ends.
l Cause 2: The physical link is connected incorrectly.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The configured working and protection paths differ between the two ends.
1. Check whether the APS settings at the two ends are the same. For details, see Querying
MPLS APS Status.
2. If the APS settings are different, change the settings to the same. Then, deactivate and
activate the APS protection group at the two ends. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
3. If the alarm persists, go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The physical link is connected incorrectly.
1. Check whether the fiber or cable is correctly connected between the two ends. If not,
connect the fiber or cable properly.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.76 ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL
Description
The ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL is an alarm of a protection switching failure. This alarm is
reported when the request signal in the transmitted Automatic Protection Switching (APS) frame
is different from the bridge signal in the received APS frame and this symptom lasts for 50 ms.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
427
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Processing alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, service protection fails.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The settings of the APS protection group differ between the two ends.Cause 2: APS
fails due to other reasons.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The settings of the APS protection group differ between the two ends.
1. Change the settings to the same. For details, see Creating an MPLS APS Protection Group.
Then, deactivate and activate the APS protection group at the two ends.
Step 2 Cause 2: APS fails due to other reasons.
1. Reactivate APS protection at both ends.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.77 ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH
Description
The ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH is an alarm of protection scheme mismatch. This alarm is
reported when the information in the received Automatic Protection Switching (APS) frame is
different from the APS settings at the local end.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
428
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1
Indicates the specific difference.
l 0x01: Indicates that the switching type is different.
l 0x02: Indicates that the switching direction is different.
l 0x03: Indicates that the revertive mode is different.
Impact on the System
This alarm may cause the APS protection failure, and therefore the service protection fails.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The switching type is different.
l Cause 2: The switching direction is different.
l Cause 3: The revertive mode is different.
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the possible cause of the alarm according to the alarm parameters.
1. Change the settings of the APS protection group to the same at the two ends. For details,
see Querying MPLS APS Status. Then, deactivate and activate the APS protection group
at the two ends.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.78 ETH_AUTO_LINK_DOWN
Description
The ETH_AUTO_LINK_DOWN alarm indicates that an Ethernet port is automatically switched
to the link down state upon a fault detected by link-state pass through (LPT).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
429
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The alarmed port cannot carry any services and a switchover may occur on external equipment
connected to the port.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The radio link connected to the alarmed port is faulty.
l Cause 2: The opposite service access port is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The radio link connected to the alarmed port is faulty.
1. Check for MW_LIM, MW_LOF, and MW_RDI alarms on the local and opposite
microwave ports, and clear them if any. Then, check whether the
ETH_AUTO_LINK_DOWN alarm is cleared.
Step 2 Cause 2: The opposite service access port is faulty.
1. Check for ETH_LOS alarm, and optical-module-related alarms on the opposite port, and
clear them if any.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.79 ETH_CFM_AIS
Description
The ETH_CFM_AIS is an alarm indicating that an AIS packet is received by the local MEP.
This alarm is reported when the system receives an AIS packet, which indicates that the Ethernet
server layer is faulty.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
430
Name Meaning
Parameters 1 to 4 (port) Indicate the ID of the port that reports the alarm.
Parameters 5 and 6 (VLAN ID) Indicate the VLAN ID of the MEP.
Parameter 7 (direction) Indicate the direction of the local MEP.
l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction.
l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.
Parameter 8 (level) Indicates the maintenance domain (MD) level of the local
MEP.
l 0x00: operator MEP level (low)
l 0x01: operator MEP level (medium)
l 0x02: operator MEP level (high)
l 0x03: provider MEP level (low)
l 0x04: provider MEP level (high)
l 0x05: consumer MEP level (low)
l 0x06: consumer MEP level (medium)
l 0x07: consumer MEP level (high)
NOTE
Consumer indicates the customer, provider indicates the supplier,
and operator indicates the carrier.
Impact on the System
l When this alarm occurs, the loopback (LB) and link trace (LT) detection functions are
disabled.
l In addition, the service between the relevant standard MEPs may be interrupted.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The upstream NE detects a fault at the Ethernet server layer.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether there is any defect in the Ethernet server layer between source and sink NE.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
431
A.3.80 ETH_CFM_LOC
Description
The ETH_CFM_LOC is an alarm indicating the loss of connectivity. This alarm occurs when
the system fails to receive the CCM packet from the remote MEP in 3.5 connectivity check (CC)
periods successively.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3,
Parameter 4 (Port)
Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
Parameter 5, Parameter 6 (VLAN ID) Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.
Parameter 7 (Direction) Indicates the direction of the local MEP.
l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive.
l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction.
l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.
Parameter 8 (Level) Indicates the MD level of the local MEP.
l 0x00: operator MEP level (low)
l 0x01: operator MEP level (medium)
l 0x02: operator MEP level (high)
l 0x03: provider MEP level (low)
l 0x04: provider MEP level (high)
l 0x05: consumer MEP level (low)
l 0x06: consumer MEP level (medium)
l 0x07: consumer MEP level (high)
NOTE
Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates the
supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.
Parameter 9, Parameter 10 (RMEPID) Indicates the ID of the remote MEP.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
432
Impact on the System
l When the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm occurs, the LB and LT detection functions of Ethernet
service OAM are unavailable.
l The service between the relevant standard MEPs may be interrupted.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The line between the local standard MEP and the remote standard MEP is
interrupted.
l Cause 2: The Ethernet service in the maintenance association (MA) to which the local MEP
belongs is faulty.
l Cause 3: Serious congestion occurs on the network.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line between the local standard MEP and the remote standard MEP is interrupted.
1. Check whether the physical links (such as network cables and fibers) between the standard
MEPs are connected properly.
If... Then...
The physical links are connected improperly Connect the physical links properly.
The physical links are connected properly Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The Ethernet service in the maintenance association (MA) to which the local MEP
belongs is faulty.
1. Check whether Ethernet service in the maintenance association (MA) to which the local
MEP belongs is configured correctly.
If... Then...
The service is configured incorrectly Modify the configuration of the service to ensure
consistency at two ends.
The service is configured correctly Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: Serious congestion occurs on the network.
1. Check the utilization of bandwidth. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth
or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.
----End
Related Information
The Table A-7 describes the meanings of the parameters in the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm reported
by the EoS/EoPDH plane.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
433
Table A-7 Alarm Parameters
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 MD
Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 MA
Parameter 9, Parameter 10 MEP ID
Parameter 11 to Parameter 14 Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
When these parameters indicate the
VCTRUNK ID, parameter values = (0x01 -
0x10) + 0x80.
Parameter 15, Parameter 16 Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.
Parameter 17 Indicates the direction of the local MEP.
l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive.
l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction.
l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.
Parameter 18 Indicates the MD level of the local MEP.
l 0x00: operator MEP level (low)
l 0x01: operator MEP level (medium)
l 0x02: operator MEP level (high)
l 0x03: provider MEP level (low)
l 0x04: provider MEP level (high)
l 0x05: consumer MEP level (low)
l 0x06: consumer MEP level (medium)
l 0x07: consumer MEP level (high)
NOTE
Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates
the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.
Parameter 19, Parameter 20 Indicates the ID of the remote MEP.
NOTE
If the alarmed port is a VCTRUNK, these
parameters are not supported.

A.3.81 ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
Description
The ETH_CFM_MISMERGE is an alarm indicating an incorrect connection. This alarm occurs
when the system receives the CCM packet whose MA mismatches or whose priority is lower.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
434
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3,
Parameter 4 (Port)
Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
Parameter 5, Parameter 6 (VLAN ID) Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.
Parameter 7 (Direction) Indicates the direction of the local MEP.
l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive.
l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction.
l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.
Parameter 8 (Level) Indicates the MD level of the local MEP.
l 0x00: operator MEP level (low)
l 0x01: operator MEP level (medium)
l 0x02: operator MEP level (high)
l 0x03: provider MEP level (low)
l 0x04: provider MEP level (high)
l 0x05: consumer MEP level (low)
l 0x06: consumer MEP level (medium)
l 0x07: consumer MEP level (high)
NOTE
Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates the
supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.
Impact on the System
When the ETH_CFM_MISMERGE alarm occurs, the service between the relevant standard
MEPs may be interrupted, and the data flow may be routed incorrectly.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The names of the maintenance domain and the maintenance alliance that the
standard MEPs correspond to are inconsistent.
l Cause 2: The levels of the maintenance domains that the standard MEPs correspond to are
different.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
435
l Cause 3: The physical connection is incorrect.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The names of the maintenance domain and the maintenance alliance that the standard
MEPs correspond to are inconsistent.
1. Check whether the names of the maintenance domain and the maintenance alliance that the
standard MEPs correspond to are consistent.
If... Then...
The names are inconsistent Set the other names of maintenance domain and
maintenance alliance to ensure consistency at both ends.
The names are consistent Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The levels of the maintenance domains that the standard MEPs correspond to are
different.
1. Check whether the MD levels of the standard MEPs are the same.
If... Then...
The levels are different Set the MD levels again to ensure consistency at both ends.
The levels are the same Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The physical connection is incorrect.
1. Check the physical connection of the Ethernet service route and rectify the fault of the
physical connection if any.
----End
Related Information
The Table A-8 describes the meanings of the parameters in the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm reported
by the EoS/EoPDH plane.
Table A-8 Alarm Parameters
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 MD
Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 MA
Parameter 9, Parameter 10 MEP ID
Parameter 11 to Parameter 14 Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
When these parameters indicate the
VCTRUNK ID, parameter values = (0x01 -
0x10) + 0x80.
Parameter 15, Parameter 16 Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
436
Name Meaning
Parameter 17 Indicates the direction of the local MEP.
l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive.
l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction.
l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.
Parameter 18 Indicates the MD level of the local MEP.
l 0x00: operator MEP level (low)
l 0x01: operator MEP level (medium)
l 0x02: operator MEP level (high)
l 0x03: provider MEP level (low)
l 0x04: provider MEP level (high)
l 0x05: consumer MEP level (low)
l 0x06: consumer MEP level (medium)
l 0x07: consumer MEP level (high)
NOTE
Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates
the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.

A.3.82 ETH_CFM_RDI
Description
The ETH_CFM_RDI is an alarm indicating the CCM packet with RDI received from the remote
MEP. This alarm occurs when the system receives the CCM packet with RDI from the remote
maintenance end point (MEP).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3,
Parameter 4 (Port)
Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
437
Name Meaning
Parameter 5, Parameter 6 (VLAN ID) Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.
Parameter 7 (Direction) Indicates the direction of the local MEP.
l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive.
l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction.
l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.
Parameter 8 (Level) Indicates the MD level of the local MEP.
l 0x00: operator MEP level (low)
l 0x01: operator MEP level (medium)
l 0x02: operator MEP level (high)
l 0x03: provider MEP level (low)
l 0x04: provider MEP level (high)
l 0x05: consumer MEP level (low)
l 0x06: consumer MEP level (medium)
l 0x07: consumer MEP level (high)
NOTE
Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates the
supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.
Parameter 9, Parameter 10 (RMEPID) Indicates the ID of the remote MEP.
Impact on the System
l When the ETH_CFM_RDI alarm occurs, the loopback (LB) and link trace (LT) detection
functions of Ethernet service OAM are unavailable.
l The service between the relevant standard MEPs may be interrupted.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The remote MEP fails to receive the correct CCM packet.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The remote MEP fails to receive the correct CCM packet.
1. Determine the alarmed port according to the alarm parameter.
2. Check whether the remote MEP that is connected to the port reports the
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE, ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI, or ETH_CFM_LOC alarm.
----End
Related Information
The Table A-9 describes the meanings of the parameters in the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm reported
by the EoS/EoPDH plane.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
438
Table A-9 Alarm Parameters
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 MD
Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 MA
Parameter 9, Parameter 10 MEP ID
Parameter 11 to Parameter 14 Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
When these parameters indicate the
VCTRUNK ID, parameter values = (0x01 -
0x10) + 0x80.
Parameter 15, Parameter 16 Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.
Parameter 17 Indicates the direction of the local MEP.
l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive.
l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction.
l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.
Parameter 18 Indicates the MD level of the local MEP.
l 0x00: operator MEP level (low)
l 0x01: operator MEP level (medium)
l 0x02: operator MEP level (high)
l 0x03: provider MEP level (low)
l 0x04: provider MEP level (high)
l 0x05: consumer MEP level (low)
l 0x06: consumer MEP level (medium)
l 0x07: consumer MEP level (high)
NOTE
Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates
the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.
Parameter 19, Parameter 20 Indicates the ID of the remote MEP.
NOTE
If the alarmed port is a VCTRUNK, these
parameters are not supported.

A.3.83 ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
Description
The ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI is an alarm indicating the errored frame. This alarm occurs when
the system receives invalid CCM packets.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
439
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3,
Parameter 4 (Port)
Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
Parameter 5, Parameter 6 (VLAN ID) Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.
Parameter 7 (Direction) Indicates the direction of the local MEP.
l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive.
l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction.
l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.
Parameter 8 (Level) Indicates the MD level of the local MEP.
l 0x00: operator MEP level (low)
l 0x01: operator MEP level (medium)
l 0x02: operator MEP level (high)
l 0x03: provider MEP level (low)
l 0x04: provider MEP level (high)
l 0x05: consumer MEP level (low)
l 0x06: consumer MEP level (medium)
l 0x07: consumer MEP level (high)
NOTE
Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates the
supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.
Impact on the System
l When the ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI alarm occurs, the LB and LT detection functions of
Ethernet service OAM are unavailable.
l The service may become abnormal due to the loop.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: No remote MEP is configured.
l Cause 2: The configuration of the MEPs at both ends is inconsistent. For example, the
connectivity check (CC) periods are different, and the IDs of the MEPs are in conflict.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
440
l Cause 3: The service is looped back and the looped packet is received.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: No remote MEP is configured.
1. Check whether the remote MEP is configured. If not, configure the remote MEP first.
Step 2 Cause 2: The configuration of the MEPs at both ends is inconsistent. For example, the
connectivity check (CC) periods are different, and the IDs of the MEPs are in conflict.
1. Check whether the CC periods set at the MEPs are the same.
If... Then...
The CC periods are different Change the CC periods to ensure consistency at both
ends.
The CC periods are the same Go to the next step.
2. Check whether the IDs of the MEPs in the maintenance domain are in conflict.
If... Then...
The IDs are in conflict Change the conflicting IDs.
The IDs are not in conflict Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The service is looped back and the looped packet is received.
1. Check whether any loop exists at each IP port of the service trail. If yes, release the loop
and clear the alarm.
----End
Related Information
The Table A-10 describes the meanings of the parameters in the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm
reported by the EoS/EoPDH plane.
Table A-10 Alarm Parameters
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 MD
Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 MA
Parameter 9, Parameter 10 MEP ID
Parameter 11 to Parameter 14 Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
When these parameters indicate the
VCTRUNK ID, parameter values = (0x01 -
0x10) + 0x80.
Parameter 15, Parameter 16 Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
441
Name Meaning
Parameter 17 Indicates the direction of the local MEP.
l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive.
l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction.
l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.
Parameter 18 Indicates the MD level of the local MEP.
l 0x00: operator MEP level (low)
l 0x01: operator MEP level (medium)
l 0x02: operator MEP level (high)
l 0x03: provider MEP level (low)
l 0x04: provider MEP level (high)
l 0x05: consumer MEP level (low)
l 0x06: consumer MEP level (medium)
l 0x07: consumer MEP level (high)
NOTE
Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates
the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.

A.3.84 ETH_EFM_DF
Description
The ETH_EFM_DF is an alarm indicating negotiation failure. This alarm occurs when the point-
to-point OAM protocol negotiation fails at the Ethernet port.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
442
Name Meaning
Parameter 1
Indicates the reason why the negotiation fails.
l 0x01: The local link is faulty.
l 0x02: The local end fails to receive any OAM packets in a specified period.
l 0x03: The OAM settings of the opposite end do not meet the requirements of
the local end.
l 0x04: The OAM settings of the local end do not meet the requirements of the
opposite end.
Impact on the System
When the ETH_EFM_DF alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed port may be interrupted.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The physical port of the local end is faulty.
l Cause 2: The point to point OAM protocol is not enabled at the opposite end.
l Cause 3: The OAM configuration at both ends is inconsistent.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The physical port of the local end is faulty.
1. Check whether the physical port is faulty. If yes, replace the board where the Ethernet
port is located.
Step 2 Cause 2: The point to point OAM protocol is not enabled at the opposite end.
1. Enable the point to point OAM protocol at the opposite end.
Step 3 Cause 3: The OAM configuration at both ends is inconsistent.
1. Reconfigure the point to point OAM protocol and ensure the consistency at both ends.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.85 ETH_EFM_EVENT
Description
The ETH_EFM_EVENT is an alarm indicating the performance event reported on the opposite
NE. This alarm occurs when the local end receives the link error indication packet (OAMPDUM)
from the opposite end.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
443
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1
Indicates the type of the link event.
l 0x01: errored symbol period.
l 0x02: errored frame.
l 0x03: errored frame period.
l 0x04: errored frame seconds summary.
Impact on the System
When the ETH_EFM_EVENT alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed port may be interrupted.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The physical port at the local end is faulty.
l Cause 2: The equipment at the opposite end is faulty.
l Cause 3: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet optical
port).
l Cause 4: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet electrical
port).
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The physical port at the local end is faulty.
1. Check whether the physical port is faulty. If yes, replace the board where the Ethernet
port is located.
Step 2 Cause 2: The equipment at the opposite end is faulty.
1. Rectify the fault of the equipment at the opposite end.
Step 3 Cause 3: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet optical port).
1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite site and the receive power at the local
site meet the specifications of the optical ports. For details, see Browsing Current
Performance Events.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
444
If... Then...
The transmit power at the opposite site is
too low
Replace the optical module at the
opposite site.
The transmit power at the opposite site is
normal, but the receive power at the local
site is close to the receiver sensitivity (for
example, a difference within 3 dB)
A fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
2. If a fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical
distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out from the equipment room are pressed,
and whether any fiber connector is dirty or damaged. If yes, clean or replace the fiber
connector, or replace the fiber jumper. Check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 1 or 2.
Step 4 Cause 4: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet electrical port).
1. Check whether the cable grounding, cable connectors, and cables are damaged. If yes,
replace the faulty cables.
2. Check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 1 or 2.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.86 ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK
Description
The ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK is an alarm indicating the loopback. This alarm occurs when the
local end initiates a loopback or responds to a loopback request from the opposite end.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
445
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1
Indicates the state of the loopback.
l 0x01: The local end initiates a loopback.
l 0x02: The local end responds to a loop request from the opposite end.
Impact on the System
When the ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed port is looped back.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The local end initiates a loopback.
l Cause 2: The opposite end initiates a loopback.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local end initiates a loopback.
1. According to the alarm parameter, it is determined that the local end initiates a loopback.
Determine the causes of the loopback initiated at the local end and release the loopback as
soon as possible.
Step 2 Cause 2: The opposite end initiates a loopback.
1. According to the alarm parameter, it is determined that the opposite end initiates a loopback.
Determine the causes of the loopback initiated at the opposite port and release the loopback
as soon as possible.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.87 ETH_EFM_REMFAULT
Description
The ETH_EFM_REMFAULT is an alarm indicating the fault on the opposite NE. This alarm
occurs when the local end receives the fault indication packet (OAMPDUM) from the opposite
end.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
446
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1
Indicates the fault type at the opposite end.
l 0x01: link fault.
l 0x02: dying gasp.
l 0x03: critical event.
Impact on the System
When the ETH_EFM_REMFAULT alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed port may be
interrupted.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The opposite NE is reset.
l Cause 2: The opposite NE is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE is reset.
1. Check whether the opposite NE is reset frequently.
If... Then...
The opposite NE is reset frequently Rectify the fault on the opposite NE.
The opposite NE is not reset frequently Reset the opposite NE, and the alarm is
cleared.
Step 2 Cause 2: The opposite NE is faulty.
1. Rectify the fault on the opposite NE.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.88 ETH_LOS
Description
The ETH_LOS is an alarm indicating the loss of Ethernet port connection.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
447
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the ETH_LOS alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed port is interrupted.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The negotiation fails because the transmit port and receive port work in different
modes.
l Cause 2: The cable or fiber is faulty.
l Cause 3: The local receive end is faulty.
l Cause 4: The remote transmit end is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The negotiation fails because the transmit port and receive port work in different modes.
1. Check whether the transmit port and receive port work in the same mode.
If... Then...
The transmit port and receive port work
in different modes
Correctly set the working modes of the
transmit port and receive port.
The transmit port and receive port work
in the same mode
Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The cable or fiber is faulty.
1. Check the network cable or fiber jumper connected to the alarmed port.
If... Then...
The network cable is loose or damaged Connect the network cable properly or
replace the damaged network cable.
The connector of the fiber jumper is dirty Clean the connector.
The connector or fiber is damaged Insert the connector properly or replace the
damaged fiber jumper.
The connection is normal Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The local receive end is faulty.
1. Check whether any fault occurs on the alarmed port.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
448
If... Then...
The equipment is faulty Replace the alarmed board on the local.
The equipment is normal Go to Cause 4.
Step 4 Cause 4: The remote transmit end is faulty.
1. Check whether any fault occurs on the equipment interconnected with the alarmed port.
2. Rectify the fault.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.89 ETH_NO_FLOW
Description
The ETH_NO_FLOW is an alarm indicating that the Ethernet port has no flow. This alarm is
reported when an enabled Ethernet port is in link up state but has no flow.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Service alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the MAC port number.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3
Indicate the path ID.
Parameter 2 indicates the most significant bits and the value is
always 0x00. Parameter 3 indicates the least significant bits and the
value is always 0x01.
Parameter 4 Indicates the direction in which the flow is unavailable.
l 0x00: Rx direction.
l 0x01: Tx direction.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
449
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, it indicates that the alarmed port has no flow.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The port is enabled and in link up state, but is configured with no service.
l Cause 2: The port is enabled and in link up state, but does not transmit any packet due to
the service fault at the local end.
l Cause 3: The port is enabled and in link up state, but does not receive any packet due to
the service fault at the remote end.
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the MAC port number, alarmed board, and cause according to the parameters.
Step 2 Cause 1: No services are configured.
1. Configure the Ethernet service.
Step 3 Cause 2: No services are available.
If... Then...
No services are available in the transmit
direction
Check whether the service is normal at the
local end.
No services are available in the receive
direction
Check whether the service is normal at the
remote end.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.90 ETH_PWR_SUPPLY_FAIL
Description
The ETH_PWR_SUPPLY_FAIL is an alarm indicating a power outputting failure of an Ethernet
port. This alarm is reported when an Ethernet port is enabled with the PE function but outputs
no power.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
450
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, the NE that is connected to the Ethernet port outputs no power.
Possible Causes
l Cause: The board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The board is faulty.
1. 6.7 Replacing the Ethernet Interface Board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.91 ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL
Description
The ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL alarm indicates a discovery failure when the point-to-point
ETH-OAM function is enabled. This alarm occurs when the OAM function is enabled at a port
of a board and the negotiation between the port and the opposite equipment fails.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1
Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3
The values are always 0x00 0x01.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
451
Name Meaning
Parameter 4 Indicates the reason why the negotiation fails.
l 0x01: A fault occurs at the local receive link.
l 0x02: The local end fails to transmit OAM packets.
l 0x03: The OAM packets from the opposite end are not received.
l 0x04: The OAM configuration of the opposite end does not meet
the requirements of the local end.
l 0x05: The OAM configuration of the local end does not meet
the requirements of the opposite end.
l 0x06-0xff: other unknown reasons.
Impact on the System
The OAM function based on IEEE 802.3ah is unavailable.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The physical port of the local end is faulty.
l Cause 2: The P2P OAM protocol is not enabled at the opposite end.
l Cause 3: The OAM configuration at both ends is inconsistent.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The physical port of the local end is faulty.
1. Check whether the physical port is faulty. If yes, replace the alarmed board.
Step 2 Cause 2: The P2P OAM protocol is not enabled at the opposite end.
1. Enable the P2P OAM protocol at the opposite end. For details, see Enabling the OAM
Auto-Discovery Function.
Step 3 Cause 3: The OAM configuration at both ends is inconsistent.
1. Reconfigure the P2P OAM protocol and ensure the consistency at both ends. For details,
see Enabling the OAM Auto-Discovery Function.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.92 ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT
Description
The ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT is an alarm indicating that the point-to-point Ethernet
OAM detects a critical fault at the remote end. This alarm occurs when a port with the OAM
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
452
function enabled receives the OAM packets that contain critical fault information from the
opposite end.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1
Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3
The values are always 0x00 0x01.
Parameter 4 Indicates the type of the fault.
l 0x01: A link fault occurs at the port of the opposite end.
l 0x02: Irrecoverable problems such as the power failure occur at
the opposite end.
l 0x03-0xff: other faults.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, the services on the link may be interrupted.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: A link fault occurs at the remote MEP.
l Cause 2: Irrecoverable problems such as power failure occur at the remote MEP.
l Cause 3: Other faults occur at the remote MEP.
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the fault type according to Parameter 4.
If... Then...
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 Go to Cause 1.
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 Go to Cause 2.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
453
If... Then...
Parameter 4 is a value from 0x03 to 0xff. Go to Cause 3.
Step 2 Cause 1: A link fault occurs at the remote MEP.
1. Handle the ETH_LOS alarm at the remote port.
Step 3 Cause 2: Irrecoverable problems such as power failure occur at the remote MEP.
1. Handle the problems such as power failure at the remote MEP, and recover the power supply
to the remote MEP.
Step 4 Cause 3: Other faults occur at the remote MEP.
1. Contact Huawei technical support engineers.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.93 ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP
Description
The ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP is an alarm indicating that a remote loopback is initiated when the
point-to-point Ethernet OAM function is enabled. This alarm occurs when the local equipment
initiates a remote loopback or responds to the remote loopback initiated by the opposite
equipment.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1
Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3
The values are always 0x00 0x01.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
454
Name Meaning
Parameter 4
l 0x01: The loopback is initiated.
l 0x02: The loopback is responded.
Impact on the System
The services are looped back between the local equipment and the opposite equipment. The
services and other protocol packets are interrupted.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The local end issues a loopback command and the opposite end responds to the
command.
l Cause 2: The opposite end issues a loopback command and the local end responds to the
command.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the alarm on the NMS and determine the type of loopback according to the alarm
parameters.
If... Then...
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 Go to Cause 1.
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 1: The local end issues a loopback command and the opposite end responds to the
command.
1. Determine the causes of the loopback at the local end and release the loopback.
Step 3 Cause 2: The opposite end issues a loopback command and the local end responds to the
command.
1. Determine the causes of the loopback at the opposite end and release the loopback.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.94 ETHOAM_RMT_SD
Description
The ETHOAM_RMT_SD alarm indicates that the point-to-point Ethernet-OAM detects the
degradation of remote Ethernet performance. This alarm occurs when a port with the OAM
function enabled receives link event notification packets from the opposite end.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
455
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1
Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3
The values are always 0x00 0x01.
Parameter 4 Indicates the type of the received link event.
l 0x01: errored frame event
l 0x02: errored frame period event
l 0x03: errored frame second event
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, the performance of services degrades.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The link event notification function is enabled at the opposite end.
l Cause 2: The link performance thresholds of the opposite end are inappropriate.
l Cause 3: The link performance deteriorates.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The link event notification function is enabled at the opposite end.
1. Check whether the link event notification function is enabled at the opposite end.
If... Then...
If yes Disable the link event notification function at the opposite end.
If not Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The link performance thresholds of the opposite end are inappropriate.
1. Check whether the link performance thresholds of the opposite end are appropriate.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
456
If... Then...
If not Set the thresholds to appropriate values.
If yes Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The link performance deteriorates.
1. Improve the link performance at the opposite end so that the opposite end does not send
any link event notification packet to the local end. Then, the alarm at the local end is cleared
automatically.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.95 ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
Description
The ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP is an alarm indicating the loopback of the MAC port that runs the
point-to-point OAM protocol. This alarm occurs when the MAC port of a board receives the
OAM protocol packet sent by the port itself or the board after the loop detection function is
enabled.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Environmental alarms
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the loopback type.
l 0x01: selfloop of the port.
l 0x02: selfloop of the board.
Impact on the System
When the ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP alarm occurs, a network storm may occur due to the
loopback.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
457
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The cable connected to the port is self-looped, or the port is connected to a LAN
that has a loopback, or the PHY/MAC loopback is manually configured at the port.
l Cause 2: Two ports of the board are connected through cables or two ports of the board are
connected to the same LAN.
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the loopback type according to Parameter 1, and then handle the loopback
accordingly.
If... Then...
The value of Parameter 1 is 0x01 Go to Cause 1.
The value of Parameter 1 is 0x02 Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 1: The cable connected to the port is self-looped, or the port is connected to a LAN that
has a loopback, or the PHY/MAC loopback is manually configured at the port.
If... Then...
The PHY/MAC loopback is manually
configured at the port
Manually release the PHY/MAC loopback (or
wait five minutes for the automatic release by
the NE if the automatic loopback release
function is enabled on the NE). Then, the
selfloop is released.
The cable connected to the port is self-
looped
Connect the cable properly to release the
selfloop.
The port is connected to a LAN that has a
loopback
Release the loopback on the LAN, or break the
connection between the port and the LAN, to
release the selfloop.
Step 3 Cause 2: Two ports of the board are connected through cables or two ports of the board are
connected to the same LAN.
1. Check whether two ports of the board are connected through cables or whether two ports
of the board are connected to the same LAN.
If... Then...
The two ports are connected through
cables
Disconnect the cables to release the
selfloop.
The two ports are connected to the same
network
Break the connection between a port and the
LAN to release the selfloop.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
458
A.3.96 ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LOOP
Description
The ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LOOP alarm indicates that a VCTRUNK port is looped back when
the point-to-point Ethernet OAM function is enabled. This alarm occurs when the loopback
detection function is enabled and the VCTRUNK port receives the OAM protocol packets
transmitted by the port itself or the board where the VCTRUNK port resides.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Environment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the loopback type.
l 0x01: The port is self-looped.
l 0x02: The board is self-looped.
l 0x03-0xff: unknown types.
Impact on the System
If the function of automatic shutdown in the case of a selfloop is enabled at the alarmed port,
the services at the alarmed port are interrupted. Otherwise, a network storm may occur.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: A loopback occurs on the lines connected to one VCTRUNK.
l Cause 2: The lines connected to two VCTRUNKs on the same board are interconnected.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the alarm on the NMS and determine the type of loopback according to the alarm
parameters.
If... Then...
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 Go to Cause 1.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
459
If... Then...
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 1: The port is self-looped.
1. Release the loopback at the port.
2. Reconfigure the lines connected to the VCTRUNK port and ensure that the port is not self-
looped.
Step 3 Cause 2: The board is self-looped.
1. Reconfigure the lines connected to the VCTRUNK ports and ensure that the lines connected
to any two VCTRUNK ports on the same board are not interconnected.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.97 EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
Description
The EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS is an alarm indicating the loss of periodic connectivity check
(CC) packets. This alarm occurs when the sink MEP fails to receive CC packets from the same
source MEP in a period (3.5 transmission periods of CC packets at the source MEP).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Indicates the ID of the remote MEP.
Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 Indicates the ID of the local MEP.
Parameter 9, Parameter 10 Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
l PORT number, Parameter 9 is 0x00.
l VCTRUNK number, Parameter 9 is 0x80.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
460
Name Meaning
Parameter 11, Parameter 12 Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.
Parameter 13 Indicates the MD level of the local MEP.
Parameter 14 to Parameter 17 Indicates the ID of the remote MEP.
Parameter 18 - Parameter 21
Indicates the ID of the local MEP.
Impact on the System
A unidirectional connectivity failure occurs in the Ethernet service between two MEPs.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The line between two MEPs is interrupted.
l Cause 2: The Ethernet services in the MA to which the alarmed MEP belongs are faulty.
l Cause 3: The services between two MEPs are congested or interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line between two MEPs is interrupted.
1. Check whether the physical links (such as network cables or optical fibers) that carry
services between the two MEPs are correctly connected.
If... Then...
If not Re-connect the cables to rectify the faults on physical links.
If yes Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The Ethernet services in the MA to which the alarmed MEP belongs are faulty.
1. Check whether the Ethernet services in the MA to which the alarmed MEP belongs are
configured correctly.
If... Then...
If not Modify the configuration to ensure consistency at both ends.
If yes Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The services between two MEPs are congested or interrupted.
1. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or
eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
461
A.3.98 EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT
Description
The EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT is an alarm indicating the conflict of MPIDs. This alarm
occurs when two MEPs in one MD have the same maintenance point identity (MPID) and one
MEP receives the packets from the other MEP.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Environment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Indicates the ID of the local MEP.
Parameter 5, Parameter 6 Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
l PORT number, Parameter 9 is 0x00.
l VCTRUNK number, Parameter 9 is 0x80.
Parameter 7, Parameter 8 Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.
Parameter 9 Indicates the MD level of the local MEP.
Parameter 10 to Parameter 13
Indicates the ID of the local MEP.
Impact on the System
MPIDs must be unique on a network. When this alarm occurs, the LB and LT functions are
abnormal and OAM packets are received incorrectly.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: At least two MEPs in an MD have the same MPID.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: At least two MEPs in an MD have the same MPID.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
462
1. Check the alarm on the NMS and determine the associated MP ID according to the alarm
parameters.
2. Query the information about the MEP. Delete the incorrect MEPs and create MEPs with
unique MP IDs.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.99 EXT_SYNC_LOS
Description
The EXT_SYNC_LOS is an alarm of the loss of the external clock source.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1
l 0x01: the first external clock source
l 0x02: the second external clock source
Impact on the System
l When the EXT_SYNC_LOS alarm occurs, if only the external clock source and internal
clock source are configured in the clock source priority list, the NE traces the internal clock
source after the external clock source is lost and enters the free-run state 24 hours later.
The system saves 24-hour holdover data. The system works in 24-hour holdover mode
instead of permanent holdover mode.
l If another valid clock source of higher priority and good quality is configured in the clock
source priority list, however, the clock protection switching occurs.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The external clock source is configured in the clock source priority list, but the external
clock source cannot be detected or become invalid.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
463
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The external clock source is configured in the clock source priority list, but the external
clock source cannot be detected or become invalid.
1. Check whether the equipment that provides the external clock source is faulty.
If... Then...
The equipment is faulty Rectify the fault.
The equipment is normal Go to the next step.
2. Check whether the cable that connects the external clock source is normal.
If... Then...
The cable is abnormal Replace the cable.
The cable is normal Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.100 EXT_TIME_LOC
Description
The EXT_TIME_LOC is an alarm of the loss of the external time source.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1
l 0x01: link failure on a port
l 0x02: unchanged second value in time of day (TOD) information, or
unavailable second pulse, or degraded second pulse
l 0x03: CRC errors in TOD information
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
464
Impact on the System
The time of a local NE cannot be synchronized to the external time device to which the NE's
enabled external time port is connected.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The link at a port is faulty.
l Cause 2: The external time device is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The link at a port is faulty.
1. Check cable connections. If cables are incorrectly connected, connect the cables again.
Step 2 Cause 2: The external time device is faulty.
1. Check whether the external time device is faulty.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.101 FAN_AGING
Description
The FAN_AGING is an alarm of the aged fan. This alarm occurs when the fan rotates at a speed
lower than eighty percent of the nominal speed.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the number of the alarmed fan.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
465
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, the temperature of the NE is too high and impacts the long-term
operation of the NE.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The fan is aged.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The fan is aged.
1. Replace the fan.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.102 FAN_FAIL
Description
The FAN_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the fan is faulty.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the number of the fan.
Impact on the System
When the FAN_FAIL alarm occurs, the heat dissipation of the system is affected.
After an alarm is reported, clear it immediately. Otherwise, services may be interrupted or
equipment may be damaged.
When a fan is faulty, perform the following operations:
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
466
l Replace the faulty fan with one that works properly within a period of 96 hours if the
ambient temperature ranges from 0C to 40C.
l Replace the faulty fan with one that works properly within a period of 24 hours if the
ambient temperature is higher than 40C.
When multiple fans are faulty, replace them immediately.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The board and the backplane are connected improperly.
l Cause 2: Fan failure occurs.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The board and the backplane are connected improperly.
1. Remove the fan board. Clean the dust on the fan and reinsert the fan board.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the board is
removed and inserted
The fault is rectified. End the alarm
handling.
The alarm persists after the board is
removed and inserted
Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: Fan failure occurs.
1. Replace the alarmed fan board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.103 FCS_ERR
Description
The FCS_ERR is an alarm indicating the errors of frame check sequence (FCS). This alarm
occurs when a board detects FCS errors in the received frames.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm
Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide A Alarm Reference
Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
467
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN. For details
about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1
The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3
Indicate the VCTRUNK number where the alarm occurs.
Impact on the System
When the FCS_ERR alarm occurs